Physics

Grade thresholds – November 2017
Cambridge IGCSE Physics (0625)

Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0625 (Physics) in the November 2017 examination.
minimum raw mark required for grade:

maximum raw
mark A B C D E F G
available
Component 11 40 – – 23 20 18 16 14
Component 12 40 – – 21 19 17 15 13
Component 13 40 – – 22 20 17 15 13
Component 21 40 27 23 20 17 15 13 11
Component 22 40 28 24 21 18 16 14 12
Component 23 40 28 24 21 18 16 13 10
Component 31 80 – – 55 49 41 33 25
Component 32 80 – – 47 40 32 25 18
Component 33 80 – – 54 46 39 31 23
Component 41 80 49 40 31 27 21 15 9
Component 42 80 53 43 33 29 22 16 10
Component 43 80 45 35 26 23 18 14 10
Component 51 40 30 27 24 20 17 14 11
Component 52 40 29 25 22 19 16 14 12
Component 53 40 27 24 21 18 16 14 12
Component 61 40 29 26 23 20 17 14 11
Component 62 40 28 24 21 18 16 14 12
Component 63 40 26 22 19 16 14 11 8
Grade A* does not exist at the level of an individual component.
The maximum total mark for this syllabus, after weighting has been applied, is 200.
The overall thresholds for the different grades were set as follows.
Combination of
Option A* A B C D E F G
Components
BX 21, 41, 51 149 130 111 93 79 66 52 38
BY 22, 42, 52 155 135 115 95 81 68 55 42
BZ 23, 43, 53 142 123 104 85 74 63 51 39
CX 21, 41, 61 148 129 110 92 79 66 52 38
Learn more! For more information please visit www.cambridgeinternational.org/igcse or contact Customer Services
on +44 (0)1223 553554 or email info@cambridgeinternational.org
Grade thresholds continued
Combination of
Components
CY 22, 42, 62 154 134 114 94 81 68 55 42
CZ 23, 43, 63 142 122 102 83 72 61 48 35
FX 11, 31, 51 – – – 127 111 95 79 63
FY 12, 32, 52 – – – 112 97 82 68 54
FZ 13, 33, 53 – – – 122 106 90 75 60
GX 11, 31, 61 – – – 126 110 95 79 63
GY 12, 32, 62 – – – 111 96 82 68 54
GZ 13, 33, 63 – – – 120 104 88 72 56
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS 0625/51
Paper 5 Practical Test October/November 2017
CONFIDENTIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Great care should be taken to ensure that any confidential information given does not reach the
candidates either directly or indirectly.
* 5 4 6 6 4 4 4 8 0 5 *
If you have any queries regarding these Confidential Instructions, please contact Cambridge stating the Centre
number, the nature of the query and the syllabus number quoted above.
email info@cie.org.uk
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 7 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (NH) 133343/5
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2
Instructions for preparing apparatus
The Supervisor is not allowed to consult the Question Paper before the examination. This teacher
should, as part of the preparation of the examination requirements, test the apparatus in order to
ensure that it is satisfactory.
The Supervisor is asked to give (and attach to the Supervisor’s Report printed on pages 7 and 8) a
brief description of the apparatus supplied, mentioning any points that are likely to be of importance
to the Examiner in marking the answers. The Supervisor should also report any assistance given to
candidates. All reports should be signed by the Supervisor.
In addition to the usual equipment of a physics laboratory, each candidate will require the apparatus
specified in these Confidential Instructions. If a candidate breaks any of the apparatus, or loses any of
the material supplied, the matter should be rectified and a note made in the Supervisor’s Report.
Number of sets of apparatus
As a minimum, the number of sets of apparatus provided should be N / 3, where N is the number of
candidates (per session). A few spare sets should, preferably, be available to avoid any candidate
being delayed when moving to another question.
The order in which a given candidate attempts the four questions is immaterial. It is suggested
that candidates spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3 and about 15 minutes on
question 4.
Assistance to candidates
The purpose of the Physics Practical Test is to find out whether the candidates can carry out simple
practical work themselves. The Examiners are aware that candidates may sometimes be unable to
show their practical ability through failure to understand some point in the theory of the experiment.
If an Examiner were present in the laboratory, he/she would be willing to give a hint to enable such a
candidate to get on with an experiment. In order to overcome this difficulty, the Supervisor is asked to
cooperate with the Examiners to the extent of being ready to give (or allow the physics teacher to give)
a hint to a candidate who is unable to proceed.
The following regulations must be strictly adhered to.
(i) No hint may be announced to the candidates as a whole.
(ii) A candidate who is unable to proceed and requires assistance must come up to the Supervisor
and state the difficulty. Candidates should be told that the Examiners will be informed of any
assistance given in this way.
(iii) A report must be made of any assistance given to the candidate, with the name and candidate
number of the candidate.
It is suggested that the following announcement be made to the candidates.
‘The Examiners do not want you to waste time through inability to get on with an experiment. Any
candidate, therefore, who is unable to get on with the experiment after spending five minutes at it may
come to me and ask for help. I shall report to the Examiners any help given in this way, and some
marks may be lost for the help given. You may ask me for additional apparatus which you think would
improve the accuracy of your experiments, and you should say, on your script, how you use any such
apparatus supplied.’
© UCLES 2017 0625/51/CI/O/N/17

3
Question 1
Items to be supplied by the Centre (per set of apparatus, unless otherwise specified)
(i) Metre rule with a mm scale. See note 1.

(ii) Triangular block to act as a pivot for the metre rule. This block is to stand on the bench.
(iii) A 200 g mass, labelled P. See notes 2 and 3.
(iv) Masses of 100 g, 200 g, 300 g, 400 g and 500 g labelled 1.0 N, 2.0 N, 3.0 N, 4.0 N and 5.0 N,
respectively. See note 2.
Notes
1. If the metre rule has two scales in opposite directions, one scale must be taped over.
2. Any suitable masses that can rest on the metre rule can be used.
3. The value of the mass of P must not be visible to the candidates.
Action at changeover
Remove the masses from the rule.

Remove the metre rule from the pivot.
Check that the apparatus is ready for the next candidate.
© UCLES 2017 0625/51/CI/O/N/17 [Turn over

4
Question 2
(i) Power supply of approximately 1.5 V–3 V. Where candidates are provided with a power
supply with a variable output voltage, the voltage must be set by the Supervisor and fixed
(e.g. taped). See note 2.
(ii) Three resistors of nominal value 4.7 Ω with a power rating of at least 2 W. See note 3.
(iii) Switch. The switch may be an integral part of the power supply.
(iv) Ammeter capable of reading up to 1.00 A, with a resolution of at least 0.05 A. See note 4.
(v) Voltmeter capable of measuring the supply p.d. with a resolution of at least 0.1 V. See note 4.
(vi) Sufficient connecting leads to construct the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1, with two additional leads.
Notes
1. The circuit is to be connected by the Supervisor as shown in Fig. 2.1.
power
supply
RA
Fig. 2.1
2. If cells are to be used, they must remain adequately charged throughout the examination. Spare
cells must be available.
3. The resistors must be labelled RA, RB and RC. The values of resistance must not be visible to
the candidates. The resistors must have suitable terminals so that candidates are able easily and
quickly to rearrange the circuit.
4. Either analogue or digital meters are suitable. Any variable settings must be set by the Supervisor
and fixed (e.g. taped). Spare meters should be available.
5. Spare leads should be available.
Set up the circuit so that it is arranged as shown in Fig. 2.1.

Check that the circuit works. Switch off.
© UCLES 2017 0625/51/CI/O/N/17

5
Question 3
(i) Converging lens, focal length approximately 15 cm, with a suitable holder.
(ii) Illuminated object with a triangular hole of height 1.5 cm (see Fig. 3.1). The hole is to be
covered with thin, translucent paper (e.g. tracing paper). See note 2.
(iii) Metre rule with a mm scale.
(iv) Screen. A white sheet of stiff card approximately 15 cm × 15 cm, fixed to a wooden support is
suitable. See Fig. 3.2.
(v) A 12 V, 24 W lamp and holder. A 12 V power supply. Spare lamps should be available.
translucent paper
adhesive tape
1.5 cm
card (screen)
support
card
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2
Notes
1. The lamp for the illuminated object should be a low voltage lamp, approximately 24 W or higher
power (a car headlamp bulb is suitable), with a suitable power supply.
2. The centre of the hole which forms the object, the lamp filament and the centre of the lens in its
holder are all to be at the same height above the bench.
3. The apparatus is to be situated away from direct sunlight.
Question 4
No apparatus is required for this question.

6
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2017 0625/51/CI/O/N/17

7
0625/51
This form must be completed and returned with the scripts.
SUPERVISOR’S REPORT
General
The Supervisor is invited to give details of any difficulties experienced by particular candidates giving
their names and candidate numbers. These should include reference to:
(a) difficulties due to faulty apparatus;
(b) accidents to apparatus or materials;
(c) any other information that is likely to assist the Examiner, especially if this cannot be discovered
in the scripts;
(d) any help given to a candidate.
Information required
A plan of workbenches, giving details by candidate number of the places occupied by the candidates
for each experiment for each session, must be enclosed with the scripts.

8
Information required (cont.)
A list by name and candidate number of candidates requiring help, with details of the help provided.
CENTRE NO. ..........................................................................................................................................
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
Declaration (to be signed by the Supervisor).
The preparation of the practical examination has been carried out so as to maintain fully the security of
the examination.
SIGNED ......................................................
Supervisor
© UCLES 2017 0625/51/CI/O/N/17

PHYSICS 0625/52
* 3 7 7 5 2 2 1 1 1 6 *
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
This document consists of 8 printed pages.
DC (ST/SG) 134122/4
2
The order in which a given candidate attempts the four questions is immaterial. It is suggested that
candidates spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and about 15 minutes on
question 4.
If an Examiner were present in the laboratory, he/she would be willing to give a hint to enable such
a candidate to get on with an experiment. In order to overcome this difficulty, the Supervisor is asked
to co-operate with the Examiners to the extent of being ready to give (or allow the physics teacher to
give) a hint to a candidate who is unable to proceed.
© UCLES 2017 0625/52/CI/O/N/17

3
Question 1
Items to be supplied by the Centre (per set of apparatus unless otherwise specified)
(i) Clamp, boss and stand.
(ii) 2 pendulum bobs. See notes 1, 2 and 3.
(iii) 2 lengths of thin string, each of length approximately 60 cm. See note 1.
(iv) Metre rule, graduated in mm.
(v) Set-square.
(vi) Stopwatch with a resolution of at least 0.1 s.
(vii) Split cork, or similar device, to hold the string of a pendulum between the jaws of the clamp.
See notes 1, 2 and 3.
Notes
1. One bob must be made from modelling clay, rolled into a spherical shape with diameter
approximately 2.0 cm. This pendulum must be set up for the candidates with length approximately
55 cm from the bottom of the split cork to the bottom of the pendulum bob. The pendulum string
must be embedded within the bob so that the pendulum can swing without the bob slipping from
the string. See Fig. 1.1.
The second bob must be made from approximately the same mass of the modelling clay as
the first bob. This is to be rolled into a cylinder of length approximately 5.0 cm, with the string
embedded within the bob so that the pendulum can swing without the bob slipping from the string.
See Fig. 1.1.
split cork held in clamp
thin string
spherical bob
cylindrical bob
thin string
bench
Fig. 1.1

4
2. Candidates must be able easily to exchange one pendulum for the other pendulum.
3. Candidates must be able easily to adjust the length of a pendulum when it is supported from the
split cork.
4. It may be necessary to increase the stability of the clamp stand, for example, by using a G-clamp
or by placing a weight on the base.
5. Spare pendulum bobs as described in note 1 must be available.
Check that the apparatus is set up as described in note 1.
Check that the bobs are the correct shape.
© UCLES 2017 0625/52/CI/O/N/17

5
Question 2
(i) Thermometer, −10 °C to 110 °C, graduated in 1 °C intervals.
(ii) 250 cm3 beaker, labelled A.
(iii) 100 cm3 or 250 cm3 measuring cylinder.
(iv) Supply of hot water. See notes 1 and 2.
(v) Supply of water at room temperature. See note 3.
(vi) Supply of paper towels to mop up any spills of water.
(vii) Stirrer.
Notes
1. Hot water is to be available for each candidate throughout the experiment. The water should be
maintained at an approximately constant temperature between 75 °C and 85 °C. Each candidate
will require about 300 cm3 of hot water in total. Candidates must be able to pour hot water into the
measuring cylinder and beaker safely.
2. Candidates should be warned of the dangers of burns or scalds when using very hot water.
3. Water at room temperature is to be available for each candidate throughout the experiment. The
supply of water must be labelled ‘cold water’. Each candidate will require about 300 cm3 of cold
water in total.
Empty the beaker and measuring cylinder.
Check the supply of hot water.
Check the supply of water at room temperature.

6
Question 3
(i) Converging lens, focal length between 14.0 cm and 16.0 cm, with a suitable holder.
(ii) Illuminated object with a triangular hole of height 1.5 cm (see Fig. 3.1). The hole is to be
covered with thin translucent paper (e.g. tracing paper). See note 2.
(iii) Metre rule, graduated in mm.
(v) Spare lamps should be available.
translucent paper
adhesive tape
1.5 cm
card (screen)
support
card
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2
Notes
power (a car headlamp bulb is suitable), with a suitable power supply.
Question 4

© UCLES 2017 0625/52/CI/O/N/17

7
0625/52
General
The Supervisor is required to give details of any difficulties experienced by particular candidates giving
in the scripts;
The space below can be used for this, or it may be on separate paper.

8
CENTRE NO. ..........................................................................................................................................
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
Declaration (to be signed by the Supervisor)
the examination.
SIGNED ......................................................
Supervisor
© UCLES 2017 0625/52/CI/O/N/17

PHYSICS 0625/53
* 6 3 7 1 2 4 8 2 8 7 *
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
DC (ST/AR) 132964/4
2
question 4.
If an Examiner were present in the laboratory, he/she would be willing to give a hint to enable such a
candidate to get on with an experiment. In order to overcome this difficulty, the Supervisor is asked to
cooperate with the Examiners to the extent of being ready to give (or allow the Physics teacher to give)
a hint to a candidate who is unable to proceed.
© UCLES 2017 0625/53/CI/O/N/17

3
Question 1
(i) Two 250 cm3 beakers, one labelled A and one labelled B. See note 1.
(ii) Lid for beaker B, with a hole to allow a thermometer to be inserted. See note 2.
(iii) Thermometer: –10 °C to 110 °C, graduated in 1 °C intervals. See note 3.
(iv) Clamp, boss and stand. See note 3.
(v) Stopclock or stopwatch or wall-mounted clock showing seconds. Candidates will be required
to take readings at 30-second intervals. They may use their own wristwatches. The question
will refer to a stopclock.
(vi) Supply of hot water. See note 4.
(vii) Paper towels to soak up any water spillages.
Notes
1. If the beakers do not have graduations at 75 cm3 and 100 cm3, indelible marks must be drawn. On
beaker A the mark must be at the 100 cm3 level and labelled 100 cm3. On beaker B the mark must
be at the 75 cm3 level and labelled 75 cm3.
2. Thin cardboard is a suitable material for the lid.

Spare lids must be available.
3. The thermometer must be supplied mounted in the clamp, so that the bulb of the thermometer will
be below the 75 cm3 level in each beaker. Candidates must be able, easily and safely, to insert the
thermometer into each beaker. The thermometer must be clamped near the top so that candidates
are able to read temperatures from the maximum temperature of the hot water.
4. Hot water is to be available for each candidate throughout the experiment. The hot water should be
will require about 250 cm3 of hot water in total.
Candidates must be able to pour hot water into the beakers safely.
5. Candidates should be warned of the dangers of burns and scalds when using very hot water.
Remove the thermometer from beaker B.

Empty the water from the beakers.
Check that the apparatus is intact.
Supply a new lid if necessary.

4
Question 2
(i) Two 2 W resistors, one approximately 5 Ω labelled X, and the other approximately 10 Ω
labelled Y. The values should be obscured so that candidates cannot read them. See note 1.
(ii) Power supply of approximately 2 V–3 V. See note 3.

Where candidates are provided with a variable power supply, the voltage should be set by the
Supervisor and fixed, e.g. taped.
(iv) Sufficient connecting leads to set up the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1, with 4 spare leads.
(v) Ammeter capable of measuring currents up to 1.00 A with a resolution of at least 0.05 A. See
note 4.
(vi) Voltmeter capable of measuring up to 3.0 V with a resolution of at least 0.1 V. See note 4.
Notes
1. The resistors must have suitable terminals so that candidates are able easily and quickly to
rearrange the circuit.
2. The circuit is to be set up for candidates as shown in Fig. 2.1.
power supply
X Y
Fig. 2.1
3. If cells are used, they must remain adequately charged throughout the examination. Spare cells
must be available.
4. Analogue or digital meters are suitable. Any variable settings should be set by the Supervisor and
fixed, e.g. taped. Spare meters should be available. The voltmeter must not be connected to the
circuit but must have leads and terminals that enable it to be connected to different parts of the
circuit.
Disconnect the voltmeter with its leads from the circuit.

Connect the circuit as shown in Fig. 2.1 and check that the circuit is working.
Switch the circuit off.
© UCLES 2017 0625/53/CI/O/N/17
5
Question 3
(i) Metre rule, graduated in mm, of weight approximately 1 N to 2 N. See notes 1 and 2.
(ii) 2 loops of thin wire. See note 1.
(iii) 1 loop of thin string. See note 3.
(iv) Forcemeter capable of reading forces up to at least 2.5 N with a resolution of 0.05 N or 0.1 N.
See note 5.
(v) 100 g mass, incorporating a hanger.
(vi) 2 bosses, 2 clamps and 2 stands.
(vii) 50 cm ruler or 30 cm ruler graduated in mm. Candidates may use their own.
(viii) Set-square. Candidates may use their own.
Notes
1. A loop of wire is to be taped securely to each end of the metre rule as shown in Fig. 3.1 so that the
metre rule can be suspended, with its scale facing upwards. Thin string is a suitable alternative.
loop of wire
tape
underside of metre rule
Fig. 3.1
2. If the metre rule has two scales in opposite directions, one scale must be taped over.
3. The loop of string must be looped around the metre rule so that the 100 g mass may be suspended
from it in different positions.

6
4. The apparatus must be set up for the candidates as shown in Fig. 3.2, with the metre rule
suspended between a clamp at the 0.0 cm end and the forcemeter at the 100.0 cm end. When the
100 g mass is suspended at the 95.0 cm mark, with the metre rule horizontal, the mass must be
clear of the bench and the clamp holding the forcemeter must be below the top of the stand.
The wires suspending the metre rule must be vertical.
The 100 g mass should be suspended near the centre of the rule.
scale facing forcemeter

upwards
metre rule
0.0 cm end 100.0 cm end
loop of string
100 g mass
Fig. 3.2
5. The forcemeter must not exceed its full scale deflection when the 100 g mass is suspended at the
95.0 cm mark. If it does, a forcemeter capable of reading higher values must be used.
Check that the apparatus is arranged as shown in Fig. 3.2 with the 100 g mass near the centre of the
rule.
Check that the wire loops are secure.
Question 4
© UCLES 2017 0625/53/CI/O/N/17

7
0625/53
General
The Supervisor is required to give details of any difficulties experienced by particular candidates, giving
(c) any other information that is likely to assist the Examiner, especially if this cannot be
discovered in the scripts;

8
CENTRE NO. ..........................................................................................................................................
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
the examination.
SIGNED ......................................................
Supervisor
© UCLES 2017 0625/53/CI/O/N/17

Cambridge Assessment International Education
PHYSICS 0625/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core) October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
® IGCSE is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

0625/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks
1 A 1
2 C 1
3 B 1
4 D 1
5 A 1
6 B 1
7 B 1
8 B 1
9 B 1
10 C 1
11 B 1
12 D 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 D 1
18 B 1
19 A 1
20 B 1
21 C 1
22 A 1
23 D 1
24 D 1
25 C 1
26 B 1
27 C 1
28 D 1
© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 3

PUBLISHED 2017
29 C 1
30 D 1
31 C 1
32 A 1
33 B 1
34 B 1
35 C 1
36 D 1
37 B 1
38 D 1
39 B 1
40 B 1

PHYSICS 0625/12
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1 B 1
2 C 1
3 D 1
4 D 1
5 A 1
6 B 1
7 A 1
8 B 1
9 C 1
10 B 1
11 B 1
12 D 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 D 1
17 D 1
18 B 1
19 C 1
20 B 1
21 A 1
22 C 1
23 D 1
24 D 1
25 A 1
26 B 1
27 C 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 C 1
30 C 1
31 A 1
32 B 1
33 B 1
34 B 1
35 C 1
36 C 1
37 D 1
38 A 1
39 B 1
40 A 1

PHYSICS 0625/13
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1 A 1
2 B 1
3 B 1
4 D 1
5 A 1
6 B 1
7 B 1
8 B 1
9 D 1
10 C 1
11 B 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 D 1
18 C 1
19 D 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 C 1
23 D 1
24 D 1
25 C 1
26 D 1
27 C 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 D 1
30 C 1
31 A 1
32 C 1
33 B 1
34 C 1
35 D 1
36 C 1
37 A 1
38 D 1
39 B 1
40 D 1

PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1 A 1
2 A 1
3 A 1
4 D 1
5 B 1
6 C 1
7 B 1
8 C 1
9 D 1
10 D 1
11 B 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 D 1
17 A 1
18 C 1
19 A 1
20 C 1
21 A 1
22 C 1
23 D 1
24 D 1
25 A 1
26 B 1
27 B 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 C 1
30 A 1
31 C 1
32 B 1
33 B 1
34 B 1
35 A 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 A 1
39 B 1
40 A 1

PHYSICS 0625/22
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 C 1
4 D 1
5 C 1
6 C 1
7 C 1
8 C 1
9 C 1
10 C 1
11 A 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 D 1
18 C 1
19 B 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 D 1
25 B 1
26 C 1
27 C 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 A 1
30 A 1
31 C 1
32 B 1
33 C 1
34 B 1
35 D 1
36 A 1
37 B 1
38 B 1
39 D 1
40 A 1

PHYSICS 0625/23
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1 A 1
2 A 1
3 A 1
4 D 1
5 C 1
6 D 1
7 D 1
8 C 1
9 C 1
10 B 1
11 D 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 A 1
18 C 1
19 C 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 C 1
23 A 1
24 D 1
25 D 1
26 D 1
27 B 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 A 1
30 B 1
31 C 1
32 C 1
33 D 1
34 B 1
35 C 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 A 1
39 C 1
40 D 1

PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Core Theory October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) stopwatch or stopclock B1
1(b) improved accuracy B1
1(c)(i) circle around 3rd OR 3.55 B1
1(c)(ii) 3.93 + 4.07 + 3.99 = 11.99 C1
(11.99 ÷ 3 =) 4.0 (s) A1
1(c)(iii) 0.40 (s) OR (c)(ii) ÷ 10 B1
2(a) Any four from: B4

Measure the distance between the two bridges
Start stopwatch when stick hits water / starts moving (with river)
stop stopwatch when stick reaches bridge Y
Use speed = distance ÷ time
repeat procedure and find average
2(b) 2nd box ticked B1

The forward force and the backward force are equal

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a) subtraction of forces to obtain resultant or 30 (N) B1
up(wards) B1
3(b) any five from: B5

measure mass (on top pan balance)
part fill measuring cylinder with water (and note volume)
submerge link in measuring cylinder
determine increase in volume
increase in volume = volume of link
use density = mass ÷ volume
Only award full marks for a viable method
4(a) 1 solar / Sun B1
2 wind B1
4(b)(i) any two from: B2

(renewable sources) are replaceable in a short time
no (atmospheric) pollution
conserves fossil fuels
do not contribute to global warming

no fuel costs
4(b)(ii) any one from: B1

dilute source of energy owtte
dependent on weather / intermittent supply

PUBLISHED 2017
5(a) solid B1
5(b) gas B1
5(c) liquid B1
5(d) gas B1
6(a) ray leaves glass at top surface B1
ray refracted away from normal B1
6(b)(i) ray reflected into glass B1
angle i = angle r by eye B1
6(b)(ii) total internal reflection B1
6(c) waves with arcs centred on gap B1
same wavelength B1

PUBLISHED 2017
7(a)(i) arrows horizontal / on line from radio to man B1
arrows in opposite direction B1
7(a)(ii) middle box ticked longitudinal B1
7(a)(iii) number in range 20–20 000 B1
hertz B1
7(a)(iv) (frequency of ultrasound) B1

is above human (hearing) range
7(b)(i) speed = dist ÷ time or any two corresponding values of distance ÷ time e.g. 600 ÷ 0.4 C1
1500 (m / s) A1
7(b)(ii) 900 (m) read from graph C1
depth = 450 (m) A1

PUBLISHED 2017
8(a) Any 3 from: B3

compass placed near magnet
direction of compass needle marked
change position of compass
repeat (above procedure)
join points( to show field lines) owtte
8(b) complete curved lines drawn in correct pattern B1
No lines crossing / symmetrical pattern B1
Correct direction indicated by arrow B1
9(a)(i) Thermistor correctly identified B1
9(a)(ii) correct symbol for voltmeter B1
Voltmeter in parallel with thermistor B1
9(b)(i) V= IR C1
(R) = 6.0 ÷ 0.010 C1
600 (ohms or Ω) A1
9(b)(ii) Resistance is decreasing B1
So current will increase B1
9(b)(iii) Current greater than 0.04 (A) B1
9(c) 700 (ohms or Ω) B1

PUBLISHED 2017
10(a)(i) Pointer(s) not on zero B1
Pointers in opposite directions B1
10(a)(ii) Any 2 from:
Increase speed of wire B2
wrap wire into a coil
Increase strength of magnet
10(b) Ns/Np = Vs/Vp OR 660 ÷ 60 = Vs ÷ 25 000 C1
Vs or output voltage = (660 / 60) × 25 000 = 11 × 25 000 C1
275 000 (V) A1
10(c) Any 2 from:
Reduced energy / power losses B2
Smaller conductors needed
Reduced voltage drop (across cable)

PUBLISHED 2017
11(a)(i) 84 B1
11(a)(ii) 126 B1
11(a)(iii) 84 B1
11(b) beta and gamma OR gamma and beta B1
11(c) 0.4 ÷ 2 = 0.2 C1
AND 0.2 ÷ 2 = 0.1 or 2 × 138 C1
276 (days) A1
12(a)(i) (They) emit ionising radiation B1
(which) damage DNA/cells/cause tumours/cancers B1
12(a)(ii) Any 2 from:
reduce exposure time B2
keep source at distance
use of suitable shielding
monitor exposure to radiation

PHYSICS 0625/32
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) 2nd line – advantage B1
3rd line – advantage B1
4th line – disadvantage B1
1(b) any three from: B3

(cold) water is pumped into the ground
warm rocks heat water / hot water turns to steam / water boils
(steam) drives or turns or moves turbine
(turbine) drives or turns or moves generator
2(a) A – accelerates (from rest) B1
B – constant speed (of 2 m / s) B1
C – accelerates at faster rate / higher acceleration than previously B1
D – faster constant speed (of 10 m / s) B1
2(b) 2 minutes = 120 s C1
area under the graph OR d = s × t OR 2 × 120 C1
240 (m) A1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a)(i) D = M / V C1
450 / 145 C1
3.1 (g / cm3) A1
3(a)(ii) W = m × g in any form C1
0.45 × 10 C1
4.5 (N) A1
3(b) P = F / A in any form C1
30 / 80 C1
0.375 (N / cm2) OR 0.38 (N / cm2) A1
4(a) (gravitational) potential (energy) B1
4(b) arrow at the lowest point of swing B1
4(c) friction / air resistance / drag B1
4(d) any three from: B3

cabin has kinetic energy
two surfaces rub together / friction
thermal energy generated / KE transferred to thermal
dissipated to surroundings / air

PUBLISHED 2017
5(a) insulator B1
5(b) Any five from: B5

conduction / slow or limited transfer of thermal energy
molecules move slower / lose kinetic energy
convection stated
as (drink cools) volume decreases
density (of cooler drink) increases
cooler water falls
evaporation (of hot water)
more energetic molecules escape / less energetic molecules remain
6(a) normal correctly positioned B1
6(a)(ii) correct reflected ray at 45° to normal B1
6(a)(iii) r correctly indicated B1
6(a)(iv) angle i = angle r B1
6(b) parallel to the incident ray at P B1
6(c) F correctly labelled / 10 cm from lens B1
10 (cm) B1

PUBLISHED 2017
7(a) green and indigo B1
7(b) radio and microwaves B1
infra-red B1
7(c) damages cells / heats cells B1
7(d) reduced exposure / leave room / move far away B1
metal apron / exposure badge / metal shielding B1
8(a) 1st row tick under orbiting the nucleus B1
2nd row tick under in the nucleus B1
3rd row tick under in the nucleus B1
8(b)(i) 6 B1
8(b)(ii) 13 B1
8(c)(i) same proton / atomic number B1
different nucleon number / number of neutrons / mass number B1
8(c)(ii) any acceptable isotope with proton number of 6 B1

PUBLISHED 2017
9(a)(i) steel B1
9(b)(i) variable resistor indicated B1
9(b)(ii) (steel) bar inside coil B1
switch closed OR current increased through coil B1
bar moved through coil (in same direction) OR current decreased and switch opened B1
9(c) at least one complete correct field line through and above coil B1
at least one complete correct field line through and below coil B1
10(a)(i) 25.6 (Ω) B1
10(a)(ii) V = IR in any form C1
0.23 × 5.6 C1
1.29 OR 1.3 A1
10(b) resistance decreases B1
current increases B1

PUBLISHED 2017
11(a) N1 / N2 = V1 / V2 C1
(49 / 900) × 220 OR use of ratios seen C1
11.98 OR 12 (V) A1
11(b) copper B1
11(c) d.c. is in one direction only / a.c. changes direction B1
12(a)(i) electric bell working owtte B1
no sound from bell / bell is quieter B1
12(a)(ii) any two from: B2

sound will travel through air / glass
sound will not cross a vacuum
sound needs a medium to travel through
12(a)(iii) vibrations B1
12(b) 20 Hz from first column B1
20 kHz from second column B1

PHYSICS 0625/33
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a)(i) A AND B cars identified B1
A = fastest AND B = slowest B1
1(a)(ii) speed = distance ÷ time in any recognised form C1
50 ÷ 4 C1
1(b)(i) 12.5 (m / s) A1
100 × 3.6 OR 360 (s) indicated C1
answers in the range 5–7 minutes A1
1(b)(ii) any one from:
car will move faster / slower at times / speed not constant B1
road will have bends / hills etc.
slower moving traffic or other sensible road conditions

PUBLISHED 2017
2(a) measuring cylinder (partially filled) with water / displacement can filled with water B4
object (submerged) into water owtte
new volume noted / displaced water collected in measuring cylinder
(volume of object = ) difference in volumes / volume of water collected
2(b) density = mass ÷ volume written in any recognised form C1
347 ÷ 18 C1
19.28 OR 19.3 (g / cm3) A1
3(a) w = m × g in any recognised form C1
2250 / 10 C1
225 (kg) A1
3(b)(i) moment = force × distance from pivot in any recognised form C1
400 × 0.4 OR 400 × 40 C1
160 OR 16 000 A1
Nm OR Ncm B1
3(b)(ii) apply force further from pivot owtte B1

PUBLISHED 2017
4(a)(i) elastic B1
4(a)(ii) elastic B1
kinetic B1
4(a)(iii) kinetic B1
thermal B1
4(b) pull band further back / exert greater force on band / increase elastic potential energy B1
5(a) Tyre B B1
larger / bigger surface area B1
less pressure (on ground) / weight distributed B1
5(b) molecules gain kinetic energy / move faster B1
more (frequent) / harder collisions (with tyre) B1
Increased / greater pressure (on tyre) B1

PUBLISHED 2017
6(a)(i) mercury B1
6(a)(ii) arrow between 0 o C and start of capillary tube B1
6(a)(iii) 0 (o C) AND 100 (o C) B1
6(b) emitter B1
conductor B1
convection B1
radiation B1
7(a) wavelength correctly indicated B1
7(b) 12 (cm) B1
7(c) 40 / 60 C1
0.67 (Hz) A1
7(d) direction of travel perpendicular to direction of vibration owtte B1
7(e) any component of the electromagnetic spectrum B1

PUBLISHED 2017
8(a)(i) top ray passes through f2 B1
bottom ray passes through f2 B1
refraction correctly shown either at centre of lens OR at both edges of lens B1
8(a)(ii) C to f2 B1
8(b)(i) critical angle B1
8(b)(ii) ray internally reflected B1
reflecting angle = incident angle B1
9(a) light travels faster than sound OR reverse argument B1
9(b) reflection (from building) / bouncing back (from building) B1
9(c) time taken for first sound = 0.5 s C1
Time taken for echo = 2.5 s OR time for sound to travel from hammer and return = 2.0 s C1
2.0 s A1
9(d) quieter / less amplitude / less energy B1

PUBLISHED 2017
10(a)(i) two curved field lines drawn above and below the magnet B1
lines start and finish at the poles of the magnet B1
10(a)(ii) both arrows point left B1
10(a)(iii) (plotting) compass B1
10(b) place end on end / see if attraction / repulsion occurs B1
repulsion at one end B1
11(a) ammeter in series B3
voltmeter across wire
two cells correctly linked positive to negative
11(b) V = IR in any recognised form C1
R = 2.7 ÷ 0.3 C1
9 (Ω) A1
11(c) 1 higher / more B1
2. lower / less B1

PUBLISHED 2017
12(a) Gamma B1
12(b) 1 helium nuclei OR nuclide notation OR 2p, 2n B1
2 low / few cm of air / stopped by paper B1
12(c) 2 half-life indicated B1
25 (%) B1

PHYSICS 0625/41
Paper 4 Extended Theory October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a)(i) Distance = area under graph OR 0.5 × 20 × 13 C1
130 m A1
1(a)(ii) (a =) (v – u) / t OR (a =) v / t OR 13 / 20 C1
0.65 m / s2 A1
1(a)(iii) (F =) ma OR 1200 × 0.65 C1
= 780 N A1
1(b) Acceleration decreases OR rate of increase of speed decreases OR speed increases at a lower rate B1
2(a) Extension of a spring is (directly) proportional to load / force / weight OR F = ke where e is extension B1
2(b)(i) Straight line drawn from origin to (64 mm, 120 N) B1
2(b)(ii) F = ke in any form OR 120 / 64 OR 120 / 6.4 OR 120 / 0.064 C1
c.a.o. 1.9 N / mm OR 19 N / cm OR 1900 N / m A1
2(c) Above 120 N / at 140 N, the spring does not obey Hooke’s law B1
OR the extension is not proportional to the load / weight / force
The elastic limit / limit of proportionality of the spring has been exceeded B1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a) (Measure of) quantity / amount of matter OR (property) that resists change in motion / speed / momentum B1
OR measure of a body’s inertia
3(b)(i) d = m / V OR in words OR 0.44 / 0.0803 OR 0.44 / 5.12 × 10–4 OR 440 / 83 OR 440 / 512 OR 0.44 / 83 OR 0.44 / 512 C1
0.86 g / cm3 OR 860 kg / m3 OR 8.6 × 10–4 kg / cm3 A1
3(b)(ii) Sinks OR does not float AND (cube) denser (than oil) B1
3(c)(i) W = mg OR (g =) W / m OR 0.70 / 0.44 C1
1.6 N / kg A1
3(c)(ii) (P =) hdg OR 0.030 × 850 × 1.6 C1
41 Pa A1
4(a) Atoms collide with wall (and rebound) OR atoms rebound from wall B1
(Atoms) undergo change of momentum C1
Force on wall = (total) rate of change of momentum (of atoms) A1

OR = change of momentum (of atoms) per second
OR = change of momentum (of atoms) / time
4(b)(i) Fewer atoms per unit volume OR density of gas less B1
Rate of collision (with walls of balloon) decreases OR Fewer collisions per unit area B1
4(b)(ii) PV = constant OR P1V2 = P2V 2 OR (P2 =) P1V1 / V2 OR 1.0 × 105 × 9.6 / 12 C1
8.0 × 104 Pa A1

PUBLISHED 2017
5(a) Tick 2nd box only B1
5(b)(i) At least 3 parallel wavefronts in shallow water sloping upwards from left to right B1
Wavefronts in shallow water meet wavefronts in deep water B1
5(b)(ii) Indication that frequency is same in deep and shallow water C1
In deep water v = fλ in any form OR (f =) v / λ OR 80 / 1.4 C1
= 57.1 (Hz) C1
Wavelength in shallow water = v / f OR 60 / 57.1 = 1.05 cm A1
OR
speed in deep water / speed in shallow water = 0.80 / 0.60 (C1)
= 1.33 (C1)
(f is constant so) λ in deep water / λ in shallow water = 1.33 (C1)
λ in shallow water = 1.4 / 1.33 = 1.05 cm (A1)

PUBLISHED 2017
6(a) 1500 m / s liquid B2

5000 m / s solid
300 m / s gas
6(b)(i) X and Y marked at centres of any two rarefactions B1
6(b)(ii) Area of low pressure or low density (of atoms) or where atoms / molecules far apart B1
6(c) v = = d / t or 2 d / t in any form C1
d = v t / 2 OR 3.0 × 108 × 2.56 / 2 C1
3.84 × 108 m OR 3.84 × 105 km A1
7(a) One ray with correct path through lens B1
Another ray with correct path through lens B1

Rays intersect to right of F and below axis, inverted image
drawn and labelled I B1
7(b) enlarged, upright and virtual only underlined or ringed B2
Two of above descriptions underlined B1
7(c) On entering prism: green ray deflection more than red ray and above normal B1
On leaving prism: diverging downwards from red ray and not along surface of prism B1

PUBLISHED 2017
8 Hydroelectric
8(a) Hydroelectric named OR water from behind dam B1
K.E. of (falling) water used / P.E. of stored water B1
Turbine / waterwheel / paddle wheel operated B1
(Turbine) turns / drives a generator (that produces electricity) B1
8(b) Rain (fills lakes in high places) B1
Cause of rain is the Sun, so renewable B1
8(c) Sun evaporates water from sea etc. to fall (later) as rain B1
Sun is the source of energy. B1
8 Tidal flow
8(a) Tides / tidal flow named B1
K.E. of water used B1
8(b) Moon (and Sun) causes tides B1
Moon (and Sun) permanently in place, so renewable B1
8(c) Attraction due to Moon’s (and Sun’s) gravity causes tides B1
Sun is a source of (part of) the energy OR Sun is not the primary source of energy B1

PUBLISHED 2017
8 Waves
8(a) Waves on surface of sea B1
K.E. of water used to oscillate a floating mechanism B1
8(b) Wind causes waves B1
Sun causes wind, so renewable B1
8(c) Winds are air currents caused by thermal energy / heat from the Sun B1
Sun is the source of energy B1

PUBLISHED 2017
9(a)(i) (3 × 1.5 =) 4.5 V B1
9(a)(ii) 1 / R = 1 / R1 + 1 / R2 OR R = 1 / (1 / R1 + 1 / R2) OR (R =) R1R2 / (R1 + R2) C1
Correct substitution of 3 and 6 C1
(R =) 2.0 Ω A1
9(a)(iii) V = IR in any form OR (I =) V / R OR 4.5 / 3 C1
1.5 A A1
OR
I total = 4.5 / 2 = 2.25 A (C1)
For 3 Ω, I = 2.25 × 6 / 9 = 1.5 A (A1)
9(b)(i) Connect ammeter (in wire) from A to B OR from H to G B1
9(b)(ii) Connect voltmeter (terminals) to A and H OR B and G OR C and D OR E and F B1

PUBLISHED 2017
10(a)(i) B1
10(a)(ii) To allow flow (of current) in one direction B1
10(b)(i) Wire from B to + or – terminal of battery and wire from A to other terminal of battery B1
Diode to allow current in at + terminal or out at – terminal B1
10(b)(ii) Alternating current in coil Y sets up alternating magnetic field OR causes change in magnetic flux B1
Alternating field / change in flux cuts coil X OR Alternating field links with coil X B1
(Alternating) voltage / current is induced in coil X B1

OR (Alternating) voltage / current is produced in coil X by electromagnetic induction

PUBLISHED 2017
11(a)(i) An electron M1
In / from / by the nucleus A1
11(a)(ii) Proton numbers balance on left and right sides of equation B1
Nucleons numbers balance on left and right sides of equation B1
0 B1
β
−1
11(b) Time for activity / count rate / number of nuclei / number of atoms to halve B1
11(c)(i) α-particles would be stopped / absorbed by the plastic / bottle B1
11(c)(ii) γ-rays would not be absorbed by the liquid / bottle OR reading not reduced (in passing through liquid / bottle) B1
OR very penetrative so no change in detector reading

PHYSICS 0625/42
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) ρ = m / V in any form OR (m =) ρ V C1

–5
OR (m =) 9000 × 7.5 × 10
(m =) 0.68 kg accept 680 g A1
1(b)(i) W = m g in any form or (W = ) m g C1

OR (W =) 0. 68 × 10
(W =) 6.8 N A1
1(b)(ii) any one of: B1

weight has direction / mass does not
weight is a vector / mass is not
weight varies / mass does not
mass is amount of matter
weight is a force / mass is not
1(c)(i) ρ = h ρ g in any form OR (ρ = ) ρ / h g C1

OR (ρ =) 560 / (0.027 × 10)
(ρ =) 2.1 × 103 kg / m3 A1
1(c)(ii) explains why there is a resultant downward force B1

PUBLISHED 2017
2(a) accelerate / increase speed OR decelerate / decrease speed OR stop B1
change direction / move in a curve o.w.t.t.e. B1
2(b) change of shape OR size B1
2(c)(i) F = m a in any form OR (a =) F / m C1

OR (a =) 3500 / 1400
(a =) 2.5 m / s2 A1
2(c)(ii) a = (v – u) / t in any form OR (t =) (v – u) / a C1

OR (t =) (30 – 0) / 2.5 OR 30 / 2.5
(t =) 12 s A1
2(c)(iii) friction / air resistance / drag B1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a) suitable fuel for a power station B1
any three from five: B3

• thermal energy / heat (from fuel)
• water / steam / gas heated OR steam produced
• (steam / gas) turns / moves / drives turbine
• (turbine) turns / moves / drives generator
• 2 correct energy transfers
3(b) sun is energy source for plants / living matter (to grow) o.w.t.t.e. B1
plant / animal (remains compressed) into fuel OR carbon / chemical energy stored / trapped in plant / animal (remains) B1
3(c) not renewable (as fuel is consumed) M1
could only be replaced over very long time period (e.g. clearly > 50 years) A1

PUBLISHED 2017
4(a)(i) any one of these six: B1

• evaporation: at surface OR no bubbles form) pair 1
• boiling: throughout liquid OR bubbles form )
• evaporation: at any temperature OR no heat needed) pair 2

• boiling: at specific temperature OR heat needed )
• evaporation: affected by draught / surface area) pair 3

• boiling: not affected by draught / surface area )
any one pair of points B1
4(a)(ii) (it / rate) increases AND {more molecules have enough energy to escape OR break bonds} B1
4(b)(i) remains constant B1
4(b)(ii) E = m l in any form OR (E =) m l C1
P = energy / t in any form OR (P =) energy / t C1
(P = 0.095 × 2.3 × 106 / (12 × 60) =) 300 W A1
5(a) any three of these five: B3

• any sensible mention of the sun (as source of energy)
• (thermal / heat / IR / electromagnetic) radiation
• white (or clearly implied) surfaces absorb less or don’t absorb
• white (or clearly implied) surfaces reflect more
• to keep house cooler OR to reduce thermal energy / heat transferred to house
5(b) decreases B1

PUBLISHED 2017
6(a)(i) diffraction B1
6(a)(ii) 4 arcs between dashed lines centred vertically at centre of gap B1
any 3 wavelengths same as incident wavelengths including wavelength from wavefront in gap B1
6(b)(i) wavefronts have smaller angular width B1

OR do not extend as far as dashed lines OR less (angular) spread
6(b)(ii) increased wavelength OR more spreading B1
use of v=f λ OR increased wavelength B1
7(a) real (answers in any order for 7(a)) B1
enlarged OR magnified B1
Inverted OR upside down B1
7(b)(i) 1st straight incident ray from close to point object to mirror correctly reflected, i = r M1
2nd straight incident ray from point object to mirror correctly reflected, i = r A1
7(b)(ii) BOTH reflected rays extended back to intersect behind mirror M1
BOTH reflected rays extended back in straight lines AND I in correct position AND {labelled OR clearly indicated} A1

PUBLISHED 2017
8(a) RS = RA + RB in any form OR (RS =) RA + RB OR (RS =) 4 + 8 C1
(RS =)12 (Ω) C1
(RP = )1 / (1 / RS + 1 / RC) in any form C1

OR (RP =) RS RC / (RS + RC)
OR (RP =) 1 / (1 / 12 + 1 / 6) OR (RP =) (6 × 12) / 18
(RP =) 4.0 Ω A1
8(b) V8 = supply V × (8 / 12 ) OR = 24 × (8 / 12) C1
(V8 =) 16 V A1
OR alternative route
I8 = supply V / 12 OR = 24 / 12 OR = 2 (A) (C1)
(V8 = 2 × 8 =) 16 V (A1)

PUBLISHED 2017
9(a)(i) A (fixed)resistor
B thermistor
C L.E.D. OR light emitting diode
2 correct B1
3 correct B1
9(a)(ii) any four from six: B1

• if cold / hot resistance of thermistor high / low
• if cold / hot voltage (across) thermistor high / low
• if cold / hot voltage of input to LED high / low
• if cold / hot there is current / no current in LED
• if cold LED lights / brighter
• if hot LED does not light / dimmer
9(b) Row A B C (output of AND) X

1 0 0 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0 0
3 1 0 0 0 0
4 1 1 0 1 1
5 0 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0 1
7 1 0 1 0 1
8 1 1 1 1 1
row 1 of X correct – answer 0 B1
rows 2 AND 3 of X correct – both answers 0 B1
rows 4–8 of X correct – all answers 1 B1

PUBLISHED 2017
10(a)(i) clockwise arrows on at least 3 circles B1
10(a)(ii) (magnetic) field becomes weaker / decreases (as distance from wire increases) B1
10(b)(i) any four from these six: B4

• charge flows OR current in solenoid / wire / circuit
• solenoid becomes magnet / magnetised
• bolt becomes magnet / magnetised
• (such that) unlike poles (of solenoid and bolt are) facing o.w.t.t.e.
• bolt is attracted
• bolt moves / (door) locks / spring stretched
10(b)(ii) solenoid OR bolt no longer magnetised OR bolt no longer attracted B1
(spring contracts and pulls) bolt back / bolt returns (to original position) / (door) unlocked B1

PUBLISHED 2017
11(a) nucleon numbers balance each side of equation B1
proton numbers balance each side of equation B1
0 B1
β
−1
11(b)(i) background radiation OR radiation from the environment B1
rocks / ground / buildings / food / space / weapons testing / nuclear accidents or waste / sun / air / radon / argon B1
11(b)(ii) random (variation) B1
11(b)(iii) clear evidence of subtracting 23 from (original) count C1
clear evidence of dividing original / corrected count by 4 A1
clear evidence of adding 23 correctly to result after division A1

PHYSICS 0625/43
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a)(i) (x = )½ vft or ½ × 12 × 30 or (x = )½ at 2 or ½ × 0.40 × 302 C1
180 m A1
1(a)(ii) (a = )∆v / t or 12 / 30 C1
0.40 (m / s2) or 12 / 30 C1
(F = )ma or 2.0 × 104 × 0.40 or 2.0 × 104 × 0.40 × 12 / 30 C1
8000 N A1
1(b) drag / friction / air resistance mentioned C1
drag / friction / air resistance increases (as speed increases) A1
2(a) (m = )ρV or 950 × 8.2 × 10–5 or 0.95 × 82 C1
7.8 / 7.79 × 10N (where N is a integer) C1
0.078 / 0.0779 kg or 78 / 77.9 g A1
2(b)(i) (p = )hρ g or 0.094 × 950 × 10 C1
890 / 893 Pa A1
2(b)(ii) atmospheric pressure (is acting) B1
2(c)(i) steel is denser (than liquid) or denser than 950 kg / m3 B1
2(c)(ii) take new reading and subtract 82 (cm3) / original reading B1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a)(i) nuclear fusion B1
3(a)(ii) nuclei combine / join together B1
small nuclei to larger nuclei or hydrogen to helium (in some way) or loss of mass B1
3(b) any suitable resource e.g. fossil fuels; hydroelectric; wave; wind M1
renewable or not (according answer) and matching explanation A1
3(c) two advantages from: no polluting gases / quiet / low maintenance / can be placed on roofs / clean / cheap to run B2
two disadvantages from: intermittent supply / unattractive / takes up space / uses land / d.c. output B2
4(a) molecules of solid arranged in lattice / in organised pattern / without gaps / orderly / fixed structure B1
4(b)(i) glass heated first or at first liquid not heated / does not expand / takes time (to heat up) or glass poor conductor B1
glass expands B1
capacity / volume of flask increases B1
4(b)(ii) liquid (starts to) warms up B1
liquid expands more than the solid / glass B1

PUBLISHED 2017
5(a) (quantity of internal) energy that raises temperature M1
per degree Celsius / per unit temperature change A1
5(b)(i) 560 / 562 / 561.6 J B1
5(b)(ii) kinetic energy / potential energy / total energy (of atoms / molecules / particles) B1
kinetic added to potential energy (of atoms / molecules / particles) B1
5(c) line from 100 °C and falling B1
falls at decreasing rate B1
levels off at labelled / approximate 22 °C B1
6(a)(i) box next to 3.0 × 108 (second box down) ticked B1
6(a)(ii) (λ = )c / f or 3.0 × 108 / 4.8 × 1014 C1
6.2 / 6.25 / 6.3 × 10–7 m A1
6(b)(i) 1. sines have no unit or sines are ratio of two lengths or ratio of two speeds (whose units cancel) or units cancel B1
2. (v =) c / n or 3.0 × 108 / 1.5 C1
2.0 × 108 m / s A1
6(b)(ii) information / message / music/sound / signal / data (encoded as pulses of light) sent B1
light (travels along fibre) or infra-red (radiation) B1
light detected (at far end) or message decoded or total internal reflection mentioned B1

PUBLISHED 2017
7(a)(i) any two rays that start at the top of the image from: M2
• seems to come from F1 to lens and emerges paraxially
• passes through centre of lens undeviated
• paraxial to the lens and passes through F2
two correct rays traced back and image indicated A1
7(a)(ii) any two of enlarged; inverted; real underlined B1
enlarged and inverted and real underlined B1
7(b) refracted ray in prism below yellow ray and above normal B1
emergent ray diverging away from the yellow ray and above side of prism B1
8(a) touch the sphere with the earth wire B1
negatively charged and electrons flow to sphere B1
remove earth wire or electrons / negative charges attracted (by rod) B1
8(b) four or more straight, radial lines and uniformly spaced B1
at least one arrow outwards and no wrong arrows B1
8(c) (I =) Q / t or 7.0 / (5.0 × 60) or 7.0 / 5.0 or 1.4 (A) C1
0.023(3333) A A1

PUBLISHED 2017
9(a)(i) cosine or sine curve and maximum value equal to |minimum value| B1
two complete cycles of 0.02 s between 0 and 0.040 s B1
9(a)(ii) point marked A where output voltage is zero B1
9(b)(i) magnetic field (due to a.c.) mentioned B1
changing / alternating (magnetic) field or field lines cut solenoid B1
e.m.f. / voltage induced (in coil) B1
9(b)(ii) diode B1
prevents / stops the backward current or allows only one direction of current B1

PUBLISHED 2017
10(a) electromagnetic (waves / rays / radiation) M1
high frequency / energy or short wavelength A1
10(b)(i) no change or (stays at) 43 B1
10(b)(ii) no change or (stays at) 99 B1
10(c)(i) (radiation) always present / due to environment / in absence of radioactive sample / natural (radiation) B1
10(c)(ii) 112 – 16 or 96 or 112 / 28 or ¼ or 18 / 2 C1
28 – 16 or 12 or 1 / 8 or 18 / 3 or 9.0 (hours) C1
6.0 hours A1
10(d) any two of: B2

• (distance): tongs / manipulator / centre of cardboard box
• (absorption): lead gloves / suit / lead glass screen / googles / glasses
• (time): limit exposure time / keep in box until needed / film badge

PHYSICS 0625/51
Paper 5 Practical October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) a = 19 – 21 1
1(b)(i) Q values 1.(0), 2.(0), 3.(0), 4.(0), 5.(0) 1
1(b)(ii) b values all less than 50 cm and decreasing 1
1(b)(iii) Correct 1 / Q values 1.(0), 0.5(0), 0.33(3), 0.25, 0.2(0) 1
1(c) Graph:
Axes correctly labelled 1
Suitable scales 1
All plots correct to ½ small square 1
Good line judgement, thin, continuous line 1
1(d) Triangle method clearly shown on graph 1
At least half line used for triangle method and G recorded 1
1(e) P correct calculation of G / a and in range 1.8 – 2.0 1

PUBLISHED 2017
2(a)(i) V to at least 1 dp and < 3 V 1
I to at least 2dp and < 1 A 1
2(a)(ii) R1 correct 1
2(b)(i),(ii) New values of V and I and R2 correct 1

AND
2 × R1 ± 10%
2(c)(i) New values of V and I with I3 < I2 1
2(c)(ii) R3 present and V, I, R units seen at least once and not contradicted 1
2(d) Statement to match readings 1

AND
Justification to include the idea of within (or beyond, ecf) the limits of experimental accuracy
2(e) Determine each resistance in turn 1
2(f) Three resistors in parallel, voltmeter in parallel with resistors and correct symbols for voltmeter and resistors 1
Variable resistor in series, correct symbol in a workable circuit 1
2(g) Repeat with different currents 1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a) Table:
v = in range 45 – 80 1
uv correct 1
D = u + v ± 1 cm 1
3(b) v = in range 25 – 35 1
D = u + v ± 1 cm 1
3(c) One from: 1

Different size / Different brightness
Sharpness / clearness / coloured edges
3(d)(i),(ii) f values both rounding to 14 – 16 (cm) 1
3(d)(iii) fA correct 1
2 or 3 significant figures 1
3(e) Any two from: 2

Difficulty deciding exact position of sharpest image
Difficulty measuring to centre of lens
Product uv increases problem
Image edges blurred / not clear
Insufficient sets of results

PUBLISHED 2017
4 MP1 Stopwatch (or equivalent) AND (metre) rule / ruler 1
MP2 Measure time for 5 (+) oscillations 1
MP3 Divide by number of oscillations to find period (T) 1
MP4 Repeat for each bob 1
MP5 Variable; one from: 1

Initial amplitude / starting position
Length of pendulum / thread
Number of oscillations
MP6 Table with column headings for t, or period (T), or both AND d, with correct units 1
MP7 Conclusion: 1
Plot graph(s) of d against period (T) or t (or vice versa)
OR compare period (T) or t values for different diameters

PHYSICS 0625/52
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) correct use of set-square AND vertical ruler 1
1(b)(i) t1 = 29.5 ± 2.5 (s) 1
1(b)(ii) correct T1 from candidate’s value of t1 1
unit s seen at least once in (i) or (ii) 1
1(c)(i) t2 = 27.7 ± 2.5 (s) 1
1(c)(ii) T2 < T1 and to 2 or 3 significant figures 1
1(d) statement to match readings 1
justification to include the idea of within (or beyond e.c.f) the limits of experimental accuracy e.g. (very) close / almost 1
equal / the same
1(e) final box ticked 1
1(f) 4 or 5 correct 1
(fewer than 4 correct = 0 marks)
From top box to bottom box V, V, V, V, P, P all correct (= full marks) 1

PUBLISHED 2017
2(a) realistic room temperature 1
2(b) realistic hot water temperature 1
mixture temperature between hot and room 1
temperature fall correct AND °C seen at least once and not contradicted 1
2(c) to make sure that the temperature is the same throughout 1
2(d) realistic new temperatures 1
2(e) realistic new temperatures 1
2(f) room temperature seen and correct conclusion 1
2(g) heat loss (to surroundings) / time delays in transferring the water 1

or did not wait for thermometer readings to stabilise
2(h) insulation 1
2(i) same starting temperature / same room temperature 1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a)(i),(ii) correct u values 20(.0), 22(.0), 25(.0), 30(.0), 35(.0) 1
v values decreasing and all > 22.0 cm 1
consistent 2 or consistent 3 significant figures for v 1
3(b) graph:
axes correctly labelled and not reversed 1
suitable scales 1
all plots correct to ½ small square 1
good best-fit curve judgement, thin, continuous line 1
3(c)(i) 2 points and straight line correct 1
3(c)(ii) u1 and v1 read correctly to ½ small square 1
3(c)(iii) correct calculation of f from candidate’s values 1
f value rounding to 14–16 cm 1

PUBLISHED 2017
4 method: 1
MP1 measure length of band
MP2 hang load, measure new length 1
MP3 repeat with different thicknesses/widths 1
control variable: 1
MP4 use same (original) length of band each time
table: 1
MP5 table with columns for thickness, (load) and
length / extension with units
conclusion: 1
MP6 plot a graph of extension / length against thickness (for the same load)
OR load against extension / length for different thicknesses
OR comparison via a table e.g. compare extensions / lengths
of different thicknesses for the same load
one additional point: 1

MP7 use same load / same range of loads
use at least 5 thicknesses / take at least 5 different readings to plot a
graph
show how to measure extension e.g. l – l0
use same type / material of rubber band

PHYSICS 0625/53
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) θ for beaker A decreasing 1
1(b)(i) θ for beaker B decreasing, more slowly than for A AND all θ values to at least 1 °C 1
1(b)(ii) units ALL correct (symbols or words) 1
t values all present (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180) 1
1(c) two appropriate precautions: 2

e.g. avoidance of parallax(only if explained)
wait until reading stops rising at start
ensure thermometer not touching beaker
1(d)(i) conclusion matching results 1
correct mention of comparative temperature change over 180 s 1
1(d)(ii) any suitable improvement relating to comparison: 1

e.g. same volume of water,
same initial temperature,
insulate sides,
use plastic beaker,
stand on mat,
use a thicker / more insulated lid,
matching explanation: 1
e.g. lid only factor changed,
cooling more rapid for higher temperatures
cooling different for different volumes,
thermal energy only escapes from surface,
less transfer of thermal energy by sides,
effect of lid more marked
any appropriate similarity:
1(d)(iii) e.g. both cool more rapidly at the start 1

PUBLISHED 2017
2(a) correct voltmeter symbol in parallel with X 1
2(b)(i) IS< 1.00 A AND to 2dp at least 1
2(b)(ii) VX<VY AND both<3.0(V) AND to 1dp at least 1
2(b)(iii) Vs within 10% of VX+VY 1
2(b)(iv) statement matching readings 1
justification, with use of values seen, matching readings and statement 1

e.g.: ‘3.5 V and 3.6 V are within limits of experimental accuracy’
2(c) correct calculation of Rs 1
2 / 3 sig figs and unit(Ω) 1
2(d) resistors in parallel with correct symbol 1
rest of circuit correct 1
2(e) IP >IS 1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a)(i) 5 F values all increasing 1
all to at least 1d.p. 1
3(b)(ii) any reliable method 1

e.g. equal distances between rule and bench in at least two places,
line up with named horizontal surface,
use of set-square between stand and rule
3(b) graph:
axes labelled with quantity and unit 1
appropriate scales (plots occupying at least ½ grid and scales starting at 0,0) 1
plots all correct to ½ small square AND precise plots 1
Well-judged line AND thin line 1
3(c)(i) F0 correct from graph 1
3(c)(ii) WR in range 1 to 3 N 1

AND 2 / 3 sig figs and unit (N)
3(d) statement matching plotted points AND explanation referring to line and scatter of data 1
3(e) repeat all readings and take average 1

PUBLISHED 2017
4 MP1 additional apparatus: screen AND (metre) rule 1
MP2 diagram: suitable arrangement of apparatus with u and v labelled correctly 1
MP3 method: 1
obtain (clear focused) image AND measure u, v
MP4 repeat for other values of u 1
MP5 one precaution for clear, focused image: 1

move screen slowly / backwards and forwards,
object AND lens AND screen perpendicular to bench / vertical,
object and lens at same height (from bench),
use of dark room / bright light
MP6 one precaution with measurements: 1

clamp rule / fix to bench,
mark centre of lens on holder

avoidance of parallax explained and specific
MP7 one additional point: 1

additional precaution,
calculate f from given equation
at least 3 values obtained,
calculate average,
mention of at least one appropriate u value,
mention of preliminary expt to obtain rough f value (e.g. light from window)

PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a)(i) 1.8 (V) 1
0.38 (A) 1
1(a)(ii) R1 4.74 (4.737, 4.7) 1
1(b) R2 = 9.47 OR 9.5 (2 or 3 significant figures required) 1
1(c) Pointer at 0.13 1
1(d) Statement YES or NO (owtte) 1

Justification to include the idea of within (or beyond, ecf) the limits of experimental accuracy, matching the statement
1(e) Determine each resistance in turn 1
1(f) Three resistors in parallel, ONE voltmeter in parallel with resistors and correct symbols for voltmeter and resistors 1
Variable resistor in series with the supply, correct symbol in a correct circuit 1
1(g) Repeat with different currents OR to obtain a range of readings 1

PUBLISHED 2017
2(a)(i),(ii) v = 6.(0) AND d = 8.(0) or v = 60 AND d = 80 1
correct matching unit 1
2(b)(i),(ii),(iii) V = 60 cm (or 10 × candidate’s v) and 1

D = 80 cm (or 10 × candidate’s d)
UV 1200 (ecf) 1
2(c) One from: 1

Different size
Different brightness
Sharpness / clearness / coloured edges
2(d)(i),(ii),(iii) f values 15(.0) 1

and 14.9 (14.87)
fA correct method 1

Difficulty deciding exact position of sharpest image
Difficulty measuring to centre of lens
Product uv increases problem
Image edges blurred / not clear
Insufficient sets of results
2(f)(i) 5 – 10 1
2(f)(ii) Difference of at least 40 cm with a range 15–100 1

PUBLISHED 2017
3 MP1 Stopwatch (or equivalent) AND (metre) rule / ruler 1
MP2 Measure time for 5 (+) oscillations 1
MP3 Divide by number of oscillations to find period (T) 1
MP4 Repeat for each bob 1
MP5 Variable; one from: 1

Initial amplitude / starting position
Length of pendulum / thread
Number of oscillations
MP6 Table with column headings for t, or period (T), or both AND d, with correct units 1
MP7 Conclusion: 1
Plot graph(s) of d against period (T) or t (or vice versa)
OR compare period (T) or t values for different diameters

PUBLISHED 2017
4(a) 1 / Q values 1.(0), 0.5(0), 0.33(3), 0.25, 0.2(0) 1
4(b) Graph:
Axes correctly labelled and right way round 1
Suitable scales 1
All 5 plots correct to ½ small square 1
4(c)(i),(ii) At least half line used for triangle method 1
Clearly shown on graph 1
P = 1.8 – 2.2 (N) 1
4(d) 1.9 1
4(e) Two from: Difficulty in obtaining balance 2

Difficulty in judging centre of loads
Loads may slip / slide
Forcemeter not sensitive
Forcemeter zero error

PHYSICS 0625/62
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a)(i) d = 5.0 (cm) 1
1(a)(ii) D = 50 cm 1
1(a)(iii) clear correct use of set-square AND vertical ruler 1
1(b)(i) 28.12 1
1(b)(ii) 1.406 / 1.41 / 1.4 1
unit s / secs / seconds seen in 1(b)(i) or 1(b)(ii) at least once 1
1(c) statement to match readings 1

justification to include the idea of within (or beyond e.c.f.)
the limits of experimental accuracy e.g. (very) close / almost equal 1
1(d) final box ticked 1
1(e) V, V, V, V, P, P all correct = 2 marks 2

4 or 5 correct = 1 mark
Fewer than 4 correct = 0 marks

PUBLISHED 2017
2(a) 24 (°C) 1
2(b) 34 (°C) 1
2(c) 30 (°C) AND °C seen once in 2(a), 2(b) or 2(c) 1
2(d) to make sure that the temperature is the same throughout / to allow the water to mix and reach its final temperature faster 1
2(e) heat loss (to surroundings) / time delays in transferring the water / did not wait for thermometer readings to stabilise / (initial) 1
temperatures of the (cold / hot) water not the same
2(f) insulation 1
2(g) same starting temperature (of hot / cold water) / same room temperature 1
2(h) recognisable measuring cylinder 1
perpendicular viewing 1
to bottom of mensicus 1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a) Graph
axes correctly labelled 1
suitable scales 1
good best-fit curve judgement thin, continuous line based on all the plots 1
3(b)(i) 2 points and straight line correct 1
3(b)(ii) u1 and v1 read correctly to ½ small square 1
3(b)(iii) correct (calculation of) f from candidate’s values 1

f value rounding to 14 – 16cm
3(c) any two from: 2

upside down
less bright / brighter
coloured edges
different sizes
3(d) any two from: 2

darkened room / bright object
object AND lens AND screen perp. to bench / vertical
object and lens same height (from bench)
move screen (not lens) slowly / backwards and forwards
clamp rule / fix rule to bench

PUBLISHED 2017
4 method: 1
MP1 measure length of band
MP2 hang load, measure new length 1
MP3 repeat with different thicknesses/widths 1
control variable: 1
MP4 use same (original) length of band each time
table: 1
MP5 table with columns for thickness, (load) and
length / extension with units
conclusion: 1
MP6 plot a graph of extension / length against thickness (for the same load)
OR load against extension / length for different thicknesses
OR comparison via a table e.g. compare extensions / lengths
of different thicknesses for the same load
one additional point: 1

MP7 use same load / same range of loads
use at least 5 thicknesses / take at least 5 different readings to plot a
graph
show how to measure extension e.g. l − l0
use same type / material of rubber band

PHYSICS 0625/63
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) units ALL correct (symbols or words) 1
t values all present (0, 30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180) 1
1(b) two appropriate precautions, e.g.: 2

avoidance of parallax(only if explained),
wait until reading stops rising at start,
ensure thermometer not touching beaker
1(c)(i) conclusion matching results 1
correct mention of comparative temperature change over 180 s 1
1(c)(ii) any suitable improvement relating to comparison: 1

e.g. same volume of water,
same initial temperature,
insulate sides,
use plastic beaker,
stand on mat,
use a thicker / more insulated lid,
matching explanation: 1
e.g. lid only factor changed,
cooling more rapid for higher temperatures,
cooling different for different volumes,
thermal energy only escapes from surface,
less transfer of thermal energy by sides,
effect of lid more marked
1(c)(iii) any appropriate similarity: e.g. both cool more rapidly at the start 1
1(d)(i) 23 (°C) 1
1(d)(ii) any suitable suggestion with a valid explanation 1

greater temperature at end as cannot fall below room temperature,
lower rate of cooling as temperature difference between water and room is smaller

PUBLISHED 2017
2(b) IS = 0.18 (A) 1
2(c)(i) VX = 1.2 (V) AND VY = 2.3 (V) 1
2(c)(ii) correct units (A, V) seen in (b) and (c) 1
2(c)(iii) statement matching readings 1
justification, with use of values seen, matching readings and statement 1

e.g: ‘3.5 V and 3.7 V are within limits of expt accuracy’
2(d) correct calculation of Rs (20.6) 1
2 / 3 sig figs and unit(Ω) 1
2(e)(i) resistors in parallel with correct symbol 1
rest of circuit correct 1
2(e)(ii) valid suggestion 1

AND explanation consistent with results

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a)(i) F = 0.75 1
3(a)(ii) any reliable method 1

e.g. equal distances between rule and bench in at least two places,
line up with named horizontal surface,
use of set-square between stand and rule
3(b) graph:
axes labelled with quantity and unit 1
appropriate scales (plots occupying at least ½ grid and scales starting at 0,0) 1
plots all correct to ½ small square AND precise plots 1
Well-judged line AND thin line 1
3(c)(i) F0 correct from graph 1
3(c)(ii) WR in range 0.90 to 1.4 1
2 / 3 sig figs and unit (N) 1
3(d) statement matching plotted points AND explanation referring to line and scatter of data 1
3(e) repeat all readings and take average 1

PUBLISHED 2017
4 MP1 additional apparatus: screen AND (metre) rule 1
MP2 diagram: suitable arrangement of apparatus with u & v labelled correctly 1
MP3 method: 1
obtain (clear focused) image AND measure u, v
MP4 repeat for other values of u 1
MP5 one precaution for clear, focused image: 1

move screen slowly / backwards and forwards,
object AND lens AND screen perpendicular to bench / vertical,
object and lens at same height (from bench),
use of dark room / bright light
MP6 one precaution with measurements: 1

clamp rule / fix to bench,
mark centre of lens on holder

avoidance of parallax explained and specific
MP7 one additional point: 1

additional precaution,
calculate f from given equation
at least 3 values obtained,
calculate average,
mention of at least one appropriate u value,
mention of preliminary expt to obtain rough f value (e.g. light from window)

PHYSICS 0625/11
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*2729597850*
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write in soft pencil.

Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
IB17 11_0625_11/3RP
2
1 A student measures the volume of a cork.
He puts some water into a measuring cylinder and then one glass ball. He puts the cork and then
a second, identical glass ball into the water as shown.
cm3 cm3 cm3

100 100 100
80 80 80
glass ball
60 60 60
40 40 40 cork
20 20 20
glass ball glass ball
diagram 1 diagram 2 diagram 3
Diagram 1 shows the first water level.
Diagram 2 shows the water level after one glass ball is added.
Diagram 3 shows the water level after the cork and the second glass ball are added.
What is the volume of the cork?
A 30 cm3 B 40 cm3 C 50 cm3 D 100 cm3
2 The graph shows how the speed of a car varies over a period of 10 s.
speed
m/s
10
0
0 5 10
time / s
How far does the car travel during the 10 s?
A 10 m B 50 m C 75 m D 100 m
© UCLES 2017 0625/11/O/N/17

3
3 The diagram shows how the speed of a falling object changes with time.
speed
Y Z
X
0
0 time
Which row describes the motion of the object between X and Y, and between Y and Z?
between X and Y between Y and Z
A accelerating at rest
B accelerating constant speed
C decelerating at rest
D decelerating constant speed
4 A spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.
spring
metal
Which name is given to the force that stretches the spring?
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight
© UCLES 2017 0625/11/O/N/17 [Turn over

4
5 The graph shows how weight varies with mass on planet P and on planet Q.
400
planet P
weight / N
300
planet Q
200
100
0
0 20 40 60 80
mass / kg
An object weighs 400 N on planet P. The object is taken to planet Q.
Which row is correct?
mass of object weight of object

on planet Q / kg on planet Q / N
A 40 200
B 40 400
C 80 200
D 80 400
6 What is needed to determine the density of a regularly shaped block?
A a balance and a beaker

B a balance and a ruler
C a measuring cylinder and a beaker
D a measuring cylinder and a ruler
© UCLES 2017 0625/11/O/N/17

5
7 A student conducts an experiment by hanging different loads on a spring. The diagrams show the
lengths of the spring with different loads.
3.0 cm
6.0 cm
9.0 cm
2.0 N
4.0 N
Which row gives the correct extensions of the spring?
extension / cm
0N 2.0 N 4.0 N
A 0 3.0 3.0
B 0 3.0 6.0
C 3.0 3.0 3.0
D 3.0 6.0 9.0
8 A car mechanic is trying to loosen a wheel nut. He applies a force to the end of a spanner
(wrench) at right-angles to the spanner.
Which method provides the largest turning effect on the nut?
A applying double the force to a spanner that is half as long

B applying double the force to a spanner that is twice as long
C applying double the force to the same spanner
D applying the same force to a spanner that is twice as long

6
9 The diagrams show four table lamps resting on a table. The position of the centre of mass of
each lamp is labelled X.
Which lamp is the most stable?
A B C D
X X
X X
10 A pendulum bob swings from W, through points X and Y, to Z and then back to W.
W Z
X
Y
Which statement is correct?
A The gravitational potential energy of the bob is smallest at W.

B The gravitational potential energy of the bob is smallest at X.
C The gravitational potential energy of the bob is smallest at Y.
D The gravitational potential energy of the bob is the same at all points of the swing.
© UCLES 2017 0625/11/O/N/17

7
11 A student runs up a flight of stairs.
height
length
Which information is not needed to calculate the rate at which the student is doing work against
gravity?
A the height of the flight of stairs

B the length of the flight of stairs
C the time taken to run up the stairs
D the weight of the student
12 What is a manometer used to determine?
A the difference between two densities

B the difference between two forces
C the difference between two heights
D the difference between two pressures

8
13 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.
cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40
30
20
10
mercury
Which length is used to find the value of atmospheric pressure?
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm
14 A pollen grain in a beaker of still water is viewed through a microscope.
Which diagram shows the most likely movement of the pollen grain?
A B C D
© UCLES 2017 0625/11/O/N/17

9
15 The diagram shows an air-filled rubber toy. A child sits on the toy and its volume decreases.
The temperature of the air in the toy does not change.
How does the air pressure in the toy change and why?
pressure reason
A decreases air molecules move more slowly

B decreases air molecules strike the rubber less frequently
C increases air molecules move more quickly
D increases air molecules strike the rubber more frequently
16 A strip of iron and a strip of brass are firmly attached to each other along their entire length. This
combination is a bimetallic strip.
iron strip
brass strip
This bimetallic strip is heated and it bends as shown.
iron
fixed support
brass
The bimetallic strip is now cooled and becomes straight again.
What causes the bimetallic strip to become straight again?
A The brass contracts more than the iron.

B The brass expands more than the iron.
C The iron contracts more than the brass.
D The iron expands more than the brass.

10
17 The diagram shows an electric heater being used to heat a beaker of water and an identical
beaker containing oil. Both are heated for one minute.
water oil
electric heater
The temperature of the water and the temperature of the oil increase steadily. The increase in
temperature of the oil is much greater than that of the water.
Why is this?
A Oil has a higher boiling point than water.

B Oil has a lower boiling point than water.
C The oil has a larger thermal capacity than the water.
D The oil has a smaller thermal capacity than the water.
18 The air temperature in a cold room is 15 °C.
A heater that contains water at 50 °C is used to heat the room.
By which process is most of the thermal energy transferred throughout the air in the room?
A conduction
B convection
C evaporation
D radiation
19 Which statement about convection currents is correct?
A Convection currents occur because, when cooled, liquids contract and become more dense.
B Convection currents occur because, when warmed, liquids expand and become more dense.
C Convection currents only occur in liquids.
D Convection currents only occur in solids and liquids.
© UCLES 2017 0625/11/O/N/17

11
20 The diagram represents a wave travelling along a rope.
Which labelled arrow indicates the wavelength of the wave?
rope
D
C
B
A
21 The diagram represents plane wavefronts of a water wave about to strike a solid barrier.
wavefronts
Which diagram shows the position of the wavefronts after reflection at the barrier?
A B
reflected
reflected
C D
reflected
reflected

12
22 The diagram shows an object in front of a plane mirror. A ray of light from the object is incident on
the mirror.
object
R
Q S
P
plane
mirror
Through which point does the reflected ray pass, and at which point is the image of the object
formed?
point through which point at which

reflected ray passes image is formed
A P R
B P S
C Q R
D Q S
23 Which ray diagram shows a converging lens forming a real image of a small object O?
A B
O O
C D
O O
© UCLES 2017 0625/11/O/N/17

13
24 Visible light, X-rays and microwaves are all components of the electromagnetic spectrum.
Which statement about the waves is correct?
A In a vacuum, microwaves travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.
B In a vacuum, microwaves travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter
wavelength.
C In a vacuum, X-rays travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.
D In a vacuum, X-rays travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter wavelength.
25 Space is a vacuum. Waves from stars are used to reveal information about the stars.
Which type of waves do not reveal information about stars?
A infra-red
B radio waves
C ultrasound
D γ-rays
26 A student stands 180 m in front of a vertical, flat cliff and bangs together two pieces of wood to
make a short, loud sound.
A timer records the echo of the sound 1.5 seconds after the pieces of wood are banged together.
Based on this result, what is the speed of sound?
A 120 m / s B 240 m / s C 270 m / s D 540 m / s
27 A train of steel nails and a train of iron nails hang from a strong magnet.
magnet
train of train of
steel nails iron nails
The trains are then carefully removed from the magnet.
What happens to the trains?
A Both trains fall apart.

B Both trains stay together.
C Only the train of iron nails falls apart.
D Only the train of steel nails falls apart.

14
28 The north pole of a bar magnet is placed in turn next to each end of a rod X. One end of the rod
moves away from the north pole but the other end moves towards the north pole.
The experiment is repeated with the bar magnet and a different rod Y but this time both ends of
the rod move towards the north pole.
From which materials could the rods X and Y be made?
rod X rod Y
A soft iron copper

B soft iron soft iron
C steel copper
D steel soft iron
29 A student investigates the electrostatic charges on three objects P, Q and R.
The student places object P on the insulated pan of a balance and notes the reading on the
balance.
The student then holds object Q a small distance above object P and notes the reading on the
balance.
Finally, the student holds object R the small distance above object P and notes the reading on
the balance.
The student’s observations are shown.
object Q object R
object P
86.5 g 131.7 g 78.2 g
Which row gives possible charges that explain these observations?
charge on P charge on Q charge on R
A negative positive negative

B negative negative negative
C positive positive negative
D positive negative positive
© UCLES 2017 0625/11/O/N/17

15
30 Which equation is used to calculate resistance?
A resistance = p.d. + current

B resistance = p.d. – current
C resistance = p.d. × current
D resistance = p.d. ÷ current
31 A student connects a circuit with a power supply, a lamp and an ammeter.
Where must the ammeter be connected?
A in parallel with the lamp to measure current in the lamp

B in parallel with the lamp to measure potential difference across the lamp
C in series with the lamp to measure current in the lamp
D in series with the lamp to measure potential difference across the lamp
32 Two 3.0 Ω resistors are connected in parallel.
Which statement about their combined resistance is correct?
A The combined resistance is less than 3.0 Ω.
B The combined resistance is 3.0 Ω.
C The combined resistance is more than 3.0 Ω but less than 6.0 Ω.
D The combined resistance is 6.0 Ω.

16
33 The diagram shows a potential divider circuit.
Z
slider
V
How does the movement of the slider affect the voltmeter reading?
movement voltmeter
of slider reading
A Z to X falls to zero
B Z to X increases
C Z to Y falls to zero
D Z to Y increases
© UCLES 2017 0625/11/O/N/17

17
34 The diagram shows a circuit with a fixed resistor connected in series with a thermistor and an
ammeter.
Which row shows how temperature change affects the resistance of the thermistor and the
current in the circuit?
resistance of
temperature current in circuit
thermistor
A decreases decreases increases

B decreases increases decreases
C increases decreases decreases
D increases increases increases
35 An appliance is connected to a mains supply. Its circuit also contains a switch and a fuse.
Which circuit shows the fuse in the correct position?
A B
appliance appliance
live live
neutral neutral
C D
appliance appliance
live live
neutral neutral

18
36 There is an electric current in a straight wire in the direction into the page. This produces a
magnetic field around the wire. All the field lines are circles but only one field line is shown.
magnetic field line
wire with current

into the page
Which row describes the magnetic field?
direction of spacing of
the field lines the field lines
A anti-clockwise evenly spaced over
the whole field
B anti-clockwise more widely spaced
further from the wire
C clockwise evenly spaced over
the whole field
D clockwise more widely spaced
further from the wire
37 A wire carrying a current is placed in a magnetic field. The wire experiences a force due to the
field.
Which action does not change the direction of the force?
A increasing the current and reversing the field direction

B increasing the current, keeping the field direction constant
C reversing the current and increasing the field strength
D reversing the current, keeping the field direction constant
© UCLES 2017 0625/11/O/N/17

19
35 37
38 Different isotopes of chlorine are represented as 17 Cl and 17 Cl .
They behave the same way chemically.
Why is this?
A They have the same nuclide notation.

B They have the same number of neutrons.
C They have the same number of nucleons.
D They have the same number of protons.
39 A radioactive source emits three types of radiation R, S and T.
The diagram shows an experiment set up to study the penetrating properties of R, S and T.
paper few mm of few cm

aluminium of lead
Which types of radiation are R, S and T?
R S T
A α-particles β-particles γ-rays

B α-particles γ-rays β-particles
C β-particles α-particles γ-rays
D γ-rays β-particles α-particles
40 What is meant by the half-life of a radioactive isotope?
A half of the time taken for all of the original nuclei to decay
B the time taken for half of the original nuclei to decay
C the time taken for the charges on all the nuclei to halve
D the time taken for the mass of each nucleus to halve
© UCLES 2017 0625/11/O/N/17

20
BLANK PAGE
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
© UCLES 2017 0625/11/O/N/17

PHYSICS 0625/12
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*0285820688*

IB17 11_0625_12/4RP
2
1 A student investigates the rate of flow of oil through a funnel.
The diagrams show the experiment and the volume of oil in the measuring cylinder at the start of
the experiment, and one minute later.
80 80
cm3 cm3
60 60
40 40
20 20
initial after 1.0

measurement minute
What is the rate of flow of oil through the funnel during the one minute?
A 0.73 cm3 / s B 0.80 cm3 / s C 44 cm3 / s D 48 cm3 / s
2 The graph represents the motion of a vehicle.
20
speed
m/s
0
0 400
time / s
What is the distance travelled by the vehicle in 400 s?
A 20 m B 400 m C 4000 m D 8000 m
© UCLES 2017 0625/12/O/N/17

3
3 The speed-time graph represents the motion of an object.
18
16
speed
m/s
14
12
10
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
time / s
What is the average speed of the object?
A 2.0 m / s B 6.0 m / s C 8.5 m / s D 11 m / s
spring
metal
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight

4
400
planet P
weight / N
300
planet Q
200
100
0
0 20 40 60 80
mass / kg

A 40 200
B 40 400
C 80 200
D 80 400

© UCLES 2017 0625/12/O/N/17

5
7 The diagram shows an aircraft flying in a straight horizontal line at constant speed.
W is the weight of the aircraft.

L is the lift (upward force) due to air flow over the wings.
T is the thrust force due to the engine.
D is the air resistance (drag).
The diagram shows the direction of these forces.
D T
What are the relationships between the forces?
A L = W and T = D
B L = W and T is greater than D
C L is greater than W and T = D
D L is greater than W and T is greater than D

6
8 A pivoted beam supports a load P at one end and a load Q at the other end.
The weight of the beam can be ignored.
30 cm 70 cm
pivot
P Q
The beam is balanced.
Which row gives possible values for P and for Q?
P/N Q/N
A 21 7
B 21 9
C 30 10
D 30 70
9 Each diagram shows a metal plate with four parallel forces acting on it. These are the only forces
acting on the plates.
In which diagram is the plate in equilibrium?
A B
1.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N 1.0 N
2.0 N 1.0 N 1.0 N 2.0 N
C D
1.0 N 1.0 N 2.0 N 1.0 N
2.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N
© UCLES 2017 0625/12/O/N/17

7
10 A load is attached to the end of a spring. A student pulls the load down from its rest position and
releases it. It oscillates vertically and eventually comes to rest.
load
load
Which row gives the type of energy transferred to the apparatus, and the type of energy to which
this has then been transferred when the load comes to rest?
type of energy to which this

type of energy transferred
has then been transferred
to the apparatus
when the load comes to rest
A elastic energy in the spring chemical energy in the

spring and in the air
B elastic energy in the spring thermal energy in the
spring and in the air
C gravitational potential chemical energy in the
energy in the load spring and in the air
D gravitational potential thermal energy in the
energy in the load spring and in the air
height
length
gravity?


8
12 A book has a mass of 400 g.
One of its surfaces measures 0.10 m × 0.20 m. This surface is in contact with a table.
The gravitational field strength g is10 N / kg.
What is the pressure exerted on the table due to the book?
A 0.08 N / m2 B 8.0 N / m2 C 20 N / m2 D 200 N / m2
cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40
30
20
10
mercury
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm
A B C D
© UCLES 2017 0625/12/O/N/17

9
pressure reason

16 Which row identifies the fixed points on the Celsius scale?
lower fixed point upper fixed point
A boiling point of mercury melting point of pure ice

B boiling point of pure water melting point of pure ice
C melting point of mercury boiling point of pure water
D melting point of pure ice boiling point of pure water

10
water oil
electric heater
Why is this?

18 Which statement about the direction of a change of state is correct?
A Evaporation is the reverse process to boiling.

B Evaporation is the reverse process to condensation.
C Evaporation is the reverse process to melting.
D Evaporation is the reverse process to solidification.
© UCLES 2017 0625/12/O/N/17

11
19 Three cups are made from the same insulating material.
cup 1 cup 2 cup 3
The cups are each filled with the same volume of hot tea.
In which cup does the tea cool most quickly and in which cup does it cool most slowly?
most quickly most slowly
A 1 3
B 2 1
C 3 2
D 3 1
20 Why does a balloon filled with hot air rise?
A Cold air is less dense than hot air.

B Cold air is more dense than hot air.
C Heat rises.
D The density of the balloon is greater than the density of the surrounding gas.
21 A wave moves along the surface of water.
What is the wavelength of the wave?
A the distance between one crest and the next crest

B the distance that a crest moves along the surface in one second
C the distance that a particle of water moves up and down
D the number of waves that pass a fixed point in one second

12
wavefronts
A B
reflected
reflected
C D
reflected
reflected
© UCLES 2017 0625/12/O/N/17

13
23 The diagram shows an object O in front of a thin converging lens of focal length f.
At which point will the lens form a sharp image of the object?
A
O
f f
C
D
24 The diagram shows light travelling from glass to air.
air 20°
glass 50°
What is the angle of refraction for this ray of light?
A 20° B 40° C 50° D 70°
25 Which piece of equipment is designed to produce a type of electromagnetic wave?
A electric fire
B electric generator
C electric motor
D electromagnet
26 What is ultrasound?
A sound waves that are so loud that they damage human hearing
B sound waves that are too high-pitched for humans to hear
C sound waves that are too low-pitched for humans to hear
D sound waves that are too quiet for humans to hear

14
27 A student finds that it takes sound 0.33 seconds to travel 100 metres.
From this information, what is the speed of sound?
A 30 m / s B 60 m / s C 300 m / s D 600 m / s
magnet
train of train of

29 Two circuits are set up as shown. The iron rods are placed close together and are able to move.
iron rod iron rod

X
What happens to the size of the gap at X when switch S is closed?
A It decreases.
B It decreases then increases.
C It increases.
D It does not change.
© UCLES 2017 0625/12/O/N/17

15
30 Which circuit can be used to determine the resistance of resistor R?
A B C D
V V A A V
R R R
V
R
A A
31 A wire has a resistance R.
A second wire made from the same metal has double the length and has double the diameter of
the first wire.
What is the resistance of the second wire?
A R B R C 4R D 8R
2
32 The circuit diagram shows a 4.0 Ω resistor and an 8.0 Ω resistor connected to a 6.0 V battery.
6.0 V
4.0 Ω 8.0 Ω
What is the potential difference (p.d.) across the 4.0 Ω resistor?
A 0.5 V B 2.0 V C 4.0 V D 6.0 V

16
33 The diagram shows a motor and a light-dependent resistor (LDR) connected in a circuit.
Which change decreases the current in the motor so that it turns more slowly?
A connecting a resistor in parallel with the LDR
B connecting a resistor in series with the LDR
C exchanging the positions of the motor and the LDR in the circuit
D increasing the brightness of the light falling on the LDR
ammeter.
resistance of
thermistor

© UCLES 2017 0625/12/O/N/17

17
A B
appliance appliance
live live
neutral neutral
C D
appliance appliance
live live
neutral neutral
36 The diagram shows a bar magnet and a coil of wire. The bar magnet is moved at the same speed
in each experiment.
In which situation is the largest electromotive force (e.m.f.) induced?
A B
moves right stationary moves left stationary
bar magnet coil bar magnet coil
C D
moves left at same moves left at same
moves right speed as bar magnet moves left speed as bar magnet
bar magnet coil bar magnet coil

18
37 Diagram 1 shows a wire carrying an electric current. The wire is between the poles of a magnet.
The current and the magnetic field produce a force on the wire which is upwards, as shown.
force
current
N S S N
current
diagram 1 diagram 2
The magnetic poles and the current are now both reversed, as in diagram 2.
In which direction is the force on the wire in diagram 2?
A downwards
B towards the North pole of the magnet
C towards the South pole of the magnet
D upwards
222
38 A nuclide of radon-222 is represented by 86 Rn .
How many protons and how many neutrons are in a nucleus of this nuclide?
protons neutrons
A 86 136
B 86 222
C 222 86
D 222 136
© UCLES 2017 0625/12/O/N/17

19

aluminium of lead
R S T

40 A radioactive source has a half-life of 0.5 hours.
A detector near the source shows a reading of 6000 counts per second.
Background radiation can be ignored.
What is the reading on the detector 1.5 hours later?
A 750 counts per second

B 1500 counts per second
C 2000 counts per second
D 3000 counts per second
© UCLES 2017 0625/12/O/N/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/12/O/N/17

PHYSICS 0625/13
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*2982654513*

IB17 11_0625_13/4RP
2
1 A measuring cylinder contains some water. A small metal block is slowly lowered into the water
and is then removed.
Finally a piece of plastic is attached to the metal block and the block is again slowly lowered into
the water.
The diagrams show the measuring cylinder at each stage of this process.
1 2 3
cm3 cm3 cm3
100 100 100
90 90 90
80 80 80
70 70 70
60 60 60
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20 plastic
10 10 10
metal block metal block
What is the volume of the piece of plastic?
A 10 cm3 B 25 cm3 C 70 cm3 D 80 cm3
© UCLES 2017 0625/13/O/N/17

3
2 A car accelerates from rest and travels a distance of 100 m in 10 seconds.
Which speed-time graph represents the motion of this car?
A B
speed speed 20
m / s 15 m/s
0 0
0 10 time / s 0 10 time / s
C D
speed speed
m/s m/s
10 10
0 0
0 10 time / s 0 10 time / s
3 The diagram is the speed-time graph for a bicycle journey.
speed
0
0 20 40 50 70
time / s
When is the bicycle moving at a constant speed?
A between 0 and 20 s
B between 20 s and 40 s
C between 40 s and 50 s
D between 50 s and 70 s

4
spring
metal
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight
400
planet P
weight / N
300
planet Q
200
100
0
0 20 40 60 80
mass / kg

A 40 200
B 40 400
C 80 200
D 80 400
© UCLES 2017 0625/13/O/N/17

5

7 A cart experiences a forward force of 500 N.
The cart also experiences a backward force of 200 N.
There are no other forward or backward forces on the cart.
What is the resultant force on the cart?
A 300 N backwards
B 300 N forwards
C 700 N backwards
D 700 N forwards
8 The diagram shows a beam with a pivot, a load P at one end and a load Q at the other end.
The pivot can be moved left or right and the loads can be increased or decreased.
The weight of the beam can be ignored.
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
pivot
load P load Q
Which combination of pivot position and loads causes the beam to be in equilibrium?
pivot position load P load Q

/ cm /N /N
A 30 6.0 4.0
B 40 6.0 4.0
C 50 5.0 9.0
D 60 3.0 9.0

6
9 The lamp in the diagram is not very stable and falls over easily.
shade
stem
base
Which row shows changes that would definitely make the lamp more stable?
base centre of gravity
A narrower higher
B narrower lower
C wider higher
D wider lower
10 A toy car without a motor is moving at high speed along a track. The toy car follows a vertical
loop as shown.
start
Which row describes the changes that are taking place in the kinetic energy and in the
gravitational potential energy of the car in the position shown?
gravitational
kinetic energy
potential energy
A decreasing decreasing
B decreasing increasing
C increasing decreasing
D increasing increasing
© UCLES 2017 0625/13/O/N/17

7
height
length
gravity?

cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40
30
20
10
mercury
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm
13 A polystyrene cube of mass 5.0 kg is placed on a horizontal surface. The pressure due to the
cube is 89 N / m2.
What is the length of the sides of the cube?
A 0.56 m B 0.75 m C 1.3 m D 1.8 m

8
A B C D
pressure reason

16 Which property cannot be used for the measurement of temperature?
A half-life of a radioactive isotope

B length of a solid metal bar
C pressure of a gas
D volume of a liquid
© UCLES 2017 0625/13/O/N/17

9
water oil
electric heater
Why is this?

18 Why is the heating coil of a domestic immersion heater placed at the bottom of the tank?
A Cold water is less dense than hot water and therefore sinks.
B Cold water is more dense than hot water and therefore rises.
C Hot water is less dense than cold water and therefore rises.
D Hot water is more dense than cold water and therefore sinks.
19 A plane wave in a shallow tank of water of uniform depth is incident normally on the small gap in
a barrier.
What happens after the wave passes through the gap?
A The frequency increases.

B The speed decreases.
C The wavelength decreases.
D The wave spreads out.

10
wavefronts
A B
reflected
reflected
C D
reflected
reflected
© UCLES 2017 0625/13/O/N/17

11
21 The diagram shows a ray of light in glass. The ray reaches a boundary with air.
One weak ray of light is missing from the diagram.
air
glass 50°
A At the boundary, the speed of the light will become less.
B The critical angle for light at this boundary is 50°.

C The diagram shows an example of diffraction of light.
D The missing ray is a weak reflected ray.
22 Light enters a transparent block.
The light is refracted into the block and then strikes the top edge of the block at the critical angle.
Which diagram correctly shows the angle of refraction r and the critical angle c?
A B
c
r c r
C D
c
c
r r

12
23 Which statement about radio waves is correct?
A They are used in television remote controllers.

B They can be detected by the human eye.
C They travel as longitudinal waves.
D They have the same speed in a vacuum as ultraviolet waves.
24 Which types of thermal energy transfer are due to electromagnetic waves?
A conduction and convection

B convection and radiation
C convection only
D radiation only
25 The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
The speed of ultraviolet waves in air is 300 000 000 m / s.
Which row gives a possible frequency and speed of an ultrasound wave in air?
speed
frequency / Hz
m/s
A 4000 330
B 4000 300 000 000
C 40 000 330
D 40 000 300 000 000
© UCLES 2017 0625/13/O/N/17

13
26 The diagram shows the Earth and its surroundings.
Through which labelled region can sound not be transmitted?
A B C D
sea land atmosphere outer space
(water) (rock) (air) (vacuum)
not to scale
magnet
train of train of


14
28 The diagram shows an electromagnet.
Which material is part X made from?
A copper
B iron
C steel
D tin
29 In which unit is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a battery measured?
A A B J C N D V
© UCLES 2017 0625/13/O/N/17

15
30 The diagram shows a circuit symbol for a component that can be used as an input transducer.
Which graph shows how the resistance of the component varies with its intended input variable?
A B
resistance resistance
0 0
0 temperature 0 temperature
C D
resistance resistance
0 0
0 light intensity 0 light intensity
31 Which statement is not correct for two identical lamps connected in parallel?
A The potential difference across each lamp is half the supply voltage.
B The remaining lamp still operates when one lamp is removed.
C They can be switched on and off separately.
D They remain bright if another lamp is connected in parallel.

16
32 Only one of the ammeters in the circuit is showing an incorrect reading.
Which ammeter is showing the incorrect reading?
ammeter A:
reading = 0.30 A
A
A
ammeter B:
reading = 0.10 A ammeter D:
A
reading = 0.20 A
A
ammeter C:
reading = 0.25 A
ammeter.
resistance of
thermistor

© UCLES 2017 0625/13/O/N/17

17
A B
appliance appliance
live live
neutral neutral
C D
appliance appliance
live live
neutral neutral
35 An electrical device requires a voltage of 5.0 V to operate normally. The mains supply voltage is
250 V.
Which row shows a transformer that provides output voltage that enables the device to operate
normally when connected to the mains supply?
number of turns on number of turns on

the primary coil the secondary coil
A 500 2500
B 500 25 000
C 2500 500
D 25 000 500

18
36 A straight current-carrying wire has a magnetic field around it.
Which diagram best shows the magnetic field pattern around the wire?
A B C D
37 Which row states the charge on an electron and states whether electrons are located inside the
nucleus of an atom?
located inside
charge
the nucleus
A negative no
B negative yes
C positive no
D positive yes
38 The element sodium, symbol Na, has a proton number of 11.
Which is a possible symbol for a sodium nuclide?

9 11 11 23
A 11 Na B 9 Na C 23 Na D 11 Na
© UCLES 2017 0625/13/O/N/17

19

aluminium of lead
R S T

40 Radioactive iodine-131 emits β-particles and has a half-life of 8 days. It decays to produce
xenon-131.
Which statement about this decay is correct?
A After 8 days no more β-particles are emitted.

B After 8 days the number of xenon-131 atoms has halved.
C After 16 days the iodine-131 has decayed completely.
D After 16 days the number of iodine-131 atoms has reduced to one quarter.
© UCLES 2017 0625/13/O/N/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/13/O/N/17

PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*6133216338*

IB17 11_0625_21/4RP
2
1 A student measures the volume of a cork.
He puts some water into a measuring cylinder and then one glass ball. He puts the cork and then
a second, identical glass ball into the water as shown.
cm3 cm3 cm3

100 100 100
80 80 80
glass ball
60 60 60
40 40 40 cork
20 20 20
glass ball glass ball
Diagram 1 shows the first water level.
Diagram 2 shows the water level after one glass ball is added.
Diagram 3 shows the water level after the cork and the second glass ball are added.
What is the volume of the cork?
A 30 cm3 B 40 cm3 C 50 cm3 D 100 cm3
2 Four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.
Air resistance may be ignored.
Which ball has the smallest average speed?
A B C D
1.0 kg
2.0 kg
3.0 kg
4.0 m
4.0 kg
3.0 m
2.0 m
1.0 m ground
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

3
3 An ice crystal falls vertically from a cloud.
What happens to the acceleration of the ice crystal as it falls?
A It decreases because of air resistance.

B It decreases because of gravity.
C It increases because of air resistance.
D It increases because of gravity.
spring
metal
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight
5 Which object has the greatest weight?
A an object of mass 10 kg in a 15 N / kg gravitational field

B an object of mass 15 kg in a 13 N / kg gravitational field
C an object of mass 20 kg in a 9.0 N / kg gravitational field
D an object of mass 50 kg in a 3.0 N / kg gravitational field

4
6 A uniform beam XY is 100 cm long and weighs 4.0 N.
80 cm
60 cm
10 cm
X Y
centre
pivot
of beam F
8.0 N
The beam rests on a pivot 60 cm from end X.
A load of 8.0 N hangs from the beam 10 cm from end X.
The beam is kept balanced by a force F acting on the beam 80 cm from end X.
What is the magnitude of force F ?
A 8.0 N B 18 N C 22 N D 44 N
7 The diagrams show four table lamps resting on a table. The position of the centre of mass of
each lamp is labelled X.
Which lamp is the most stable?
A B C D
X X
X X
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

5
8 The diagram shows an incomplete scale drawing to find the resultant of two 10 N forces acting at
a point in the directions shown.
10 N
10 N
What is the magnitude of the resultant force?
A 7.5 N B 8.6 N C 18 N D 20 N
9 A tennis ball of mass 0.060 kg travels horizontally at a speed of 25 m / s. The ball hits a tennis
racket and rebounds horizontally at a speed of 40 m / s.
racket
ball
25 m / s 40 m / s
before hitting racket after hitting racket
The ball is in contact with the racket for 50 ms.
What force does the racket exert on the ball?
A 0.018 N B 0.078 N C 18 N D 78 N

6
10 The diagram shows the path of a stone that is thrown from X and reaches its maximum height
at Y.
Y
path of
stone
The stone gains 10 J of gravitational potential energy as it moves from X to Y.
The stone has 2.0 J of kinetic energy at Y.
Air resistance can be ignored.
How much kinetic energy did the stone have immediately after it was thrown at X?
A 2.0 J B 8.0 J C 10 J D 12 J
11 A motor is used to lift a load of 40 N.
motor
load lifted
through 0.50 m
load
40 N
The power of the motor is 40 W and the system is 20% efficient.
How long does it take the motor to lift the load through 0.50 m?
A 0.50 s B 2.5 s C 5.0 s D 25 s
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

7
height
length
gravity?

cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40
30
20
10
mercury
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm

8
14 The diagram shows a glass flask, sealed with a small volume of mercury in a glass tube. When
the flask is gently warmed the mercury rises up the tube.
glass tube
mercury
air
water
What is the main cause of the movement of the mercury?
A expansion of air in the flask

B expansion of the glass flask
C expansion of the glass tube
D expansion of the mercury
A B C D
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

9
pressure reason

17 A strip of iron and a strip of brass are firmly attached to each other along their entire length. This
combination is a bimetallic strip.
iron strip
brass strip
This bimetallic strip is heated and it bends as shown.
iron
fixed support
brass
The bimetallic strip is now cooled and becomes straight again.
What causes the bimetallic strip to become straight again?
A The brass contracts more than the iron.

B The brass expands more than the iron.
C The iron contracts more than the brass.
D The iron expands more than the brass.

10
18 An aluminium block has a mass of 200 g.
The specific heat capacity of aluminium is 900 J / (kg °C).
How much energy is needed to raise the temperature of the block from 20 °C to 110 °C?
A 2.0 J B 200 J C 16 200 J D 16 200 000 J
19 Which statement about convection currents is correct?
A Convection currents occur because, when cooled, liquids contract and become more dense.
B Convection currents occur because, when warmed, liquids expand and become more dense.
C Convection currents only occur in liquids.
D Convection currents only occur in solids and liquids.
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

11
wavefronts
A B
reflected
reflected
C D
reflected
reflected

12
21 The diagram shows an object in front of a plane mirror. A ray of light from the object is incident on
the mirror.
object
R
Q S
P
plane
mirror
Through which point does the reflected ray pass, and at which point is the image of the object
formed?
point through which point at which

reflected ray passes image is formed
A P R
B P S
C Q R
D Q S
22 A laser is a source of light with a single frequency.
Which description of this type of light is correct?
A dispersed
B focused
C monochromatic
D refracted
23 Visible light, X-rays and microwaves are all components of the electromagnetic spectrum.
Which statement about the waves is correct?
A In a vacuum, microwaves travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.
B In a vacuum, microwaves travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter
wavelength.
C In a vacuum, X-rays travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.
D In a vacuum, X-rays travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter wavelength.
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

13
24 The Moon is 380 000 km from the Earth. A laser light beam is directed from the Earth to the
Moon. The beam is reflected back to the Earth.
How long does it take for the light to travel to the Moon and back to the Earth?
A 1.27 ms B 2.53 ms C 1.27 s D 2.53 s
25 Which wavefront is travelling at a speed closest to that of a sound wave through a solid?
A one that moves 10 m in 0.01 s

B one that moves 50 m in 0.5 s
C one that moves 1000 m in 100 s
D one that moves 2000 m in 2000 s
26 Different waves travel through air.
Which waves have the greatest difference in speed?
A ultrasound waves and sound waves

B ultrasound waves and ultraviolet waves
C ultraviolet waves and light waves
D ultraviolet waves and radio waves
27 A student stands 180 m in front of a vertical, flat cliff and bangs together two pieces of wood to
make a short, loud sound.
A timer records the echo of the sound 1.5 seconds after the pieces of wood are banged together.
Based on this result, what is the speed of sound?
A 120 m / s B 240 m / s C 270 m / s D 540 m / s

14
magnet
train of train of

29 How can a permanent magnet be demagnetised?
A Cool the magnet for a long time.

B Place it next to another magnet.
C Slowly pull it out of a coil connected to an a.c. supply.
D Slowly pull it out of a coil connected to a d.c. supply.
30 A positively-charged rod is held near to, but not touching, an uncharged metal sphere.
The sphere is briefly now connected to earth.
The rod is removed.
Which statement about the charge on the sphere is correct?
A It is charged negatively because negative charges have moved from earth to the sphere.
B It is charged negatively because positive charges have moved from the sphere to earth.
C It is charged positively because negative charges have moved from the sphere to earth.
D It is charged positively because positive charges have moved to earth from the sphere.
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

15
31 The diagram shows a circuit with a gap between points P and Q.
Four pieces of metal wire of the same material are connected, in turn, between points P and Q in
the circuit.
P Q
The table gives the diameters and lengths of the wires.
In which wire is the current the largest?
diameter / mm length / m
A 0.10 1.0
B 0.10 2.0
C 0.20 1.0
D 0.20 2.0
32 A torch has a simple circuit with a 3.0 V battery and a lamp. There is a 20 mA current in the lamp.
How much energy is transferred to the lamp in 5.0 minutes?
A 0.30 J B 18 J C 60 J D 0.30 kJ

16
33 A student connects the circuit shown.
Which graph shows the variation with time of the current in the resistor?
A B
current current
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
current current
0
0 time
0
0 time
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

17
ammeter.
resistance of
thermistor

35 What does the symbol shown represent?
A an AND gate
B a NOR gate
C a NOT gate
D an OR gate

18
36 The diagram shows a copper wire XY connected to a resistor.
The wire is moved in the magnetic field between the poles of a magnet.
There is an induced current in the wire from X to Y.
In which labelled direction is the wire moving?
X
B
A C
N S
D
37 The graph shows how the voltage induced across a coil changes with time as the coil spins in a
magnetic field.
voltage
0
0 time
Which graph shows what happens when the coil spins more quickly?
(All graphs are drawn to the same scale.)
A B
voltage voltage
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
voltage voltage
0 0
0 time 0 time
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

19
38 Emissions X and Y from radioactive material are passed through a magnetic field. The diagram
shows the direction of the emissions, the direction of the magnetic field and the effect on the
emissions.
emission X magnetic field

emission Y into the page
Which type of emission is X, and which type of emission is Y?
emission X emission Y
A α-particles β-particles
B α-particles γ-rays
C β-particles α-particles
D β-particles γ-rays
39 What is meant by the half-life of a radioactive isotope?
A half of the time taken for all of the original nuclei to decay
B the time taken for half of the original nuclei to decay
C the time taken for the charges on all the nuclei to halve
D the time taken for the mass of each nucleus to halve

20
40 The rate of emission of a radioactive source is measured until the reading reaches the
background rate of 20 counts per minute.
The results are shown.
200
190
180
rate of emission
170
counts / minute
160
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time / minute
What is the best estimate of the half-life of the source?
A 10 minutes
B 12 minutes
C 14 minutes
D 30 minutes
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*2664559192*

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
IB17 11_0625_22/4RP
2
1 A student investigates the rate of flow of oil through a funnel.
The diagrams show the experiment and the volume of oil in the measuring cylinder at the start of
the experiment, and one minute later.
80 80
cm3 cm3
60 60
40 40
20 20
initial after 1.0

measurement minute
What is the rate of flow of oil through the funnel during the one minute?
A 0.73 cm3 / s B 0.80 cm3 / s C 44 cm3 / s D 48 cm3 / s
2 Four balls with different masses are dropped simultaneously from the heights shown.
Which ball hits the floor last?
A B C D
4.0 kg
3.0 kg
2.0 kg
2.0 m
1.0 kg
1.5 m
1.0 m
0.5 m ground
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

3
3 The gravitational field strength on the Earth is greater than the gravitational field strength on the
Moon. The Earth has an atmosphere, but the Moon does not.
Which speed-time graph represents the motion of a light ball dropped from a great height near
the surface of the Earth and near the surface of the Moon?
A B
Earth
Moon
speed speed
Earth
Moon
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
Earth
Earth
speed speed
Moon Moon
0 0
0 time 0 time
spring
metal
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight

4
5 A body of mass m has a weight W in a location where the gravitational field strength is g.
Which statement about these quantities is correct?
A m and W are both forces.

B m and W are both vector quantities.
C m and W are related by the equation W = g.
m
D m and W have the same unit.
6 An object is pivoted at point P. A student ties a length of string to a peg on the object. He pulls
the string with a force F.
string
s t
peg
r
q P
object
What is the moment of the force F about the point P?
A F×q B F×r C F×s D F×t
7 Each diagram shows a metal plate with four parallel forces acting on it. These are the only forces
acting on the plates.
In which diagram is the plate in equilibrium?
A B
1.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N 1.0 N
2.0 N 1.0 N 1.0 N 2.0 N
C D
1.0 N 1.0 N 2.0 N 1.0 N
2.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

5
10 N
10 N
A 7.5 N B 8.6 N C 18 N D 20 N
9 A ball has a mass of 0.30 kg. It moves horizontally with a speed of 3.0 m / s in the direction shown.
The ball hits a wall.
wall wall
ball ball
3.0 m / s 2.0 m / s
before hitting the wall after hitting the wall
The ball rebounds from the wall with a horizontal speed of 2.0 m / s.
What is the change in momentum of the ball?
A 0.30 kg m / s B 1.0 kg m / s C 1.5 kg m / s D 5.0 kg m / s
10 An object has a mass of 500 kg.
It moves with a speed of 30 m / s.
What is its kinetic energy?
A 7.5 kJ B 15 kJ C 225 kJ D 450 kJ

6
11 Different processes have different efficiencies.
Which row shows the most efficient process?
energy useful energy

input / J output / J
A 10 3
B 40 10
C 100 25
D 2000 250
height
length
gravity?

© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

7
cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40
30
20
10
mercury
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm
A B C D

8
pressure reason

glass tube
mercury
air
water

© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

9
17 Which row identifies the fixed points on the Celsius scale?
A boiling point of mercury melting point of pure ice

B boiling point of pure water melting point of pure ice
C melting point of mercury boiling point of pure water
D melting point of pure ice boiling point of pure water
18 Aluminium has a specific heat capacity of 900 J / (kg °C).
The internal energy of a 2.0 kg block of aluminium increases by 13 500 J.
By how much does the temperature of the block increase?
A 0.067 °C B 0.13 °C C 7.5 °C D 15 °C
19 Why does a balloon filled with hot air rise?
A Cold air is less dense than hot air.

B Cold air is more dense than hot air.
C Heat rises.
D The density of the balloon is greater than the density of the surrounding gas.

10
wavefronts
A B
reflected
reflected
C D
reflected
reflected
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

11
21 The diagram shows an object O in front of a thin converging lens of focal length f.
At which point will the lens form a sharp image of the object?
A
O
f f
C
D
22 The diagram shows a ray of light incident on the surface of a rectangular glass block at 90° to the
surface.
ray of light
glass block
Which quantities remain unchanged as the light enters the glass block?
A direction and frequency

B direction and speed
C frequency and speed
D speed and wavelength
23 Which piece of equipment is designed to produce a type of electromagnetic wave?
A electric fire
B electric generator
C electric motor
D electromagnet
A 1.27 ms B 2.53 ms C 1.27 s D 2.53 s

12

26 The speed of sound is different in different states of matter.
The speed of sound in water is 1500 m / s.
Which row correctly compares the speed of sound in ice and the speed of sound in steam with
the speed of sound in water?
speed of sound in ice speed of sound in steam

m/s m/s
A less than 1500 less than 1500

B less than 1500 more than 1500
C more than 1500 less than 1500
D more than 1500 more than 1500
27 A student finds that it takes sound 0.33 seconds to travel 100 metres.
From this information, what is the speed of sound?
A 30 m / s B 60 m / s C 300 m / s D 600 m / s
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

13
magnet
train of train of

29 An old and expensive steel watch becomes magnetised.
The owner wants to use the watch again. He must demagnetise the watch.
What is the best method to do this?
A Insert the watch in a solenoid that carries alternating current and then slowly remove it.
B Insert the watch in a solenoid that carries direct current and then slowly remove it.
C Pass alternating current through the watch.
D Pass direct current through the watch.
30 Which diagram represents the electric field due to a negatively-charged conducting sphere?
A B C D
– – – –

14
the circuit.
P Q
A 0.10 1.0
B 0.10 2.0
C 0.20 1.0
D 0.20 2.0
32 The graph shows the way in which one physical quantity y varies with another physical quantity x.
0
0 x
Which row gives suitable quantities for y and x?
y x
A the number of atoms of a the time taken

radioactive isotope present
B the potential difference the current in the metallic conductor
across a metallic conductor
C the resistance of a length of wire the diameter of the wire
D the volume of a 1.0 kg object the density of the material from
which the object is made
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

15
33 The potential difference across a car headlamp is 12 V. The current in the lamp is 2.5 A.
How much energy is transferred by the lamp in 1.0 hour?
A 1800 J B 1800 W C 108 000 J D 108 000 W
ammeter.
resistance of
thermistor


16
35 An incomplete truth table for a NAND gate is shown.
input P input Q output
0 0 W
0 1 X
1 0 Y
1 1 Z
What are the values of W, X, Y and Z?
W X Y Z
A 0 0 0 1
B 0 1 1 1
C 1 0 0 0
D 1 1 1 0
36 The diagram shows a wire hanging freely between the poles of a magnet. There is a current in
the wire in the direction shown.
wire
S N
current
The magnet and current cause a force to act on the wire.
In which direction does this force act?
A into the page (away from you)

B out of the page (toward you)
C to the left
D to the right
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

17
37 A 100% efficient transformer has 6000 turns on its primary coil and 600 turns on its secondary
coil. The output voltage of the transformer is 12 V.
A resistor is connected across the secondary coil and dissipates 24 W of power.
primary coil secondary coil

6000 turns 600 turns
output voltage 12 V
power 24 W
What is the current in the primary coil of the transformer?
A 0.050 A B 0.20 A C 5.0 A D 20 A
38 In the diagram, the circle represents an atom (not to scale) with the nucleus at its centre.
A particle is emitted by a radioactive source and approaches the nucleus of the atom. The curved
arrow shows the path of the particle.
nucleus
path of
particle
What is the nature and charge of the particle?
nature of particle charge of particle
A α-particle negative
B α-particle positive
C β-particle negative
D β-particle positive

18
39 Which row describes the behaviour of γ-rays in an electric field and in a magnetic field?
electric field magnetic field
A deflected deflected
B deflected undeflected
C undeflected deflected
D undeflected undeflected
40 A radioactive source has a half-life of 0.5 hours.
A detector near the source shows a reading of 6000 counts per second.
Background radiation can be ignored.
What is the reading on the detector 1.5 hours later?
A 750 counts per second

B 1500 counts per second
C 2000 counts per second
D 3000 counts per second
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*7509628836*

IB17 11_0625_23/4RP
2
1 A measuring cylinder contains some water. A small metal block is slowly lowered into the water
and is then removed.
Finally a piece of plastic is attached to the metal block and the block is again slowly lowered into
the water.
The diagrams show the measuring cylinder at each stage of this process.
1 2 3
cm3 cm3 cm3
100 100 100
90 90 90
80 80 80
70 70 70
60 60 60
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20 plastic
10 10 10
metal block metal block
What is the volume of the piece of plastic?
A 10 cm3 B 25 cm3 C 70 cm3 D 80 cm3
2 Four balls with different masses are dropped simultaneously from the heights shown.
Which ball hits the floor first?
A B C D
4.0 kg
3.0 kg
2.0 kg
2.0 m
1.0 kg
1.5 m
1.0 m
0.5 m ground
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

3
3 The diagram shows the vertical forces acting on a ball as it falls vertically through the air. The ball
does not reach terminal velocity.
air resistance
weight
Which row describes what happens to the resultant force on the ball and what happens to the
acceleration of the ball as it falls through the air?
resultant force acceleration
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
spring
metal
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight

4
5 On the Moon, all objects fall with the same acceleration.
Which statement explains this?
A On the Moon, all objects have the same weight.

B The Moon has a smaller gravitational field strength than the Earth.
C The weight of an object is directly proportional to its mass.
D The weight of an object is inversely proportional to its mass.
6 A pair of cutters is used to cut a rope.
blade
handle
P
Q
R
S
blade
handle
Where should the rope be positioned and at which labelled points should the hands be positioned
to produce the greatest cutting force?
rope hands
positioned positioned
A P R
B P S
C Q R
D Q S
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

5
7 The lamp in the diagram is not very stable and falls over easily.
shade
stem
base
Which row shows changes that would definitely make the lamp more stable?
base centre of gravity
A narrower higher
B narrower lower
C wider higher
D wider lower
10 N
10 N
A 7.5 N B 8.6 N C 18 N D 20 N

6
9 An object has a mass of 60 kg.
It decelerates from 50 m / s to 20 m / s when a resultant force of 300 N acts on it.
For how long does the force act?
A 0.071 s B 0.17 s C 6.0 s D 14 s
10 A car, starting from rest at position X, accelerates up a hill. The car reaches a speed of 10 m / s at
position Y.
The kinetic energy of the car at position Y is equal to its gain in gravitational potential energy from
X to Y.
X gain in
height
of car
Take the gravitational field strength g to be 10 N / kg.
What is the gain in height of the car between X and Y?
A 0.50 m B 5.0 m C 10 m D 50 m
11 A 150 W filament lamp has an efficiency of 10%. A 40 W compact fluorescent lamp (CFL) has an
efficiency of 30%.
Each lamp is switched on for the same amount of time.
Which lamp produces more light and which lamp converts more energy into other forms of
energy?
converts more energy

produces more light
into other forms
A CFL lamp CFL lamp

B CFL lamp filament lamp
C filament lamp CFL lamp
D filament lamp filament lamp
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

7
height
length
gravity?

cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40
30
20
10
mercury
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm

8
A B C D
pressure reason

© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

9
glass tube
mercury
air
water

17 Which property cannot be used for the measurement of temperature?
A half-life of a radioactive isotope

B length of a solid metal bar
C pressure of a gas
D volume of a liquid
18 A student uses an immersion heater to heat some water in a beaker.
The water is heated from 20 °C to 80 °C.
The energy supplied to the water is 60.0 kJ.
What is the thermal capacity of the water? (Ignore any heat loss.)
A 667 J / °C B 750 J / °C C 1000 J / °C D 3000 J / °C

10
19 Why is the heating coil of a domestic immersion heater placed at the bottom of the tank?
A Cold water is less dense than hot water and therefore sinks.
B Cold water is more dense than hot water and therefore rises.
C Hot water is less dense than cold water and therefore rises.
D Hot water is more dense than cold water and therefore sinks.
wavefronts
A B
reflected
reflected
C D
reflected
reflected
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

11
21 The diagram shows a ray of light in glass. The ray reaches a boundary with air.
One weak ray of light is missing from the diagram.
air
glass 50°
A At the boundary, the speed of the light will become less.
B The critical angle for light at this boundary is 50°.

C The diagram shows an example of diffraction of light.
D The missing ray is a weak reflected ray.
22 Light travelling in air enters a plastic block at an angle of incidence of 62°.
The plastic has a refractive index of 1.48.
plastic block
62°
ray of
light
What is the angle of refraction?
A 18° B 28° C 37° D 42°

12
23 A sound wave travels from a medium in one state into the same medium but in another state.
This causes the speed of the wave to change from approximately 300 m / s to approximately
3000 m / s.
Between which two states is the sound wave travelling?
A gas to solid
B liquid to gas
C liquid to solid
D solid to liquid
A 1.27 ms B 2.53 ms C 1.27 s D 2.53 s
25 Which statement about radio waves is correct?
A They are used in television remote controllers.

B They can be detected by the human eye.
C They travel as longitudinal waves.
D They have the same speed in a vacuum as ultraviolet waves.
26 The diagram shows the Earth and its surroundings.
Through which labelled region can sound not be transmitted?
A B C D
sea land atmosphere outer space
(water) (rock) (air) (vacuum)
not to scale
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

13

magnet
train of train of

29 What is the best method to demagnetise a steel rod?
A Pass the rod through a coil connected to an a.c. supply.

B Pass the rod through a coil connected to a d.c. supply.
C Place the rod next to another magnet.
D Stroke the rod with another magnet.
30 There is a current in a metal wire.
Which particles in the wire move to cause this current?
A α-particles
B electrons
C neutrons
D protons

14
the circuit.
P Q
A 0.10 1.0
B 0.10 2.0
C 0.20 1.0
D 0.20 2.0
32 A battery is connected to a circuit. It is switched on for 1.0 minute. During that time, there is a
current of 0.40 A in the circuit and the battery supplies a total of 48 J of energy.
Which row gives the charge that passes and the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?
charge that passes e.m.f. of the

in 1.0 minute / C battery / V
A 0.40 2.0
B 0.40 120
C 24 2.0
D 24 120
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

15
33 Identical cells and identical resistors are used to make the circuits shown.
A A
circuit 1 circuit 2
In circuit 1, the ammeter reads 2.0 A.
What is the ammeter reading in circuit 2?
A 1.0 A B 2.0 A C 4.0 A D 8.0 A
ammeter.
resistance of
thermistor


16
35 The diagram shows an AND gate and an OR gate connected together.
X
Y
output
Z
Which combination of inputs X, Y and Z gives an output of 0?
X Y Z
A 0 0 1
B 0 1 1
C 1 0 0
D 1 1 0
36 The diagram shows a short-circuited copper coil swinging about an axis at right-angles to a
strong magnetic field. The motion induces a current in the coil.
axis of rotation
of coil
coil
magnetic field
direction of
swing of coil
What is the effect, if any, of this induced current in the coil?
A The induced current has no effect on the movement of the coil because copper is non-
magnetic.
B The induced current produces a magnetic field of constant magnitude in the coil.
C The induced current produces forces that assist the change causing it.
D The induced current produces forces that oppose the changes causing it.
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

17
37 Diagram 1 shows a magnet being pushed into a coil that is connected to a centre-zero
galvanometer.
N
stationary
magnet
S N
0 0 0
N
S
Which row shows the directions of the pointer when the magnet is as shown in diagrams 2
and 3?
diagram 2 diagram 3

18
38 Radioactive carbon-14 decays to nitrogen-14 by the emission of a particle.
14 14
6C → 7N + particle
Which particle has been emitted in this process?
A a β-particle
B an α-particle
C a neutron
D a proton
39 As α-particles pass through the electric field between two charged plates, they are deflected
downwards.
+ + + + + + + + +
α-particles
– – – – – – – – –
What happens to γ-rays passing through the same electric field?
A They are deflected downwards more than the α-particles.

B They are deflected upwards.
C They are not deflected at all.
D They follow the same path as the α-particles.
40 Radioactive iodine-131 emits β-particles and has a half-life of 8 days. It decays to produce
xenon-131.
Which statement about this decay is correct?
A After 8 days no more β-particles are emitted.

B After 8 days the number of xenon-131 atoms has halved.
C After 16 days the iodine-131 has decayed completely.
D After 16 days the number of iodine-131 atoms has reduced to one quarter.
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

* 8 4 1 4 5 1 1 5 9 5 *
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Theory (Core) October/November 2017
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Answer all questions.

You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NF/SG) 132269/7
2
1 A student clamps a metre rule to the end of a bench, as shown in Fig. 1.1. He attaches a mass to
the end of the rule.
mass
bench metre rule
Fig. 1.1
The student displaces the end of the rule by a small distance. The rule oscillates up and down.
The student measures the time for ten complete oscillations.
(a) State the name of a measuring device for timing the oscillations.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State a reason why the student measures the time for ten oscillations, rather than for one.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The student repeats the procedure. His results are shown in the table.
results time for ten complete oscillations / seconds
1st 3.93
2nd 4.07
3rd 3.55
4th 3.99
(i) One of the results is incorrect. On the table, draw a ring around the incorrect result. [1]
(ii) Calculate the average value for the time for ten complete oscillations.
average time = ................................................... s [2]
(iii) Determine the time for one complete oscillation. State your answer to two significant
figures.
time = .................................................... s [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/31/O/N/17

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a river flowing through a village. There are two bridges across the river.
bridge X
direction of flow
bridge Y
Fig. 2.1
Two students plan to measure the speed of a stick as it floats on the river between bridge X
and bridge Y.
(a) The students plan to drop a stick into the middle of the river from bridge X. The stick moves
with the water between bridge X and bridge Y.
Describe how the students can determine the average speed of the stick.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) The stick moves with constant speed.

One statement correctly describes the horizontal forces acting on the stick.
Put a tick (✓) in the box next to the correct statement.
Only a forward force acts.
The forward force and the backward force are equal.
The forward force is greater than the backward force.
The backward force is greater than the forward force.

[1]
[Total: 5]

4
3 Fig 3.1 shows a warning marker floating on the surface of a lake.
warning marker
surface of lake
metal chain
heavy object
bottom of lake
Fig. 3.1
The marker is attached by a metal chain to a heavy object on the bottom of the lake.
(a) Fig. 3.2 shows the forces acting on the marker at one moment in time.
280 N
250 N
Fig. 3.2
Calculate the resultant force on the marker.
resultant force = ........................................................ N
direction = ...........................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/31/O/N/17

5
(b) Fig. 3.3 shows part of the metal chain. It is made from small metal loops.
Fig. 3.3
A damaged loop is removed from the chain. Describe a method to determine the density of
the metal from which the loops are made.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 7]

6
4 Fig. 4.1 shows two methods for generating electricity using renewable sources.
Fig. 4.1a Fig. 4.1b
Fig. 4.1
(a) Name the energy source for each method.
In Fig. 4.1a, the energy source is .............................................................................................
In Fig. 4.1b, the energy source is .............................................................................................

[2]
(b) (i) State two advantages of using renewable sources for generating electricity compared to
using a coal-fired power station.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State one disadvantage of using renewable sources for generating electricity compared
to using a coal-fired power station.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017 0625/31/O/N/17

7
5 Complete the sentences. Choose from the words in the box.
solid liquid gas
The words may be used once, more than once or not at all.
(a) The atoms are usually arranged in regular patterns in a ..................... . [1]
(b) The state of matter with the lowest density is a ..................... . [1]
(c) Evaporation takes place when the most energetic molecules leave the surface of a
..................... . [1]
(d) A small force can change the volume of a ..................... . [1]
[Total: 4]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light inside a semi-circular glass block.
air
glass
Fig. 6.1
The angle of incidence at the straight surface is less than the critical angle for the glass.
On Fig. 6.1, continue the path of the ray. [2]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows another ray of light inside a semi-circular glass block.
air
glass
Fig. 6.2
The angle of incidence at the straight surface is greater than the critical angle for the glass.
(i) On Fig. 6.2, continue the path of the ray. [2]

(ii) State the term used to describe what happens to the light when it strikes the straight
surface in Fig. 6.2.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/31/O/N/17

9
(c) A wave on the surface of water approaches a barrier. There is a small gap in the barrier, as
shown in Fig. 6.3.
barrier
water
wave
gap
Fig. 6.3
On Fig. 6.3, draw three wavefronts that have passed through the gap. [2]
[Total: 7]

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a man listening to a radio.
centre of loudspeaker
Fig. 7.1
(i) Sound from the radio makes an air particle at X vibrate.
On Fig. 7.1 draw two arrows on point X to show the directions of vibration of the air
particle. [2]
(ii) Which of these terms correctly describes the sound wave?
Tick one box.
transverse
longitudinal
electromagnetic [1]
(iii) Suggest a value for the frequency of the sound that the man can hear. State the unit.
frequency = ................................................................ [2]
(iv) Explain why the man cannot hear ultrasound.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/31/O/N/17

11
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a distance-time graph for ultrasound travelling in sea-water.
1000
distance / m
800
600
400
200
0
0 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80
time / s
Fig. 7.2
(i) Use the graph to calculate the speed of ultrasound in sea-water.
speed = ............................................. m / s [2]
(ii) A scientist measures the depth of the sea by using ultrasound. She sends a pulse of
ultrasound from the ship to the seabed. It reflects from the seabed as shown in Fig. 7.3.
reflection pulse of
ultrasound
Fig. 7.3
The time taken between sending a pulse and receiving the echo is 0.60 s. Use the graph
to determine the depth of the sea.
depth = ................................................. m [2]

[Total: 10]
12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a plotting compass and a bar magnet. The plotting compass consists of a small
magnet in the shape of an arrow. The arrow can rotate freely on a pivot.
plotting
compass
pivot
bar magnet
Fig. 8.1
(a) Describe how to use this apparatus to identify the magnetic field pattern of the bar magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2017 0625/31/O/N/17

13
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a bar magnet.
N S
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2 draw the magnetic field pattern around the bar magnet. Use arrows to show the
direction of the field. [3]
[Total: 6]

14
9 A student investigates how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature.

Fig. 9.1 shows part of the circuit the student uses.
power
source
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.1, label the thermistor. [1]

(ii) The student measures the potential difference (p.d.) across the thermistor.
On Fig. 9.1, draw a voltmeter symbol, correctly connected, to measure this potential
difference. [2]
(b) The student varies the temperature of the thermistor and measures the current in it.
Some of the results are shown in the table.
temperature of
20 40 60 80
thermistor / °C
current in thermistor / A 0.005 0.010 0.040
(i) The potential difference across the thermistor is 6.0 V.

Calculate the resistance of the thermistor when its temperature is 40 °C.
resistance = .................................................. Ω [3]
© UCLES 2017 0625/31/O/N/17

15
(ii) Describe and explain what happens to the current in the thermistor as the temperature of
the thermistor rises.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Suggest a value for the current in the thermistor at 80 °C.
........................................................... A [1]
(c) At a different temperature, the resistance of the thermistor is 300 Ω and the resistance of the
variable resistor is 400 Ω.
Calculate the value of their combined resistance.
combined resistance = .................................................. Ω [1]
[Total: 10]

16
10 (a) A student investigates electromagnetic induction.
Fig. 10.1 shows the arrangement she uses.
wire
S
N
0
–2 +2 sensitive centre-zero meter
Fig. 10.1
When the student holds the wire stationary, as shown in Fig. 10.1, the reading on the meter is
zero.
She moves the wire down between the poles of the magnet. Then she holds it stationary and
then moves it up.
(i) The meter measures the size and direction of the induced electromotive force (e.m.f.).
On Fig. 10.2, draw the position of the pointer on the meter at each stage.
One has been done for you.
0 0 0
–2 +2 –2 +2 –2 +2
wire moving down wire stationary wire moving up

[2]
Fig. 10.2
(ii) Describe how the student could increase the size of the induced electromotive force
(e.m.f.).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/31/O/N/17

17
(b) A transformer is used near a power station.

There are 60 turns on the input coil and 660 turns on the output coil.
The input voltage is 25 000 V.
Calculate the output voltage.
output voltage = .................................................. V [3]
(c) State two advantages of high-voltage transmission of electrical energy.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

18
11 A nucleus of polonium-210 can be represented as 210Po.

84
(a) (i) State the number of protons in a nucleus of polonium-210 .......................................... [1]
(ii) State the number of neutrons in a nucleus of polonium-210 ........................................ [1]
(iii) State the number of electrons in a neutral atom of polonium-210 ............................... [1]
(b) Polonium-210 is radioactive. When polonium-210 decays it emits alpha radiation.
Name two other types of radiation emitted when radioactive elements decay.
........................................................... and ........................................................... [1]
(c) Polonium-210 has a half-life of 138 days.
A sample of polonium-210 has a mass of 0.4 g.
Calculate the time for the sample to decay until only 0.1 g of polonium-210 remains.
time = ............................................ days [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/31/O/N/17

19
12 A scientist needs to reduce the risks when working with radioactive sources.
(a) Explain why radioactive sources can be dangerous.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Describe how to reduce the risks when working with radioactive sources.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2017 0625/31/O/N/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/31/O/N/17

* 4 3 4 2 8 0 7 2 8 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/32
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SG) 132270/7
2
1 (a) Nuclear power stations generate electricity.
Which of these statements describe an advantage of using nuclear power stations, and which
of them describe a disadvantage?
Put a tick (✓) in the correct column for each statement. The first one is done for you.
statement advantage disadvantage
nuclear power stations require high levels of security ✓
nuclear power stations produce small amounts of carbon

dioxide
nuclear power stations have a small effect on climate
change
waste radioactive material can take a very long time to
decay
[3]
(b) Describe how electricity may be generated using geothermal resources.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/32/O/N/17

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a speed-time graph for a ship starting to move.
D
10
speed C
6
m/s
4
B
2
A
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time / minutes
Fig. 2.1
(a) Describe the motion of the ship during each section of the graph.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
B ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
C ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
D ...............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Determine the distance travelled by the ship in section B of the graph.
distance = ..................................................... m [3]
[Total: 7]

4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a glass vase used for displaying flowers.
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mass of the glass is 450 g. The volume of glass in the vase is 145 cm3.
(i) Calculate the density of the glass.
density = .............................................. g / cm3 [3]
(ii) Calculate the weight of the glass.
weight = ...................................................... N [3]
(b) Another vase has a weight of 30 N. The area of the base in contact with a table is 80.0 cm2.
Calculate the pressure this vase exerts on the table.
pressure = .............................................. N / cm2 [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 0625/32/O/N/17
5
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a fairground ride.
pylon
pylon
starting position
path of cabin
cabin
Fig. 4.1
People sit inside a cabin suspended between two pylons. The cabin is lifted to the starting position
shown in Fig. 4.1.
(a) State the name of the type of energy gained by the cabin as it rises.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The cabin is released and swings down between the two pylons. The path of the cabin is
shown on Fig. 4.1. The cabin has maximum kinetic energy at one point on its path. Draw this
point on Fig. 4.1 and label this point X. [1]
(c) A force opposes the motion of the cabin as it falls. State the name of this force.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) After a few swings, a brake system stops the cabin (not shown on the diagram).
Use ideas about energy transfer to suggest how the brake system stops the cabin.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]

6
5 A cup made from plastic, containing a hot drink, is shown in Fig. 5.1.
plastic sides
hot drink
air
Fig. 5.1
(a) State the term given to materials that reduce the transfer of thermal energy.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The hot drink gradually cools.
Describe and explain two processes by which thermal energy is transferred from the hot
drink.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/32/O/N/17

7
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light reflected from mirror 1 at point P and striking mirror 2 at point Q.
45° P plane mirror 1

ray of light
plane mirror 2
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1,
• clearly mark the position of the normal at Q,
• draw the ray reflected from point Q,
• mark the angle of reflection at Q using the letter r,
State the law you used to draw the reflected ray.
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Compare the direction of the ray reflected from mirror 2 at Q with the direction of the ray
incident on mirror 1 at P. Tick one box.
The ray of light reflected from mirror 2 is
parallel to the incident ray at P,
perpendicular to the incident ray at P,
at an angle of 45° to the incident ray at P. [1]

8
(c) A thin, converging lens forms an image, I, of an object, O, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
24 cm 10 cm 8 cm
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, label a principal focus of the lens, using the letter F. [1]
(ii) State the focal length of the lens.
focal length = .................................................... cm [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/32/O/N/17

9
7 Fig. 7.1 shows the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
radio micro- infra-red ultraviolet X-rays gamma rays

waves waves
visible
ROY_B_V
Fig. 7.1
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows the first letter of some colours in the visible part of the spectrum.
State which colours are missing.
................................................................... and ................................................................... [1]
(b) State the names of the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum that are used in
(i) communications,
............................................................... and ............................................................... [1]
(ii) remote controls for televisions and DVD players.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Describe how high levels of microwave energy can be dangerous to people.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) State two safety precautions required when using X-rays.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]

10
8 (a) An atom of carbon contains protons, neutrons and electrons.
Indicate where each particle is found in the atom. Place a tick in the appropriate box.
particle in the orbiting the

nucleus nucleus
electron
neutron
proton
[3]
(b) An atom of carbon contains 6 protons, 7 neutrons and 6 electrons.
(i) State the proton number of the carbon.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the nucleon number of the carbon.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Carbon has many different isotopes.
(i) Explain the meaning of the term isotope.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The nuclide notation for the carbon in (b) is 13C.

6
Suggest the nuclide notation for another possible isotope of carbon.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/32/O/N/17

11
9 Some metals can be used to make permanent magnets.
(a) Identify the metal that can form a permanent magnet.

Tick one box.
copper iron steel [1]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit that is used to make a permanent magnet.
12 V
coil
Fig. 9.1
(i) On Fig. 9.1, label the variable resistor with the letter X. [1]
(ii) Describe how the circuit is used to make a permanent magnet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows the coil from Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.2
On Fig. 9.2 carefully sketch the pattern of the magnetic field produced by the coil. [2]
[Total: 7]
12
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a series circuit.
fixed resistor
5.6 Ω
A
light-dependent
resistor (LDR)
Fig. 10.1
(a) In dim light, the resistance of the LDR is 20.0 Ω.
(i) The resistance of the battery and ammeter can be ignored.
Calculate the resistance of the circuit.
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [1]
(ii) The current in the circuit is 0.23 A.
Calculate the potential difference across the fixed resistor.
potential difference (voltage) = ...................................................... V [3]
(b) A bright light shines on to the LDR.
State and explain what happens to the current in the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/32/O/N/17

13
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a charger for a mobile (cell) phone. The charger contains a transformer.
Fig. 11.1
(a) The primary coil of the transformer has 900 turns and the secondary coil has 49 turns.
The input voltage to the transformer is 220 V.
Calculate the output voltage.
output voltage = ...................................................... V [3]
(b) State the name of the metal used to make the coils of the transformer.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) A transformer uses an alternating current (a.c.).
Describe the difference between alternating current (a.c.) and direct current (d.c.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]

14
12 Fig. 12.1 shows some equipment used in a demonstration.
wires from battery

rubber bung
electric bell glass jar
hammer
gong
to vacuum pump
Fig. 12.1
The glass jar is connected to a vacuum pump. The electric bell is switched on. The observers see
and hear the bell working.
(a) (i) The vacuum pump removes air from the glass jar. State what the observers see and
what they hear after the air is removed.
observers see ....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
observers hear ..................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what the demonstration in (a)(i) shows about the transmission of sound waves.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) When the bell is working, the hammer strikes the gong. Describe how the gong produces
the sound.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/32/O/N/17

15
(b) Indicate the lowest and highest frequencies that can be heard by the human ear.
Tick one box from each column.
lowest frequency highest frequency
2 Hz 20 kHz
20 Hz 200 kHz
200 Hz 2 MHz
2 kHz 20 MHz
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/32/O/N/17

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/32/O/N/17

* 6 3 2 4 8 0 1 2 8 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/33
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SG) 132271/7
2
1 (a) A student determines the speed of three cars on a straight road.

The student measured the time for the cars to travel 50 m.
The table shows the measurements.
car distance travelled / m time taken / s

A 50 3.2
B 50 4.0
C 50 3.6
(i) Without calculation, identify the fastest car and the slowest car.
Complete the table.
car
the fastest car
the slowest car

[2]
(ii) Calculate the speed of car B.
speed = .................................................. m / s [3]
(b) (i) Estimate the time, in minutes, for car C to travel 5000 m.
estimated time = ........................................... minutes [2]
(ii) Explain why your answer in (b)(i) may not be the same as the actual time taken for the
car to travel 5000 m.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/33/O/N/17

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a metal object discovered by a scientist using a metal detector.
Fig. 2.1
The scientist wants to know the type of metal from which the object is made. She needs to find the
density of the metal.
(a) Describe how the scientist can measure the volume of the object, using the method of
displacement.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) The mass of the metal object is 347 g and its volume is 18 cm3.
Calculate the density of the metal.
density = .............................................. g / cm3 [3]
[Total: 7]

4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a large box with a heavy lid.
Fig. 3.1
(a) The weight of the box is 2250 N.
Calculate the mass of the box.
mass = ..................................................... kg [3]
(b) A man wants to lift the lid of the box. He puts a strong metal bar between the box and the lid.
He applies a force to the bar as shown in Fig. 3.2.
metal bar
40 cm
400 N
pivot
Fig. 3.2
(i) Calculate the moment of his force about the pivot. State the unit.
moment = .......................................................... [4]
(ii) The moment in (b)(i) is not sufficient to lift the lid. Describe how the man can increase
the moment, using the same force.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/33/O/N/17

5
4 A catapult consists of a rubber band attached to a handle. A student uses the catapult to fire a ball
towards a target. Fig. 4.1 shows the catapult just before the student releases the rubber band.
rubber band
ball
handle
Fig. 4.1
(a) When the student releases the rubber band, the ball moves towards the target.
Complete the following sentences about energy transfers during this process. Use words
from the box. You may use each word once, more than once or not at all.
elastic force friction gravitational kinetic thermal
(i) As the rubber band is pulled back, the work done is transferred into ...........................
potential energy. [1]
(ii) When the student releases the rubber band, the ball moves forward horizontally. Stored
........................... potential energy is transferred into ........................... energy. [2]
(iii) As the ball travels through the air there is friction with air molecules. This causes some of
the ball’s ........................... energy to be transferred into ........................... energy. [2]

6
(b) The ball does not reach the target, as shown in Fig. 4.2.
path of ball
Fig. 4.2
Describe how the student can increase the energy of the ball, using the same catapult.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/33/O/N/17

7
5 A vehicle may have tyres of type A or type B, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
type A type B
Fig. 5.1
(a) State and explain the type of tyre that is suitable for travelling over soft ground.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The temperature of the air in a tyre increases. This affects the motion of the air molecules in
the tyre.
Describe and explain the changes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]

8
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
liquid
°C
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) Which of these metals is often used for the liquid in thermometers?
Tick the correct box.
magnesium
mercury
silver [1]
(ii) The thermometer is placed inside a freezer containing ice.

Suggest the temperature of the ice. Draw an arrow on Fig. 6.1. [1]
(iii) A thermometer is calibrated using two fixed points. State the temperatures of the two
fixed points.
lower fixed point = ............................. °C
upper fixed point = ............................. °C [1]
(b) The sentences are about thermal processes.

Complete each sentence. Use words from the box. Each word may be used once, more than
once or not at all.
conductor convection emitter insulator radiation reflection
• A dull black surface is a good ...............................
• Copper is used to make pans because it is a good thermal ................................
• In fluids, thermal energy is transferred mainly by ........................................
• Thermal energy reaches Earth from the Sun by means of ......................

[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/33/O/N/17

9
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a floating plastic ball attached by a long rope to a weight on the bottom of a lake.
A water wave on the surface of the lake causes the ball to move vertically up and down.
direction of travel of the water wave

ball
24 cm
rope
weight
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, indicate the wavelength of the wave. Label the distance W. [1]
(b) Determine the amplitude of the wave.
amplitude = .................................................... cm [1]
(c) The ball reaches its maximum height 40 times in 60 seconds. Calculate the frequency of the
wave.
frequency = .................................................... Hz [2]
(d) Explain how the motion of the ball shows that the water wave is transverse.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) State another example of a transverse wave.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

10
8 Fig 8.1 shows two parallel rays of light that pass through a thin converging lens. The diagram is
incomplete. There is a principal focus at f1 and at f2 .
C
X f1 f2 Y
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 8.1, complete the ray diagram to show how the lens focuses the light. [3]
(ii) Which distance on Fig. 8.1 is a focal length of the lens? Tick (✓) one box.
C to f2
f1 to f2
f2 to Y [1]
(b) (i) A ray of light travels through a semicircular glass block, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
z
air
glass block
Fig. 8.2
State the term given to the angle of incidence labelled z.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Fig. 8.3 shows another ray of light travelling in the semicircular glass block.
air
glass block
Fig. 8.3
The angle of incidence is greater than z. Continue the path of the ray of light until it
leaves the block. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/33/O/N/17
11
9 A machine pushes a metal post into the ground using a hammer, as shown in Fig. 9.1. The hammer
makes a loud noise when it hits the post.
hammer
machine
post
Fig. 9.1
A man stands 160 m from the hammer.
(a) A man sees the hammer hit the post and a short time later hears the sound of the post being
hit. Explain the delay in hearing the sound.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) The hammer is 320 m from a large building as shown in Fig. 9.2.
large
building
320 m 160 m
machine man
post
Fig. 9.2
The man hears the hammer hit the post and then hears an echo. Explain why he hears
the echo.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

12
(ii) The speed of sound in air is 320 m / s.
Calculate the time difference between the man hearing the first sound and the time at
which he hears the echo.
time difference = .......................................................... [3]
(c) Suggest how the sound of the echo is different from the first sound.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/33/O/N/17

13
10 A student places a bar magnet onto a sheet of paper, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
sheet of paper
X Y
S N
Fig. 10.1
(a) The student shows the pattern of the magnetic field lines around the magnet.
(i) On Fig. 10.1 carefully draw two magnetic field lines above the centre line XY and two
magnetic field lines below XY. [2]
(ii) Indicate the direction of the magnetic field lines. Use an arrow. Mark one field line above
XY and one field line below XY. [1]
(iii) State the name of a piece of equipment that can be used to determine the direction of
the magnetic field.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe how the student can use a bar magnet to test whether a metal rod is a magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]

14
11 A student wants to find the resistance of a wire. He connects the circuit shown in Fig. 11.1.
V
wire
Fig. 11.1
(a) A teacher checks the circuit and identifies three errors.
Using the components given in Fig. 11.1, carefully draw the correct circuit diagram in the
space below.
[3]
(b) The student uses the correct circuit. The student finds that the current is 0.3 A when the
potential difference across the wire is 2.7 V.
Calculate the resistance of the wire.
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [3]
© UCLES 2017 0625/33/O/N/17

15
(c) The student tests two other pieces of wire made of the same metal. He compares each
resistance value with that of the first wire.
State how the resistance compares with the first wire
(i) for a wire that is longer, but of the same thickness,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) for a wire that is thicker, but of the same length.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

16
12 This question is about radioactive materials.
(a) State the name of the electromagnetic radiation emitted by some nuclei when they decay.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Describe the composition and the penetrating ability of an α-particle.
composition ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
penetrating ability .....................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Americium-241 is a radioactive isotope. It has a half-life of 400 years.
A sample contains americium-241. Calculate the percentage of americium-241 that remains

in the sample after 800 years have passed.
percentage remaining = ..................................................... % [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017 0625/33/O/N/17

* 2 9 3 9 1 8 7 0 1 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) October/November 2017
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/SG) 133346/7
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for the motion of a car.
20
speed
m/s
15
10
0
0 10 20 30 40
time / s
Fig. 1.1
The mass of the car is 1200 kg.
(a) Calculate, for the first 20 s of the motion,
(i) the distance travelled by the car,
distance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the acceleration of the car,
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the resultant force acting on the car.
resultant force = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Describe the motion of the car in the period of time from 25 s to 40 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17
3
2 (a) State Hooke’s Law.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) For forces up to 120 N, a spring obeys Hooke’s Law.
A force of 120 N causes an extension of 64 mm.
(i) On Fig. 2.1, draw the force-extension graph for the spring for loads up to 120 N. [1]
150
force / N
100
50
0
0 20 40 60 80
extension / mm
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Calculate the spring constant k of the spring.
k = ...........................................................[2]
(c) A student makes a spring balance using the spring in (b). The maximum reading of this
balance is 150 N.
The student tests his balance with a known weight of 140 N. He observes that the reading of
the balance is not 140 N.
Suggest and explain why the reading is not 140 N.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

4
3 All the sides of a plastic cube are 8.0 cm long. Fig. 3.1 shows the cube.
8.0 cm
Fig. 3.1 (not to scale)
The mass of the cube is 0.44 kg.
(a) Explain what is meant by mass.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Calculate the density of the plastic from which the cube is made.
density = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The density of one type of oil is 850 kg / m3.
State and explain whether the cube floats or sinks when placed in a container of this oil.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) On the Moon, the weight of the cube is 0.70 N.
(i) Calculate the gravitational field strength on the Moon.
gravitational field strength = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

5
(ii) In a laboratory on the Moon, the plastic cube is held stationary, using a clamp, in a
beaker of the oil of density 850 kg / m3.
The arrangement is shown in Fig. 3.2.
clamp
cube
3.0 cm clamp
stand
oil
bench
Fig. 3.2
The lower face of the cube is 3.0 cm below the surface of the oil.
Use your answer to (c)(i) to calculate the pressure due to the oil on the lower face of the
cube.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

6
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a balloon filled with helium that is used to lift measuring instruments to a great
height above the Earth’s surface.
Fig. 4.1
(a) Explain, in terms of momentum, how the atoms of helium produce a force on the wall of the
balloon.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) At ground level, the pressure of the helium in the balloon is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The volume occupied
by the helium is 9.6 m3.
The balloon is released and it rises quickly through the atmosphere. The volume occupied by
the helium increases, but the temperature of the helium may be assumed to stay constant.
(i) Explain, in terms of the helium atoms in the balloon, why the pressure in the balloon is
smaller than at ground level.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the pressure of the helium when it occupies a volume of 12 m3.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

7
5 (a) A wave passes through a gap in a barrier. The wavelength of the wave is the same magnitude
as the width of the gap in the barrier.
Tick one box to indicate what happens to the wave.
diffraction and dispersion

diffraction only
dispersion only
refraction and diffraction
refraction and dispersion
refraction only
[1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows six wavefronts of a wave travelling on the surface of deep water. The wave is
incident on a boundary with a region where the water is shallow.
boundary
direction
of wave
deep water shallow

water
Fig. 5.1
(i) On Fig. 5.1, draw the wavefronts of the wave in the shallow water where the wave travels
more slowly. [2]
(ii) The depth of the shallow water is now changed so that the speed of the wave in the
shallow water is 0.60 m / s. The speed of the wave in the deep water is 0.80 m / s.
The distance between successive wavefronts in the deep water is 1.4 cm.
Calculate the wavelength of the wave in the shallow water.
wavelength = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) The left-hand column of the table shows some possible speeds of a sound wave.
In the right-hand column, write down the medium in which a sound wave has this speed.
Choose from solid, liquid or gas.
speed of sound wave medium

m/s
1500
5000
300
[2]
(b) Fig. 6.1 represents a series of compressions and rarefactions of a sound wave.
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, mark, with the letters X and Y, the mid-points of two rarefactions. [1]
(ii) State, in terms of pressure, what is meant by a rarefaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Astronauts set up a mirror on the Moon’s surface. A laser beam is transmitted from the Earth’s
surface to the mirror and is then reflected back to Earth.
On a certain day, the time between transmitting the beam from a point on the Earth’s surface
and receiving the reflected signal at the same point is 2.56 s.
The speed of the laser beam is 3.00 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the distance between the Earth’s surface and the Moon’s surface.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and its principal axis. The points labelled F are each a
principal focus of the lens.
F F
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the top of the object O, to locate the image of O.
Label the image I. [3]
(b) Underline three of the terms below to describe the nature of the image produced by a
converging lens used as a magnifying glass.
diminished enlarged inverted real same size upright virtual
[2]
(c) Fig. 7.2 shows the path of a ray of red light passing through a glass prism.
prism
air
Fig. 7.2
A ray of green light enters the prism along the same path as the ray of red light.
On Fig. 7.2, draw the path of the ray of green light as it passes through the prism and emerges
into the air. [2]
[Total: 7]

10
8 (a) Describe a renewable process by which electrical energy is obtained from the energy stored
in water. You may draw a diagram in the space.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Explain why the process described in (a) can be regarded as renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain whether the Sun is the source of the energy stored in the water in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

11
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit with three 1.5 V cells.
A H
C 3.0 Ω D
B G
E F
6.0 Ω
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate
(i) the total electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cells,
e.m.f. = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the total resistance of the circuit,
resistance = ...........................................................[3]
(iii) the current in the 3.0 Ω resistor.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(b) State, using the letters in Fig. 9.1, how you would connect
(i) an ammeter to measure the total current in the circuit,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) a voltmeter to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the 6.0 Ω resistor.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
12
10 (a) (i) Draw the circuit symbol for a diode.
[1]
(ii) State the function of a diode.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows the proposed system for charging the battery of an electric toothbrush.
battery
+ –
handle of
toothbrush
B
coil X
coil Y
230 V
base of
a.c.
charger
Fig. 10.1
The handle of the brush contains the battery and a coil X. The circuit from coil X to the battery
is not shown.
The base of the charger contains a coil Y, wound on an iron core, connected to the a.c. mains
supply.
To charge the battery, the handle is lowered so that coil Y is inside coil X.
Fig. 10.1 shows the direction needed for the charging current at the battery.
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

13
(i) On Fig. 10.1, complete the circuit from terminals A and B of coil X to the battery.
Include a diode. [2]
(ii) Explain how an alternating voltage is produced in coil X.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

14
11 The radioactive isotope carbon-14 (146 C) emits β-particles as it decays.
(a) The decay of carbon-14 produces an isotope of nitrogen (N).
(i) State the nature of a β-particle and state where it is produced.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Complete the nuclide equation for the radioactive decay of carbon-14.
14 C ..... .....
6 ..... N + ..... β [3]
(b) The half-life of carbon-14 is 5700 years.
Explain what is meant by the term half-life.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A workman operates a machine that uses β-particles to determine the level of liquid in a
plastic water bottle that is being filled.
Suggest why
(i) α-particles are not suitable for the same purpose,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) γ-rays are not suitable for the same purpose.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

* 7 6 6 4 1 9 6 2 9 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/SG) 133347/6
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a cylinder made from copper of density 9000 kg / m3.
Fig. 1.1
The volume of the cylinder is 75 cm3.
(a) Calculate the mass of the cylinder.
mass = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg.
(i) Calculate the weight of the cylinder.
weight = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) State one way in which weight differs from mass.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

3
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows the cylinder immersed in a liquid.
liquid
2.7 cm
cylinder
The upper face of the cylinder is at a depth of 2.7 cm below the surface of the liquid.
The pressure due to the liquid at the upper face of the cylinder is 560 Pa.
(i) Calculate the density of the liquid.
density = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why the cylinder does not float in this liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) An object is moving in a straight line at constant speed. A resultant force begins to act upon
the object.
State the ways in which the force may change the motion of the object.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) State one other effect a force could have on the object.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The mass of a car is 1400 kg. The car, initially at rest, is moved along a level road by a
resultant force of 3500 N. The car reaches a speed of 30 m / s.
(i) Calculate the average acceleration of the car.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the time for which the force is applied.
time = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) State the name of a force which opposes the motion of the car.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

5
3 (a) State the name of a fuel that is burnt to produce large amounts of electrical energy.
Describe a process by which electrical energy is obtained from the chemical energy stored in
this fuel.
Name of fuel: ............................................................................................................................
Description of process: .............................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Explain why the Sun is the source of the energy stored in the fuel in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain whether the process in (a) is renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

6
4 A beaker contains water at room temperature. Fig. 4.1 shows the beaker placed on a tripod above
a Bunsen burner.
Fig. 4.1
The Bunsen burner is lit and the temperature of the water begins to increase.
(a) The water is evaporating.
(i) Describe one difference between evaporation and boiling.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the rate at which the water evaporates as its
temperature increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

7
(b) After a few minutes, the water reaches its boiling point temperature. The water continues to
gain energy from the Bunsen burner.
(i) State what happens to the temperature of the water in the beaker.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2.3 × 106 J / kg. After the water reaches
its boiling point, it takes 12 minutes for 0.095 kg of water to boil away.
Calculate the average rate at which energy is being supplied to the water by heating.
rate of energy supplied = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

8
5 (a) Explain why houses in hot countries are often painted white.
Use ideas about the transfer of thermal energy in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) As a star approaches the end of its life, the amount of radiation emitted from it per second
changes.
The star cools down.

State any effect on the rate of emission of radiation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

9
6 Fig. 6.1 represents wavefronts of a water wave on the surface of water approaching a gap in a
barrier.
barrier with gap
direction of travel
of wavefronts
Fig. 6.1
(a) The wavefronts to the right of the barrier spread out as far as the dashed lines in Fig. 6.1.
(i) State the name of the process of spreading out.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Draw four wavefronts to the right of the barrier. [2]
(b) (i) State the effect of increasing the width of the gap in the barrier.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain the effect of decreasing the frequency of the water wave.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 is a diagram of a converging lens used to produce an image of an object. Each point
marked F is a principal focus.
object
F F
image
Fig. 7.1
Write down three terms that describe the image produced.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a plane mirror, a point object O and an observer’s eye.
mirror
O eye
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw two rays from the object reflected to the observer’s eye. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 7.2, complete your drawing to determine the position of the image of the object O.
Label this image I.
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

11
8 Fig. 8.1 is a circuit diagram.
24 V
8.0 Ω 4.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
Fig. 8.1
Calculate
(a) the resistance of the circuit,
resistance = ...........................................................[4]
(b) the potential difference (p.d.) across the 8.0 Ω resistor.
p.d. = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 is a circuit diagram.
Fig. 9.1
(i) State the names of circuit components A, B and C.
component A .....................................................................................................................
component B .....................................................................................................................
component C .....................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The circuit can be used to indicate a change in temperature.
State and explain what would be observed when the temperature changes from hot
to cold.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

13
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a digital circuit.
X
C
Fig. 9.2
Complete column X of the truth table for this circuit. Use the blank column for your working.
A B C X
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
[3]
[Total: 9]

14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a wire that carries a current into the page.
The circles on Fig. 10.1 show the pattern of the magnetic field around the wire.
Fig. 10.1
(i) On Fig. 10.1, draw an arrow on each circle to show the direction of the magnetic field. [1]
(ii) State why the spacing of the circles increases as the distance from the wire increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows an electric door lock.
The slot in the door contains an unmagnetised iron bolt attached to a spring.
The slot in the door frame is empty. This slot is surrounded by the coils of a solenoid.
In Fig. 10.2 the door is unlocked. The spring is not stretched.
door door frame
spring solenoid
unmagnetised
iron bolt
Fig. 10.2
In Fig. 10.3 the door is locked. The spring is now stretched.
Fig. 10.3
The bolt is initially in the position shown in Fig. 10.2.
Describe and explain what happens when
(i) the switch S is closed,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(ii) the switch S is reopened.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
16
11 The radioactive isotope bismuth-210 (210

83 Bi) decays by β-particle emission to an isotope of
polonium (Po).
(a) Complete the nuclide equation that represents this decay.

210 Bi ..... .....
83 ..... Po + ..... β
[3]
(b) A radiation detector is placed on a bench in a laboratory where there are no artificial sources
of radiation. The detector is switched on.
In seven one-minute periods, the detector displays these readings.
24 22 25 25 21 20 24
(i) Explain why, in the absence of any artificial source, there are readings on the detector.
Suggest one origin of this effect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why the readings obtained are not all the same.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The half-life of bismuth-210 is 5.0 days.

A sample of bismuth-210 is brought close to the detector and in one minute, the reading
displayed is 487. The equipment is left in the same place for exactly 10 days.
Predict the reading in a one-minute period at the end of this time.
reading = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

* 1 1 5 9 1 9 5 4 8 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/SG) 133348/6
2
1 A truck accelerates uniformly along a straight, horizontal road. The mass of the truck is
2.0 × 104 kg.
(a) The speed of the truck increases from rest to 12 m / s in 30 s.
Calculate
(i) the distance travelled by the truck during this time,
distance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the resultant force on the truck.
resultant force = ...........................................................[4]
(b) To maintain a uniform acceleration, the forward force on the truck must change.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a measuring cylinder that contains a coloured liquid.
cm3
100
90
80
70
60
50
40 h
30
20
X
10
0
Fig. 2.1
The measuring cylinder contains 82 cm3 of the liquid. The density of the liquid is 950 kg / m3.
(a) Calculate the mass of the liquid.
mass = ...........................................................[3]
(b) The height h of the liquid in the measuring cylinder is 0.094 m.
(i) Calculate the pressure due to the liquid at point X in Fig. 2.1.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]

4
(ii) The true pressure at point X is different from the value calculated in (b)(i).
Explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A small object is made of steel. It is placed level with the top surface of the liquid in the
measuring cylinder and then released. The object sinks in this liquid.
(i) Explain why the object sinks in this liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe how the volume of the object can now be determined.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows solar cells that use radiation from the Sun to generate electricity.
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State the name of the process which releases energy in the Sun.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A reaction takes place in the Sun as energy is released.
Describe what happens in this reaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Apart from solar cells, there are other energy resources used on Earth for which the radiation
from the Sun is the source.
State the name of one of these energy resources and explain whether it is renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State two advantages and two disadvantages of using solar cells to generate electricity.
advantage 1 ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
advantage 2 ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage 1 .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage 2 .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 9]
6
4 (a) The molecules of most liquids are, on average, slightly further apart than the molecules of a
solid.
State one other difference between the molecular structures of a solid and a liquid.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A glass tube passes through a stopper and into a glass flask. Fig. 4.1 shows that the flask is
completely full of a liquid and that there is also some liquid in the tube.
stopper
glass tube
glass flask
liquid
Fig. 4.1
The flask is immersed in a large beaker of very hot water. At first, the level of the liquid in the
tube falls, but after a short time it rises.
(i) Explain why, at first, the level of the liquid in the tube falls.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Explain why the liquid level in the tube stops falling and starts to rise.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

7
5 A silver spoon has a thermal capacity of 7.2 J / °C.
(a) Explain what is meant by thermal capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The silver spoon is dropped into a saucepan of boiling water. The internal energy of the
spoon increases as its temperature increases from 22 °C to 100 °C.
(i) Calculate the increase in the internal energy of the spoon.
increase in internal energy = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) State, in terms of the atoms, what is meant by internal energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The spoon is removed from the boiling water and immediately it begins to transfer energy to
the surroundings. The temperature of the surroundings is 22 °C.
On Fig. 5.1, sketch a graph to show how the temperature of the spoon changes with time
from the instant that it is removed from the water. [3]
100
temperature / °C
80
60
40
20
0
0 time
Fig. 5.1
[Total: 8]
8
6 Visible light is one component of the electromagnetic spectrum.
(a) (i) In the table, place a tick in the box next to the approximate value of the speed of light
in air. [1]
speed
m/s
3.0 × 1010
3.0 × 108
3.0 × 106
3.0 × 104
3.0 × 102
(ii) The frequency of a light wave is 4.8 × 1014 Hz.
Calculate the wavelength of this light in air.
wavelength = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Light is travelling in an optical fibre that is made of glass.
(i) The glass has a refractive index of 1.5.
1. Explain why the quantity refractive index does not have a unit.
........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................[1]
2. Calculate the speed of light in the glass.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Describe one use of optical fibres in communication technology.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17
9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and its principal axis. The points F1 and F2 are each a
principal focus of the lens.
principal axis O
F1 F2
Fig. 7.1
An object O is placed between F1 and the lens.
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the top of the object O to locate the image.
Label the image I. [3]
(ii) The object O is moved to the left along the principal axis so that it is further from the lens
than F1.
Fig. 7.2 is a diagram of the new arrangement with the new image shown.
F1 F2
principal axis
image
Fig. 7.2
Underline three of the terms below that describe the image shown in Fig. 7.2. [2]
diminished enlarged inverted real same size upright virtual

10
(b) Fig. 7.3 shows yellow light passing through a glass prism.
Fig. 7.3
Blue light enters the prism along the same path as the yellow light.
On Fig. 7.3, draw the path of the blue light as it enters, passes through and leaves the prism.
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

11
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows an uncharged conducting sphere on an insulating stand placed close to a
positively charged rod.
positively +
charged rod +
+
+ conducting sphere
+
+
insulating stand
Fig. 8.1
The rod and the sphere are not moved.
Describe how to charge the sphere using a wire connected to earth and explain whether the
sphere becomes positively charged or negatively charged.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a small black circle that represents a positive charge.
On Fig. 8.2, draw the pattern and the direction of the electric field in the region around the
charge. [2]
Fig. 8.2
(c) A charge of 7.0 C flows along a wire in 5.0 minutes.
Calculate the current in the wire.
current = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows the structure of an alternating current (a.c.) generator.
coil direction of
rotation
N S
slip rings
coil
voltage
output
Fig. 9.1
The coil completes one rotation every 0.020 s.
(i) Using the axes in Fig. 9.2, sketch a graph to show how the voltage output of the generator
varies with time during a period of 0.040 s. [2]
voltage
output
0
0 0.020 0.040
time / s
Fig. 9.2
(ii) On your graph in Fig. 9.2, mark a point labelled A to indicate a time when the coil is
vertical. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

13
(b) There is an alternating current (a.c.) in a horizontal wire that is buried in a wall. A builder must
miss this wire when drilling a hole in the wall.
The builder places an instrument against the wall that registers a reading when it is close to
the wire. The instrument includes a long coil (solenoid) S that has an iron core and a sensitive
voltmeter. Fig. 9.3 shows the circuit of the instrument close to the wire.
surface of wall
end view of wire
X
S V
alternating current
in wire
iron core
Fig. 9.3
(i) Explain why there is a reading on the voltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) State the name and the effect of the component labelled X in Fig. 9.3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) State the nature of γ-rays.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A nucleus of technetium-99 (99

43Tc) emits only a γ-ray.
State any effect of this on
(i) the proton number of the nucleus,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the nucleon number of the nucleus.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) In a laboratory a radiation detector displays a count rate of 16 counts / minute due to
background radiation.
(i) State what is meant by background radiation.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A sample of a radioactive isotope is placed near to the radiation detector and a count
rate of 112 counts / minute is recorded.
After 18 hours, the count rate recorded is 28 counts / minute.
Determine the half-life of this isotope.
half-life = ...........................................................[3]
(d) Radioactive isotopes are stored in thick lead containers.
State two precautions to be taken when radioactive isotopes are used.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

* 4 6 0 6 2 5 4 8 5 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/51
1 hour 15 minutes
Additional Materials: As listed in the Confidential Instructions.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page.

You are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4.
For Examiner’s Use
Total
DC (NH/AR) 133341/5
2
1 In this experiment, you will determine the weight of a load using a balancing method.
Carry out the following instructions, referring to Fig. 1.1.
metre rule
P Q
a b
bench
pivot
Fig. 1.1
(a) Place the metre rule on the pivot and adjust its position so that the metre rule is as near as
possible to being balanced. The 30.0 cm mark must be on the left-hand side of the pivot. The
metre rule must remain at this position on the pivot throughout the experiment.
Place the load P on the metre rule so that its centre is exactly at the 30.0 cm mark on the
metre rule.
Record the distance a between the 30.0 cm mark and the pivot.
a = ..................................................... cm [1]
(b) Place a load Q on the metre rule and adjust the position of Q so that the metre rule is as near
as possible to being balanced. Load Q has a weight Q of 1.0 N.
(i) Measure the distance b between the centre of load Q and the pivot. Record the weight Q
and the distance b in Table 1.1.
(ii) Repeat the procedure, with the load P remaining at the 30.0 cm mark, using Q values of
2.0 N, 3.0 N, 4.0 N and 5.0 N. Record all the readings in the table.
Table 1.1
Q/N b / cm 1 1
Q N
1
(iii) For each value of Q, calculate and record the result in the table.
Q
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0625/51/O/N/17

3
(c) Plot a graph of b / cm (y-axis) against 1 1 (x-axis).

Q N
[4]
(d) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
necessary information.
G = ...........................................................[2]
G
(e) Calculate the weight P of load P using the equation P = .
a
P = ...........................................................[1]
[Total: 11]

4
2 In this experiment, you will investigate resistance.
The circuit shown in Fig. 2.1 has been set up for you.
power
supply
RA
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) Switch on. Measure and record the potential difference V1 across the resistor RA and the
current I1 in the circuit.
V1 = ...............................................................
I1 = ...............................................................
[2]
V1
(ii) Switch off. Calculate the resistance R1 of the resistor RA using the equation R 1 = .
I1
R1 = ...........................................................[1]
(b) Disconnect the voltmeter.
Connect the resistor RB in series with RA.
Connect the voltmeter across the two resistors RA and RB. Switch on.
(i) Measure and record the potential difference V2 across resistors RA and RB combined
and the current I2 in the circuit.
V2 = ...............................................................
I2 = ...............................................................
(ii) Switch off. Calculate the resistance R2 of resistors RA and RB combined in series, using
V
the equation R 2 = 2 .
I2
R2 = ...............................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/51/O/N/17
5
(c) Disconnect the voltmeter.
Connect the resistor RC in series with RA and RB.
Connect the voltmeter across all three resistors. Switch on.
(i) Measure and record the potential difference V3 across the three resistors and the current
I3 in the circuit.
V3 = ...............................................................
I3 = ...............................................................
[1]
(ii) Switch off. Calculate the resistance R3 of resistors RA, RB and RC combined in series,
V3
using the equation R 3 = .
I3
R3 = ...........................................................[1]
(d) A student suggests that R3 = 3 × R1.
State whether your results agree with this suggestion. Justify your answer by reference to
your results.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(e) Another student suggests that the three resistors, RA, RB and RC, have the same value of
resistance.
Explain how you could use the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1 to check this suggestion.
You are not required to carry out this experiment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

6
(f) Complete the circuit diagram in Fig. 2.2 to show:
• the three resistors connected in parallel
• the voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the resistors
• a variable resistor connected to control the current in all three resistors.
power
supply
Fig. 2.2
[2]
(g) The circuit in Fig. 2.2 could be used to determine the combined resistance of three resistors
connected in parallel.
Suggest a reason for connecting a variable resistor in the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 0625/51/O/N/17

7
BLANK PAGE

8
3 In this experiment, you will determine the focal length f of a lens.
D
illuminated
object u v
screen
lens
bench
Fig. 3.1
(a) Place the centre of the lens at a distance u = 20.0 cm from the illuminated object.
Place the screen close to the lens and move it away from the lens until a sharply-focused
image is formed on the screen.
• Measure the distance v from the centre of the lens to the screen. Record v in Table 3.1.
• Calculate uv and record the result in the table.
• Measure and record in the table the distance D from the illuminated object to the screen.
[3]
(b) Repeat the steps in (a) with the lens at a distance u = 30.0 cm from the illuminated object.
Record all the readings in the table.
Table 3.1
u / cm v / cm uv / cm2 D / cm

20.0
30.0
[2]
(c) State one difference that you observe between the image formed on the screen when
u = 20.0 cm and when u = 30.0 cm.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/51/O/N/17

9
(d) (i) Use the results in the first row of the table to calculate a value f1 for the focal length of the
uv
lens. Use the equation f1 = .
D
f1 = ...............................................................
(ii) Use the results in the second row of the table to calculate a value f2 for the focal length of
uv
the lens. Use the equation f2 = .
D
f2 = ...............................................................
[1]
(iii) Calculate the average value fA for the focal length of the lens. Give your answer to a
suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.
fA = ...............................................................
[2]
(e) Suggest two reasons why the results you have obtained may not be reliable.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]

10
4 A student is investigating whether the diameter of a pendulum bob affects the period of a
pendulum. The period is the time taken for one complete oscillation of the pendulum. Fig. 4.1
shows a pendulum.
Fig. 4.2 shows one complete oscillation.
stand
clamp
thread
bob
one complete
oscillation
Fig. 4.1 Fig. 4.2
The student has the following apparatus:
pendulum bobs made of polystyrene with diameters 1 cm, 2 cm, 3 cm, 4 cm and 5 cm
a supply of thread and a pair of scissors
clamp and stand
Plan an experiment to investigate whether the diameter of a pendulum bob affects the period of a
pendulum. You are not required to carry out this experiment.
You should:
• list additional apparatus that you would require
• explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation
• state the key variables that you would control
• draw a table with column headings, to show how you would display your readings (You
are not required to enter any readings in the table.)
• explain briefly how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.
© UCLES 2017 0625/51/O/N/17

11
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/51/O/N/17

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/51/O/N/17

* 9 8 5 5 1 8 1 1 5 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/52
1 hour 15 minutes
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.

You are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and about 15 minutes on question 4.
Total
DC (ST/SG) 134121/5
2
1 In this experiment, you will compare the oscillations of two pendulums. Carry out the following
instructions, referring to Figs. 1.1 and 1.2.
clamp clamp
bob
one complete
oscillation
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
A pendulum has been set up for you as shown in Fig. 1.1. This pendulum has a spherical
pendulum bob.
(a) Adjust the pendulum until the distance d measured to the bottom of the bob is 50.0 cm.
Explain briefly how to use the set-square to avoid a parallax (line of sight) error when
measuring the distance d. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/52/O/N/17

3
(b) Move the bob slightly to the side and release it so that it swings. Fig. 1.2 shows one complete
oscillation of the pendulum.
(i) Measure the time t1 for 20 complete oscillations.
t1 = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the period T1 of the pendulum. The period is the time for one complete
oscillation.
T1 = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Remove the pendulum from the clamp and attach the second pendulum provided to the
clamp. This has a long, thin bob. Adjust the pendulum until the distance d measured to the
bottom of the bob is 50.0 cm.
Displace the bob slightly and release it so that it swings.
(i) Measure the time t2 for 20 complete oscillations.
t2 = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the period T2 of the pendulum.
T2 = ...........................................................[1]
(d) A student suggests that the periods T1 and T2 should be equal.
State whether your results support this suggestion. Justify your answer by reference to the
results.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

4
(e) The period T of a pendulum can be determined by measuring the time t for 20 complete
oscillations and then calculating the period. Some students are asked to explain the reason
for this method being more accurate than measuring the time taken for one oscillation.
Tick the box next to the sentence that gives the best explanation.
The method eliminates errors from the measurements.
The method is more accurate because the experiment is repeated.
The method includes more readings so there is less chance for errors.
The method reduces the effect of errors when starting and stopping the stopwatch.
[1]
(f) A student plans to carry out more pendulum experiments. He considers possible variables,
and precautions to improve accuracy.
In the following list, mark the possible variables with the letter V and the precautions with the
letter P.
amplitude of swing
length of pendulum
mass of pendulum bob
shape of pendulum bob
use of a reference point to aid counting
viewing the rule at right angles when measuring the length

[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 0625/52/O/N/17

5
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.
(a) Measure room temperature θR.
θR = ...........................................................[1]
(b) • Pour 50 cm3 of the hot water provided into beaker A.
• Measure the temperature θH of the water in beaker A.
θH = ...............................................................
• Add 50 cm3 of the cold water provided to the hot water in beaker A. Stir the water briefly.
• Measure the temperature θM of the water in beaker A.
θM = ...............................................................
• Calculate the temperature fall θF using the equation θF = θH − θM.
θF = ...............................................................
• Empty beaker A. [3]
(c) Suggest one reason for stirring the water before reading θM.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Repeat the procedure in (b) using 75 cm3 of hot water and 75 cm3 of cold water.
θH = ...............................................................
θM = ...............................................................
θF = ...............................................................
[1]
(e) Repeat the procedure in (b) using 100 cm3 of hot water and 100 cm3 of cold water.
θH = ...............................................................
θM = ...............................................................
θF = ...............................................................
[1]

6
(f) Measure room temperature θR again.
θR = ...............................................................
Complete the appropriate sentence.
• Room temperature has remained constant at ............... .
• Room temperature has decreased by ............... .
• Room temperature has increased by ............... .

[1]
(g) A student states that the temperature fall θF should be the same each time because the
proportions of hot and cold water are the same.
Suggest a reason why θF could be very different in (b), (d) and (e).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(h) Suggest an improvement to the apparatus to make it more likely that θF would be the same
each time.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(i) Suggest a condition, not included in your answer to (h), that could be controlled to make it
more likely that θF would be the same each time.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 0625/52/O/N/17

7
BLANK PAGE

8
Carry out the following instructions referring to Fig. 3.1.
u v screen
lens
bench
illuminated
object
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) Place the screen 100 cm from the illuminated object.
• Place the lens between the object and the screen so that the centre of the lens is at
a distance u = 20.0 cm from the object.
• Adjust the position of the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on the
screen.
• Measure the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen. Record the
values of u and v in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
u / cm v / cm
(ii) Repeat the procedure using values for u of 22.0 cm, 25.0 cm, 30.0 cm and 35.0 cm. [3]
© UCLES 2017 0625/52/O/N/17

9
(b) Plot a graph of v / cm (y-axis) against u / cm (x-axis). You do not need to start your axes at the
origin (0, 0). Draw the best-fit curve.
[4]
(c) (i) • Mark, with a cross, the point on the graph grid where u = 25.0 cm and v = 25.0 cm.
• Mark, with a cross, the point on the graph grid where u = 35.0 cm and v = 35.0 cm.
• Join these two points with a straight line. [1]
(ii) • Record u1, the value of u at the point where the straight line crosses your graph line.
u1 = .......................................................... cm
• Record v1, the value of v at the point where the straight line crosses your graph line.
v1 = .......................................................... cm
[1]
(u1 + v1)
(iii) Calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = .
4
f = .......................................................... cm
[2]
[Total: 11]
10
4 A student has a selection of rubber bands of different thicknesses. He is investigating the amount
of stretch produced by different loads. Fig. 4.1 shows the set-up used.
boss clamp
stand
rubber band
bench
hook
Fig. 4.1
In addition to the apparatus shown in Fig. 4.1, the following apparatus is available to the student:
metre rule
selection of different rubber bands
selection of loads.
Plan an experiment to investigate how rubber bands of different thicknesses stretch when loaded.
You are not required to carry out this experiment.
You should

• draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings
(You are not required to enter any readings in the table.)
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2017 0625/52/O/N/17

11
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/52/O/N/17

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/52/O/N/17

* 2 7 6 3 2 3 0 9 7 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/53
1 hour 15 minutes
Additional Materials: As listed in the Confidential Instructions

Total
DC (ST/AR) 132966/7
2
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how the use of a lid affects the rate of cooling of water in a
beaker.
thermometer
beakers lid
A B
Fig. 1.1
(a) • Pour 100 cm3 of hot water into beaker A.

• Place the thermometer in the water in beaker A.
• In Table 1.1, record the temperature θ of the water at time t = 0 s and immediately start
the stopclock.
• Record, in the table, the temperature θ of the water at times t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s,
150 s and 180 s.
• Remove the thermometer from the beaker. [1]
(b) (i) Remove the lid from beaker B.

Repeat the procedure in (a) for beaker B, using 75 cm3 of hot water, and replace the lid
immediately after pouring in the water. [1]
(ii) Complete the headings and the time column in Table 1.1. [2]
Table 1.1
beaker A beaker B
without a lid with a lid
t/ θ/ θ/
0
© UCLES 2017 0625/53/O/N/17

3
(c) Describe two precautions that you took to ensure that the temperature readings were as
accurate as possible in the experiment.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) (i) Write a conclusion, stating how the use of the lid affects the rate of cooling of the water.
Justify your answer by reference to your results.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Suggest one change to the apparatus or procedure to make the comparison a fairer test.
Explain why the change makes the test fairer.
change ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) The temperature of the water in each beaker decreases.
Describe one other similarity in the pattern of cooling in beakers A and B.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 11]

4
2 In this experiment, you will investigate a circuit containing resistors.

The circuit has been set up for you.
power supply
X Y
Fig. 2.1
(a) On Fig. 2.1, draw a voltmeter connected so that it measures the potential difference across
resistor X. [1]
(b) (i) Switch on. Record the value of the current IS in the circuit.
IS = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) • Use the voltmeter to measure and record the value of the potential difference VX
across resistor X.
VX = ...............................................................
Disconnect the voltmeter.
• Reconnect the voltmeter to measure and record the potential difference VY across
resistor Y.
VY = ...............................................................
[1]
(iii) Reconnect the voltmeter to measure and record the potential difference VS across the
combination of both resistors.
VS = ...........................................................[1]
Switch off.
© UCLES 2017 0625/53/O/N/17

5
(iv) A student suggests that VS should be equal to (VX + VY).
State whether your readings support this suggestion. Justify your statement with
reference to your results.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
justification ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Calculate the resistance RS of the combination of resistors, using your readings from (b)(i)
and (b)(iii) and the equation
V
RS = S .
IS
RS = ...........................................................[2]

6
(d) The circuit components are to be rearranged so that:
• resistors X and Y are in parallel

• the ammeter will measure the total current in the circuit
• the voltmeter will measure the potential difference across both resistors.
In the space below, draw a diagram of this circuit using standard electrical symbols.
[2]
(e) Set up the circuit as described in (d).
Switch on. Measure and record the total current IP in the circuit and the potential difference
VP across the resistors.
IP = ...............................................................
VP = ...............................................................
[1]
Switch off.
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 0625/53/O/N/17

7
BLANK PAGE

8
3 In this experiment, you will determine the weight of a metre rule.
clamp
forcemeter
metre rule
clamp
0.0 cm mark 100.0 cm mark
d
100 g mass bench
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) • Move the 100 g mass to a distance d = 10.0 cm from the 0.0 cm end of the rule.
• Adjust the height of the clamp holding the forcemeter so that the rule is horizontal.
• Read, and record in Table 3.1, the forcemeter reading F.
• Repeat this procedure for values of d = 30.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 70.0 cm and 90.0 cm.
Table 3.1
d / cm F/N
10.0
30.0
50.0
70.0
90.0
[2]
(ii) Explain how you made sure that the rule was horizontal before each reading.
You may draw a diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/53/O/N/17

9
(b) Plot a graph of F / N (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis).

Start your axes from the origin (0,0).
Draw a best-fit line.
[4]
(c) (i) From your graph, determine F0, the value of F when d = 0.0 cm.
F0 ...............................................................
(ii) Calculate the weight WR of the metre rule, using the equation WR = 2 × F0.
Give WR to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.
WR = ...............................................................
[2]

10
(d) A student correctly plots your data points on another sheet of graph paper.
State and explain whether his best-fit line is likely to be the same as yours.
Justify your answer with reference to the plots.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) Another student, carrying out the same experiment, is not sure if some of his values of F are
correct.
Suggest one improvement to the procedure which would help him to obtain more reliable F
values.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 0625/53/O/N/17

11
4 A student has a box of converging lenses, but does not know their focal lengths.
Plan an experiment that will enable her to determine an accurate value for the focal length f of one
of the lenses, using the equation
uv
f=
(u + v )
where u is the distance between an object and the lens and v is the distance between the lens and
the focused image of the object.
The apparatus available includes:
a lens holder
a 12 V lamp in a holder, with a power supply
a card with a triangular hole covered with tracing paper.
Write a plan for the experiment.
You should:
• list any additional apparatus needed
• draw a diagram of how the apparatus would be arranged, clearly labelling u and v
• write a method for carrying out the experiment including how f would be determined
• state the precautions which should be taken to obtain a clear, focused image
• state the precautions which should be taken to ensure that measurements are accurate
once a focused image has been obtained.
You are not required to carry out the experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................

12
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/53/O/N/17

* 0 3 3 7 2 6 0 1 9 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/61
1 hour

DC (NH/AR) 133344/5
2
1 A student is investigating resistance using the circuit shown in Fig. 1.1.
power
supply
RA
Fig. 1.1
(a) The student measures the potential difference V1 across the resistor RA and the current I1 in
the circuit. Figs. 1.2 and 1.3 show the voltmeter and ammeter scales.
4 5 6 7 0.4 0.6
2 3 8 0.2 0.8
1 9
0 10 0 1.0
V A
Fig. 1.2 Fig. 1.3
(i) Write down the readings shown on the scales in Figs. 1.2 and 1.3.
V1 = ...............................................................
I1 = ...............................................................
[2]
V1
(ii) Calculate the resistance R1 of the resistor RA using the equation R 1 = .
I1
R1 = .......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/61/O/N/17

3
(b) The student connects a resistor RB in series with RA.
She measures the potential difference V2 across the two resistors RA and RB combined and
the current I2 in the circuit.
1.8 V
V2 = ...............................................................
0.19 A
I2 = ...............................................................
Calculate the resistance R2 of resistors RA and RB combined in series, using the equation
V2
R2 = .
I2
R2 = ...........................................................[1]
(c) The student connects a third resistor RC in series with RA and RB.
She measures the potential difference V3 across the three resistors and the current I3 in the
circuit.
1.7 V
V3 = ...............................................................
0.13 A
I3 = ...............................................................
(i) Calculate the resistance R3 of resistors RA, RB and RC combined in series, using the
V3
equation R 3 = .
I3
R3 = ...............................................................

4
(ii) On Fig. 1.4, draw a line for the needle on the ammeter to show the reading of 0.13 A.
0.4 0.6
0.2 0.8
0 1.0
[1]
Fig. 1.4
(d) A student suggests that R3 = 3 × R1.
State whether the results agree with this suggestion. Justify your answer by reference to the
results.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(e) Another student suggests that the three resistors RA, RB and RC each have the same value
of resistance.
Explain how you could use the circuit shown in Fig. 1.1 to check this suggestion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/61/O/N/17

5
(f) Complete the circuit diagram in Fig. 1.5 to show:
power
supply
Fig. 1.5
[2]
(g) The circuit in Fig. 1.5 could be used to determine the combined resistance of three resistors
connected in parallel.
Suggest a reason for connecting a variable resistor in the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 10]

6
2 A student is determining the focal length f of a lens.

Fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus used.
d
illuminated
object u v
screen
lens
bench
Fig. 2.1
(a) The student obtains a sharply-focused image on the screen.
(i) On Fig. 2.1, measure the distance v from the lens to the screen.
v = ...............................................................
(ii) On Fig. 2.1, measure the distance d from the illuminated object to the screen.
d = ...............................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 is drawn 1/10th actual size.
(i) Calculate V, the actual distance from the lens to the screen. Record the value of V in the
first row of Table 2.1.
(ii) Calculate D, the actual distance from the illuminated object to the screen. Record the
value of D in the first row of the table.
(iii) Calculate UV and record the result in the table.
[2]
(c) The student repeated the procedure with the lens at a distance U = 30.0 cm from the
illuminated object. All the readings are recorded in the table.
Table 2.1
U / cm V / cm UV / cm2 D / cm
20.0
30.0 29.5 885 59.5
State one difference that you would expect to observe between the image formed on the
screen when U = 20.0 cm and when U = 30.0 cm.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/61/O/N/17

7
(d) (i) Use the results in the first row of the table to calculate a value f1 for the focal length of the
UV
lens. Use the equation f1 = .
D
f1 = ...............................................................
(ii) Use the results in the second row of the table to calculate a value f2 for the focal length of
UV
the lens. Use the equation f2 = .
D
f2 = ...............................................................
(iii) Calculate the average value fA for the focal length of the lens. Give your answer to a
suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.
fA = ...............................................................
[3]
(e) Suggest two reasons why it may be difficult to obtain reliable results in this experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(f) A student states that a more reliable value for the focal length is obtained if more values of U,
V and D are collected, enabling a graph to be drawn of UV against D.
(i) Suggest a suitable number of values for U.
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest a suitable range of values for U.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 12]

8
3 A student is investigating whether the diameter of a pendulum bob affects the period of a
pendulum. The period is the time taken for one complete oscillation of the pendulum. Fig. 3.1
shows a pendulum.
Fig. 3.2 shows one complete oscillation.
stand
clamp
thread
bob
one complete
oscillation
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2
The student has the following apparatus:
pendulum bobs made of polystyrene with diameters 1 cm, 2 cm, 3 cm, 4 cm and 5 cm
a supply of thread and a pair of scissors
clamp and stand.
Plan an experiment to investigate whether the diameter of a pendulum bob affects the period of a
pendulum.
You should:
• list additional apparatus that you would require
• draw a table with column headings, to show how you would display your readings (You
are not required to enter any readings in the table.)
© UCLES 2017 0625/61/O/N/17

9
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]

10
4 A student is determining the weight of a load using a balancing method.
metre rule
P Q
a b
bench
pivot
Fig. 4.1
The student places the metre rule on the pivot and adjusts its position so that the metre rule is as
near as possible to being balanced.
He places a load P on the metre rule so that its centre is exactly at the 30.0 cm mark.
He records the distance a between P and the pivot.
19.8 cm
a = ...............................................................
He places a load Q of weight Q = 1.0 N on the metre rule and adjusts the position of Q so that the
metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced.
He measures the distance b between the centre of load Q and the pivot.
He repeats the procedure, with the load P remaining at the 30.0 cm mark, using Q values of 2.0 N,
3.0 N, 4.0 N and 5.0 N. All the readings are recorded in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
Q/N b / cm 1 1
Q N
1.0 40.0
2.0 19.5
3.0 13.5
4.0 10.5
5.0 7.5
1
(a) For each value of Q, calculate and record the result in the table. [1]
Q
© UCLES 2017 0625/61/O/N/17

11
(b) Plot a graph of b / cm (y-axis) against 1 1 (x-axis).

Q N
[4]
(c) (i) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
G = ...........................................................[2]
G
(ii) Calculate the weight P of load P using the equation P = , where a = 19.8 cm.
a
P = ...........................................................[1]

12
(d) The student measures the weight P of load P using a forcemeter. Fig. 4.2 shows the
forcemeter.
N
0.0
1.0
2.0
load P
Fig. 4.2
Write down the reading P shown on the forcemeter.

P = ....................................................... N [1]
(e) The student has carried out the experiment with care and is expecting the two values of P in
(c) and (d) to be the same.
Suggest two reasons why the values of P may be different.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 0625/61/O/N/17

* 2 3 2 9 4 0 3 7 7 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/62
1 hour

DC (ST/FC) 134120/4
2
1 A student is comparing the oscillations of two pendulums. Fig. 1.1 shows the first pendulum.
clamp
bob
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 1.1, measure the distance d, from the bottom of the clamp to the bottom of the
bob.
d = ..................................................... cm [1]
(ii) Fig. 1.1 is drawn 1/10th actual size. Calculate the actual distance D from the bottom of
the clamp to the bottom of the bob.
D = ..................................................... cm [1]
(iii) Explain briefly how to use a set-square to avoid a parallax (line-of-sight) error when
measuring the length of this pendulum. You may draw a diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/62/O/N/17

3
(b) The student displaces the bob slightly and releases it so that it swings. She measures the
time t for 20 complete oscillations. The time t is shown on the stopwatch in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
(i) Write down the time t shown in Fig. 1.2.
t = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the period T1 of the pendulum. The period is the time for one complete
oscillation.
T1 = ...........................................................[2]

4
(c) The student repeats the procedure using another pendulum as shown in Fig. 1.3. This has
a long, thin pendulum bob. The distance D from the bottom of the clamp to the bottom of the
pendulum bob is the same as for the first pendulum.
clamp
bob
Fig. 1.3
She determines the period T2 of this pendulum.

1.37 s
T2 = ...............................................................
In this experiment, both pendulum bobs have the same mass. A student suggests that since
both pendulums have the same overall length D and mass, the periods T1 and T2 should be
equal. State whether the results support this suggestion. Justify your answer by reference to
the results.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/62/O/N/17

5
(d) The period T of a pendulum can be determined by measuring the time t for 20 complete
oscillations and then calculating the period. Some students are asked to explain the reason
for this method being more accurate than measuring the time taken for a single oscillation.
Tick the box next to the sentence that gives the best explanation.
The method eliminates errors from the measurements.
The method is more accurate because the experiment is repeated.
The method includes more readings so there is less chance for errors.
The method reduces the effect of errors when starting and stopping the stopwatch.
[1]
(e) A student plans to carry out more pendulum experiments. He considers possible variables
and precautions to improve accuracy.
In the following list, mark the possible variables with the letter V and the precautions with the
letter P.
amplitude of swing
length of pendulum
mass of pendulum bob
shape of pendulum bob
use of a reference point to aid counting
viewing the rule at right-angles when measuring the length

[2]
[Total: 11]

6
2 A student is investigating the cooling of water.
(a) The thermometer in Fig. 2.1 shows room temperature θR at the beginning of the experiment.
Record θR.
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110°C
Fig. 2.1
θR = ..................................................... ºC [1]
(b) The student pours 50 cm3 of hot water into a beaker.
He measures the temperature θH of the hot water.

86 °C
θH = ...............................................................
He adds 50 cm3 of cold water to the beaker. He stirs the water briefly.
He measures the new temperature θM of the water in the beaker.

52 °C
θM = ...............................................................
Calculate the temperature fall θF using the equation θF = (θH − θM).
θF = ...............................................................
[1]
(c) He repeats the procedure in (b) using 100 cm3 of hot water and 100 cm3 of cold water.
84 °C
θH = ...............................................................
54 °C
θM = ...............................................................
Calculate the temperature fall θF using the equation θF = (θH − θM).
θF = ...........................................................[1]
(d) Suggest one reason for stirring the water before reading θM.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) A student states that the temperature fall θF should be the same each time because the
proportions of hot and cold water are the same.
Suggest one reason why θF could be significantly different in (b) and (c).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/62/O/N/17
7
(f) Suggest an improvement to the apparatus to make it more likely that θF would be the same
each time.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(g) Suggest a condition, not included in your answer to (f), that you would control to make it more
likely that θF would be the same each time.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(h) The student uses a measuring cylinder to measure the volume of water he uses. Draw a
measuring cylinder about half-full of water. Show clearly on your diagram the line-of-sight
required for obtaining a correct reading for the volume of water.
[3]
[Total: 10]

8
illuminated
object
u v screen
lens
Fig. 3.1
(a) • The student places the screen about 100 cm from the illuminated object.
• She places the lens between the object and the screen so that the centre of the lens is at
a distance u = 20.0 cm from the object.
• She adjusts the position of the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on the
screen.
• She measures the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen.
• She repeats the procedure using values for u of 22.0 cm, 25.0 cm, 30.0 cm and 35.0 cm.
• The readings are shown in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
u / cm v / cm
20.0 60.0
22.0 47.1
25.0 37.5
30.0 29.8
35.0 26.3
© UCLES 2017 0625/62/O/N/17

9
Plot a graph of v / cm (y-axis) against u / cm (x-axis). You do not need to start your axes at the
origin (0, 0). Draw the best-fit curve.
[4]
(b) (i) • Mark, with a cross, the point on the graph grid where u = 25.0 cm and v = 25.0 cm.
• Mark with a cross, the point on the graph grid where u = 35.0 cm and v = 35.0 cm.
• Join these two points with a straight line. [1]
(ii) • Record u1, the value of u at the point where the straight line crosses your graph line.
u1 = .......................................................... cm
• Record v1, the value of v at the point where the straight line crosses your graph line.
v1 = .......................................................... cm
[1]
(u1 + v1)
(iii) Calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = .
4
f = .......................................................... cm
[2]

10
(c) Suggest two differences that you would expect to see between the appearance of the
illuminated object and the image on the screen.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Suggest two precautions that you would take in order to obtain reliable readings in this
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2017 0625/62/O/N/17

11
4 A student has a selection of rubber bands of different widths. He is investigating the extension
produced by adding loads. Fig. 4.1 shows the set-up used.
boss clamp
stand
rubber band
bench
hook
Fig. 4.1
In addition to the apparatus shown in Fig. 4.1, the following apparatus is available to the student:
A metre rule
A selection of different rubber bands
A selection of loads.
Plan an experiment to investigate how strips of rubber of different widths stretch when loaded.
You should

• draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings
(You are not required to enter any readings in the table.)
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................

12
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/62/O/N/17

* 4 8 4 1 1 0 9 2 8 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/63
1 hour

DC (NH/CGW) 132967/3
2
1 Some students are investigating how the use of a lid affects the rate of cooling of water in a
beaker.
They are using the apparatus shown in Fig. 1.1.
thermometer
beakers lid
A B
Fig. 1.1
• A student pours 100 cm3 of hot water into beaker A.

• He records the temperature of the water in beaker A and immediately starts a stopclock.
• The student records the temperature θ of the water every 30 s. His readings are shown
in Table 1.1.
• The student repeats the procedure for beaker B using 75 cm3 of hot water.
(a) Complete the headings and the time column in Table 1.1. [2]
Table 1.1
beaker A beaker B
without a lid with a lid
t/ θ/ θ/
80.0 81.0
77.0 79.0
74.5 77.5
72.5 76.0
70.5 75.0
69.0 74.0
68.0 73.5
© UCLES 2017 0625/63/O/N/17

3
(b) Describe two precautions which should be taken to ensure that the temperature readings are
as accurate as possible in the experiment.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) (i) Write a conclusion, stating how the use of the lid affects the rate of cooling of the water.
Justify your answer by reference to the results.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Suggest one change to the apparatus or procedure to make the comparison a fairer test.
Explain why the change makes the test fairer.
change ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) The temperature of the water in each beaker decreases.
Describe one other similarity in the pattern of cooling in beakers A and B.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

4
(d)
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
°C
Fig. 1.2
(i) Record the room temperature θR, shown on the thermometer in Fig. 1.2.
θR = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) Another student is carrying out the same experiment in a room with a room temperature
that is much higher than θR.
Suggest whether this might affect the cooling of the water in beaker A in her experiment.
Briefly explain your answer.
suggestion .........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 0625/63/O/N/17

5
2 A student is investigating a circuit containing resistors.
She is using the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1.
power supply
X Y
Fig. 2.1
(a) On Fig. 2.1, show a voltmeter connected so that it measures the potential difference across
resistor X. [1]
(b) The student uses the ammeter to measure the current IS in the circuit.
0.4 0.6
0.2 0.8
0 1.0
Fig. 2.2
Record the current IS, as shown on the ammeter in Fig. 2.2.
IS = ...........................................................[1]

6
(c) (i) The student uses the voltmeter to measure the potential difference VX across resistor X
and then reconnects it to measure the potential difference VY across resistor Y.
2 3 2 3
1 4 1 4
0 5 0 5
V V
Fig. 2.3 Fig. 2.4
• Record the value of the potential difference VX across resistor X, shown in Fig. 2.3.
VX = ...............................................................
• Record the value of the potential difference VY across resistor Y, shown in Fig. 2.4.
VY = ...............................................................
[1]
(ii) She then measures the potential difference VS across the combination of both resistors.
2 3
1 4
0 5
Fig. 2.5
Record the value of the potential difference VS across the combination of both resistors,
shown in Fig. 2.5.
VS = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/63/O/N/17

7
(iii) A student suggests that VS should be equal to (VX + VY).
State whether the readings support this suggestion. Justify your statement with reference
to the results.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
justification ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Calculate the resistance RS of the combination of resistors, using the readings from (b)
and (c)(ii) and the equation
V
RS = S.
IS
RS = ...........................................................[2]
(e) (i) The circuit components are to be rearranged so that:
• resistors X and Y are in parallel

• the ammeter will measure the total current in the circuit
• the voltmeter will measure the potential difference across both resistors.
In the space below, draw a diagram of this circuit using standard electrical symbols.
[2]

8
(ii) The student sets up the circuit as described in (e)(i).
She measures and records the total current IP in the circuit and the potential difference
VP across the resistors.
IP = ––––––––
0.81 A
VP = ––––––––
3.6 V
The resistance of two resistors connected in parallel is less than the resistance of the
same two resistors connected in series.
State whether the readings indicate that she has set up the circuit correctly.
Explain your answer.
suggestion .........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 0625/63/O/N/17

9
3 Some students are determining the weight of a metre rule.

They use the apparatus shown in Fig. 3.1.
clamp
forcemeter
metre rule
clamp
0.0 cm mark 100.0 cm mark
d
200 g mass bench
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) The students suspend a 200 g mass at a distance d from the end of the rule.
They then adjust the height of the clamp holding the forcemeter so that the rule is
horizontal.
Fig. 3.2 shows the forcemeter when the value of d is 10.0 cm.
N
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
metre rule
Fig. 3.2

10
In Table 3.1, record the forcemeter reading F, as shown in Fig. 3.2. [1]
Table 3.1
d / cm F/N
10.0
30.0 1.05
50.0 1.65
70.0 1.95
90.0 2.25
(ii) The students repeat the procedure for values of d = 30.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 70.0 cm and
90.0 cm. Their readings are shown in Table 3.1.
Explain how the students could make sure that the rule is horizontal before each reading.
You may draw a diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/63/O/N/17

11
(b) Plot a graph of F / N (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis).

Start your axes from the origin (0, 0).
Draw a best-fit line.
[4]
(c) (i) From your graph, determine F0, the value of F when d = 0.0 cm.
F0 = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the weight WR of the metre rule, using the equation WR = 2 × F0.
Give WR to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.
WR = ...........................................................[2]

12
(d) A student correctly plots your data points on another sheet of graph paper.
State and explain whether his best-fit line is likely to be the same as yours.
Justify your answer with reference to the plots.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(e) Another student, carrying out the same experiment, is not sure if some of his values of F are
correct.
Suggest one improvement to the procedure which would help him to obtain more reliable
F values.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 0625/63/O/N/17

13
BLANK PAGE

14
4 A student has a box of converging lenses but does not know their focal lengths.
Plan an experiment which will enable her to determine an accurate value for the focal length f of
one of the lenses, using the equation
f= uv
(u + v )
where u is the distance between an object and the lens and v is the distance between the lens and
the focused image of the object.
a lens holder
a 12 V lamp in a holder, with a power supply
a card with a triangular hole covered with tracing paper.
You should:
• draw a diagram of how the apparatus will be arranged, clearly labelling u and v
• write a method for carrying out the experiment including how f will be determined
• state the precautions which should be taken to obtain a clear, focused image
• state the precautions which should be taken to ensure that measurements are accurate
once a focused image has been obtained.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2017 0625/63/O/N/17

15
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/63/O/N/17

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/63/O/N/17

Grade thresholds – March 2018

Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0625 (Physics) in the March 2018 examination.

maximum raw
mark A B C D E F G
available
Component 12 40 – – 25 22 19 16 13
Component 22 40 27 24 22 18 15 13 11
Component 32 80 – – 49 40 30 21 12
Component 42 80 50 41 31 27 21 15 9
Component 52 40 26 23 21 18 16 13 10
Component 62 40 23 21 19 16 14 11 8
Combination of
Components
BY 22, 42, 52 146 128 110 93 79 65 51 37
CY 22, 42, 62 142 125 108 91 77 63 49 35
FY 12, 32, 52 – – – 119 100 82 63 44
GY 12, 32, 62 – – – 117 98 80 61 42
PHYSICS 0625/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core) March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2018 series for most
components.

0625/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
1 D 1
2 A 1
3 C 1
4 C 1
5 D 1
6 C 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 B 1
10 B 1
11 A 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 C 1
15 D 1
16 D 1
17 A 1
18 C 1
19 C 1
20 D 1
21 B 1
22 D 1
23 B 1
24 A 1
25 D 1
26 C 1
27 C 1
28 A 1

PUBLISHED
29 B 1
30 B 1
31 A 1
32 A 1
33 D 1
34 A 1
35 C 1
36 A 1
37 A 1
38 A 1
39 D 1
40 B 1

PHYSICS 0625/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core) February/March 2018
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*8208222047*

IB18 03_0625_12/3RP
2
1 A student is asked to find the volume of a small irregularly-shaped piece of rock.
He has the following apparatus available.
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
balance measuring cylinder rule

containing water
Which apparatus must the student use to find the volume of the small piece of rock?
A balance and rule

B rule only
C balance and measuring cylinder
D measuring cylinder only
2 The speed-time graph represents the motion of a car travelling along a straight level road.
speed
0
0 time
Which statement describes the motion of the car?
A It accelerates and reaches a constant speed.

B It accelerates and then stops moving.
C It decelerates and then reaches a constant speed.
D It decelerates and then stops moving.
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/F/M/18

3
3 An athlete runs 300 metres up a hill at a steady speed of 3.0 m / s.
She then immediately runs the same distance down the hill at a steady speed of 6.0 m / s.
What is her average speed for the 600 metre run?
A 2.0 m / s B 3.0 m / s C 4.0 m / s D 4.5 m / s
4 Which statement is correct?
A Mass is a gravitational force but weight is not a gravitational force.

B Mass is not a gravitational force and weight is not a gravitational force.
C The unit of mass is the kilogram and the unit of weight is the newton.
D The unit of mass is the newton and the unit of weight is the kilogram.
5 The diagram shows a bird in flight. The bird is flying in a horizontal direction to the right.
In which direction does air resistance act on the bird?
D B
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/F/M/18 [Turn over

4
6 A measuring cylinder contains 30 cm3 of a liquid.
cm3
50
40
30
20
10
balance
Some more of the liquid is added until the liquid level reaches the 50 cm3 mark.
The reading on the balance increases by 30 g.
What is the density of the liquid?
A 0.60 g / cm3 B 0.67 g / cm3 C 1.5 g / cm3 D 1.7 g / cm3
7 A car is travelling along a straight horizontal road. The speed-time graph is shown.
In which labelled part of the journey is the resultant force on the car zero?
C
speed
B
D
A
0
0 time
8 The diagram shows a uniform metre rule balanced at its mid-point.
0 20 50 70 100
W 6.0 N
What is the weight W placed at the 20 cm mark?
A 0.25 N B 4.0 N C 9.0 N D 21 N
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/F/M/18

5
9 A wooden plank rests in equilibrium on two rocks on opposite sides of a narrow stream.
Three forces P, Q and R act on the plank.
P R
plank
How are the sizes of the forces related?
A P+Q=R
B P+R=Q
C P=Q=R
D P=Q+R
10 A ball is at rest at the top of a hill. It rolls down the hill. At the bottom of the hill the ball hits a wall
and stops.
Which energy changes occur?
A gravitational potential energy → internal energy → kinetic energy
B gravitational potential energy → kinetic energy → internal energy
C kinetic energy → gravitational potential energy → internal energy
D kinetic energy → internal energy → gravitational potential energy

6
11 A man pulls a truck a distance of 20 m, as shown in the three diagrams.
1 2
10 m
10 m
10 m
10 m
3
10 m
10 m
Which statement concerning the work done against gravity is correct?
A Most work is done in 1.

B No work is done in 3.
C The work done in all three is equal.
D The work done in 1 and 2 is equal.
12 Which source of energy is used in a nuclear power station to generate electrical energy?
A different types of atom regrouping

B heavy nuclei splitting
C radioactive isotopes decaying
D radioactive atoms emitting β-particles
13 Two beakers are filled to the same depth, one with water and one with oil.
The density of water is 1000 kg / m3 and the density of oil is 920 kg / m3.
In which position is the pressure the greatest?
A C
water oil
B D
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/F/M/18

7
14 A water manometer is connected to a gas supply.
gas Q
supply
water
There is a gas leak and the pressure of the gas supply falls.
What happens to the water level at P and what happens to the water level at Q?
water level at P water level at Q
A falls falls
B falls rises
C rises falls
D rises rises

8
15 A cylinder with a tap contains a fixed mass of gas X. The gas is contained by a piston which can
move freely towards or away from the tap.
atmosphere
gas X
tap closed
piston
cylinder
When the tap is opened, the piston moves slightly to the right, towards the tap.
atmosphere
gas X
tap open
What can be deduced about the pressure of gas X?
before opening tap after opening tap
A less than atmospheric pressure more than atmospheric pressure

B same as atmospheric pressure more than atmospheric pressure
C more than atmospheric pressure less than atmospheric pressure
D more than atmospheric pressure same as atmospheric pressure
16 Which quantity does not change when there is an increase in temperature?
A the density of a steel block

B the diameter of the hole in a metal nut
C the length of an iron rod
D the mass of a metal coin
17 A thermometer has a low thermal capacity.
Why is this an advantage?
A The thermometer does not absorb much thermal energy to raise its own temperature.
B The thermometer does not conduct much thermal energy to the surroundings.
C The thermometer does not melt when it gets hot.
D The thermometer does not radiate much thermal energy to the surroundings.
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/F/M/18

9
18 In an experiment, a thermometer is placed in a test-tube of hot liquid. The temperature reading of

the liquid is recorded every half minute. The table shows the results.
time / minutes 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5
temperature / °C 73 65 59 55 55 55 51 48 45 42 40 38 36 35 34 33
What is the melting point of the substance?
A 0 °C B 33 °C C 55 °C D 73 °C
19 A teacher demonstrates an experiment to a class. A boiling tube is filled with water and some ice
cubes are trapped at the bottom of the tube. The teacher then heats the boiling tube in the
position shown until the water at the top boils.
water
ice heat
metal mesh
The ice does not melt.
What does this demonstrate?
A Water is a good conductor of thermal energy.

B Water is a good convector of thermal energy.
C Water is a poor conductor of thermal energy.
D Water is a poor convector of thermal energy.

10
20 A hot metal plate is placed near to a cold metal plate. Infra-red radiation transfers thermal energy
between the two plates.
hot plate
cold plate
Which choice of colour causes the temperature of the cold plate to increase most slowly?
hot plate cold plate
A matt black matt black

B matt black shiny white
C shiny white matt black
D shiny white shiny white
21 Which row shows an example of a transverse wave and an example of a longitudinal wave?
transverse longitudinal
A light radio
B radio sound
C sound water
D water light
22 An object is placed before a plane mirror as shown.
A student views the image of the object in the mirror from point P.
Where does she see the image?
object B C D
mirror
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/F/M/18

11
23 Light passes through a prism as shown. The light changes direction and produces a spectrum of
colours.
white light spectrum

of colours
Which term is used to describe the production of the spectrum of colours?
A diffraction
B dispersion
C refraction
D total internal reflection
24 Which type of waves are produced by a television remote controller?
A infra-red waves
B radio waves
C ultraviolet waves
D visible light
25 Both the amplitude and the frequency of a sound wave decrease.
What happens to the sound heard?
A The sound is louder and has a higher pitch.

B The sound is louder and has a lower pitch.
C The sound is quieter and has a higher pitch.
D The sound is quieter and has a lower pitch.
26 An electromagnet is used to remove a splinter from an eye.
What material is the splinter made from?
A aluminium
B glass
C iron
D wood

12
27 Which diagram shows the magnetic field around a bar magnet?
A B
N S N S
C D
N S N S
28 A metal conductor is connected to a battery.
Which statement describes the current in the metal conductor?
A It is a flow of electrons from the negative to the positive terminal.

B It is a flow of electrons from the positive to the negative terminal.
C It is a flow of protons from the negative to the positive terminal.
D It is a flow of protons from the positive to the negative terminal.
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/F/M/18

13
29 A student sets up the circuit shown to measure three quantities.
1 the current in the circuit

2 the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cell
3 the potential difference across the lamp
How many ammeters and how many voltmeters are needed?
ammeters voltmeters
A 0 3
B 1 2
C 2 1
D 3 0
30 The current in a car headlamp is 3.0 A when connected to a 12 V battery.
What is the resistance of the lamp when it is lit?
A 0.25 Ω B 4.0 Ω C 15 Ω D 36 Ω

14
31 The diagram shows a circuit containing a cell, an ammeter, a lamp and a variable resistor.
The resistance of the variable resistor is increased.
What happens to the ammeter reading and what happens to the brightness of the lamp?
ammeter reading lamp brightness
32 Diagram 1 shows two identical lamps connected in series with a cell. Diagram 2 shows the same
two lamps connected in parallel with an identical cell.
diagram 1 diagram 2
A The cell in diagram 1 can supply current to the lamps for longer than the cell in diagram 2.
B The current in the cell in diagram 1 is greater than the current in the cell in diagram 2.
C The lamps in diagram 1 are brighter than the lamps in diagram 2.
D The voltage across each lamp in diagram 1 is greater than the voltage in diagram 2.
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/F/M/18

15
33 A circuit contains four ammeters and three resistors with different values.
Which ammeter shows the largest reading?
A A D
10 Ω
A
B A
20 Ω
30 Ω
A
C
34 The diagram shows the arrangement of the coil, armature and contacts of a relay.
Which diagram shows this arrangement when there is no current in the coil?
A B
pivot contacts
coil
armature
C D

16
35 The diagram represents a magnetic field.
What causes this field?
A a bar magnet
B a solenoid carrying a current
C a straight wire carrying a current
D two north poles close together
36 The diagram shows a simple d.c. electric motor which is rotating.
coil
magnet S N magnet
Which change makes the motor rotate more quickly?
A increasing the number of turns on the coil

B removing the magnets
C reversing the battery
D reversing the polarity of the magnets
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/F/M/18

17
23
37 The notation for an isotope of sodium is 11 Na .
Which row gives the composition of a neutral atom of this isotope of sodium?
number of number of number of

protons neutrons electrons
A 11 12 11
B 11 12 12
C 11 23 11
D 12 11 12
38 Which diagram represents a nucleus of 31H ?
A B C D
key
p n p
n n = a neutron
n n p p
n p p n
p n p = a proton
39 When measuring the emissions from a radioactive rock brought into the laboratory, a teacher
mentions that background radiation must be taken into account.
What is this background radiation?
A infra-red radiation from warm objects in the laboratory

B infra-red radiation from the Sun
C ionising radiation from the radioactive rock brought into the laboratory
D ionising radiation in the laboratory when the radioactive rock is not present

18
40 The graph shows the percentage of a radioactive isotope that remains as time passes.
100
percentage
of isotope
75
remaining / %
50
25
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
time / minutes
A student measures the initial rate of emission of this isotope as 40 000 emissions per second.
How long does it take for the rate of emission to fall to 5000 emissions per second?
A 5 minutes B 15 minutes C 20 minutes D 40 minutes
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/F/M/18

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/F/M/18

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/F/M/18

PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1 D 1
2 C 1
3 D 1
4 D 1
5 C 1
6 C 1
7 A 1
8 D 1
9 B 1
10 B 1
11 B 1
12 A 1
13 C 1
14 B 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 D 1
18 B 1
19 A 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 B 1
23 A 1
24 D 1
25 C 1
26 B 1
27 D 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 A 1
31 B 1
32 D 1
33 A 1
34 D 1
35 D 1
36 A 1
37 A 1
38 C 1
39 D 1
40 A 1

PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) February/March 2018
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*8385724903*

IB18 03_0625_22/4RP
2
1 Which instrument is used to measure accurately the diameter of a thin metal wire?
A 30 cm ruler
B measuring tape
C metre rule
D micrometer screw gauge
2 A parachutist is falling through the air at terminal velocity.
Which statement about the parachutist is correct?
A Every force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his acceleration is equal to zero.
B Every force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his velocity is equal to zero.
C The resultant force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his acceleration is equal to
zero.
D The resultant force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his velocity is equal to zero.
3 The curved line on the graph shows the motion of a car.
12.0
speed
10.0
m/s
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car at the time of 4.0 s?
A 0.33 m / s2 B 0.44 m / s2 C 2.3 m / s2 D 3.0 m / s2
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

3
4 The diagram shows a bird in flight. The bird is flying in a horizontal direction to the right.
In which direction does air resistance act on the bird?
D B
5 The gravitational field strength on the Moon is 1.6 N / kg.
An astronaut has a mass of 75 kg.
What is the weight of the astronaut on the Moon?
A 47 N B 75 N C 120 N D 750 N
6 A measuring cylinder contains 30 cm3 of a liquid.
cm3
50
40
30
20
10
balance
Some more of the liquid is added until the liquid level reaches the 50 cm3 mark.
The reading on the balance increases by 30 g.
A 0.60 g / cm3 B 0.67 g / cm3 C 1.5 g / cm3 D 1.7 g / cm3

4
7 A stone of mass 0.12 kg is fired from a catapult. The velocity of the stone changes from 0 to
5.0 m / s in 0.60 s.
What is the average resultant force acting on the stone while it is being fired?
A 1.0 N B 2.5 N C 3.6 N D 8.3 N
8 A uniform rod XY of weight 2.0 N has a length of 80 cm.
The rod is suspended by a thread 20 cm from end X. A weight of 5.0 N is suspended from end X.
thread
20 cm uniform rod
X Y
80 cm
5.0 N
A student hangs a 6.0 N weight on the rod so that it is in equilibrium.
What is the distance of the 6.0 N weight from end X?
A 6 cm B 10 cm C 26 cm D 30 cm
9 A wooden plank rests in equilibrium on two rocks on opposite sides of a narrow stream.
Three forces P, Q and R act on the plank.
P R
plank
How are the sizes of the forces related?
A P+Q=R
B P+R=Q
C P=Q=R
D P=Q+R
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

5
10 A ball of mass 0.16 kg is moving forwards at a speed of 0.50 m / s. A second ball of mass 0.10 kg
is stationary. The first ball strikes the second ball. The second ball moves forwards at a speed of
0.50 m / s.
What is the speed of the first ball after the collision?
A 0.0 m / s B 0.19 m / s C 0.31 m / s D 0.50 m / s
11 A ball is at rest at the top of a hill. It rolls down the hill. At the bottom of the hill the ball hits a wall
and stops.
Which energy changes occur?
A gravitational potential energy → internal energy → kinetic energy
B gravitational potential energy → kinetic energy → internal energy
C kinetic energy → gravitational potential energy → internal energy
D kinetic energy → internal energy → gravitational potential energy
12 A student cycles along a level road at a speed of 5.0 m / s.
The total mass of the student and bicycle is 120 kg.
The student applies the brakes and stops. The braking distance is 10 m.
What is the average braking force?
A 150 N B 300 N C 15 000 N D 30 000 N

6
13 A water manometer is connected to a gas supply.
gas Q
supply
water
There is a gas leak and the pressure of the gas supply falls.
What happens to the water level at P and what happens to the water level at Q?
water level at P water level at Q
A falls falls
B falls rises
C rises falls
D rises rises
14 A submarine is 20 m below the surface of the sea. The pressure due to the water at this depth
is P.
On another day, the submarine is 26 m below the surface of fresh water.
The density of sea water is 1.3 times the density of fresh water.
What is the pressure due to the fresh water at a depth of 26 m?
A P B P C 1.3 P D 1.7 P
1.3
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

7
15 A cylinder with a tap contains a fixed mass of gas X. The gas is contained by a piston which can
move freely towards or away from the tap.
atmosphere
gas X
tap closed
piston
cylinder
When the tap is opened, the piston moves slightly to the right, towards the tap.
atmosphere
gas X
tap open
What can be deduced about the pressure of gas X?
before opening tap after opening tap
A less than atmospheric pressure more than atmospheric pressure

B same as atmospheric pressure more than atmospheric pressure
C more than atmospheric pressure less than atmospheric pressure
D more than atmospheric pressure same as atmospheric pressure
16 Liquid evaporates from a beaker.
What happens to the temperature of the remaining liquid and how does this temperature change
affect the rate of evaporation?
rate of
temperature
evaporation

8
17 Which quantity does not change when there is an increase in temperature?
A the density of a steel block

B the diameter of the hole in a metal nut
C the length of an iron rod
D the mass of a metal coin
18 A thermocouple is used to measure temperature.
Which is an advantage of using a thermocouple instead of a liquid-in-glass thermometer?
A It can measure temperature in the range –10 °C to 110 °C.

B It can measure temperature that changes rapidly.
C It has a linear scale.
D It is more sensitive.
19 A block of copper has a mass of 2.0 kg.
The block of copper absorbs 12 000 J thermal energy.
The specific heat capacity of copper is 385 J / (kg °C).
What is the temperature rise of the copper?
A 15.6 °C B 31.2 °C C 46.8 °C D 62.4 °C
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

9
20 A teacher demonstrates an experiment to a class. A boiling tube is filled with water and some ice
cubes are trapped at the bottom of the tube. The teacher then heats the boiling tube in the
position shown until the water at the top boils.
water
ice heat
metal mesh
The ice does not melt.
What does this demonstrate?
A Water is a good conductor of thermal energy.

B Water is a good convector of thermal energy.
C Water is a poor conductor of thermal energy.
D Water is a poor convector of thermal energy.
21 A metal cup has a plastic lining. The cup is filled with hot water and held by a hand.
Which statement about the transfer of thermal energy from the water to the hand is correct?
A In the plastic, no energy is transferred directly between adjacent molecules.

B In the plastic, fast moving molecules interact with free electrons, making the electrons move
very quickly.
C In the metal, energy is transferred only by electrons.
D In the metal, energy is transferred by electrons and by vibrations of the lattice.
22 Which row shows an example of a transverse wave and an example of a longitudinal wave?
transverse longitudinal
A light radio
B radio sound
C sound water
D water light

10
23 A wave passes through a gap and diffraction causes the wave to spread out.
Which wave spreads out the most?
A large wavelength through a gap slightly larger than the wavelength

B large wavelength through a gap much smaller than the wavelength
C small wavelength through a gap much larger than the wavelength
D small wavelength through a gap much smaller than the wavelength
24 An object is placed before a plane mirror as shown.
A student views the image of the object in the mirror from point P.
Where does she see the image?
object B C D
mirror
25 Light has a speed of 1.24 × 108 m / s in diamond.
What is the refractive index of diamond?
A 0.41 B 1.54 C 2.42 D 3.72
26 Which statement describes monochromatic light?
A light that does not diffract

B light that has a single frequency
C light that spreads out when shone through a glass prism
D light that travels at the same speed in all materials
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

11
27 Both the amplitude and the frequency of a sound wave decrease.
What happens to the sound heard?
A The sound is louder and has a higher pitch.

B The sound is louder and has a lower pitch.
C The sound is quieter and has a higher pitch.
D The sound is quieter and has a lower pitch.
28 A sound wave is travelling through water.
What is a possible speed for the wave?
A 150 m / s B 300 m / s C 1500 m / s D 5000 m / s
29 An electromagnet is used to remove a splinter from an eye.
What material is the splinter made from?
A aluminium
B glass
C iron
D wood
30 A metal conductor is connected to a battery.
Which statement describes the current in the metal conductor?
A It is a flow of electrons from the negative to the positive terminal.

B It is a flow of electrons from the positive to the negative terminal.
C It is a flow of protons from the negative to the positive terminal.
D It is a flow of protons from the positive to the negative terminal.
31 In an electric circuit, 40 C of electric charge pass a point in 5.0 s.
What is the current in the circuit?
A 0.13 A B 8.0 A C 45 A D 200 A
32 There is a current of 5.0 A in a resistor.
The potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor is 24 V.
How much energy is transferred in the resistor in 1.0 minute?
A 5.0 J B 120 J C 290 J D 7200 J

12
33 The diagram shows a circuit.
lamp 1
lamp 2
Switch S is closed.
Which lamps light?
A lamp 1 only
B lamp 2 only
C lamp 1 and lamp 2
D neither lamp 1 nor lamp 2
34 A circuit contains four ammeters and three resistors with different values.
Which ammeter shows the largest reading?
A A D
10 Ω
A
B A
20 Ω
30 Ω
A
C
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

13
35 The diagrams show pairs of circuits containing logic gates.
In which diagram does the lower circuit of the pair not behave in the same way as the upper
circuit?
A B
C D
36 The current in a coil produces a magnetic field around it, as shown.
– +
The magnitude of the potential difference across the coil is increased and its direction is
reversed.
What happens to the magnetic field?
A The lines become closer together and the right-hand end becomes a south pole.
B The lines become closer together and the right-hand end remains a north pole.
C The lines become further apart and the right-hand end becomes a south pole.
D The lines become further apart and the right-hand end remains a north pole.

14
23
37 The notation for an isotope of sodium is 11 Na .
Which row gives the composition of a neutral atom of this isotope of sodium?
number of number of number of

protons neutrons electrons
A 11 12 11
B 11 12 12
C 11 23 11
D 12 11 12
38 The radioactive isotope of hydrogen undergoes beta decay to the isotope 32 He .
What is the nuclide notation for the hydrogen isotope?

1 2 3 4
A 1H B 1H C 1H D 2H
39 When measuring the emissions from a radioactive rock brought into the laboratory, a teacher
mentions that background radiation must be taken into account.
What is this background radiation?
A infra-red radiation from warm objects in the laboratory

B infra-red radiation from the Sun
C ionising radiation from the radioactive rock brought into the laboratory
D ionising radiation in the laboratory when the radioactive rock is not present
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

15
40 Solid caesium-137 decays by the emission of a β-particle to form solid barium-137, which emits a
γ-ray.
The barium-137 undergoes no further decay. The half-life of caesium-137 is 33 years.
A block of pure caesium-137 has a mass of 2.0 µg.
The diagram shows a radiation detector a distance of 5 cm from the block. The detector registers
a count rate of 2000 counts / second.
detector
counter
block
5 cm
Which statement is not correct?
A After 33 years, the mass of the block is 1.0 µg.
B After 66 years, the sample contains 1.5 µg of barium.

C With 5 cm of lead between the block and the detector, the count rate is just above
background level.
D With 2 mm of aluminium between the block and the detector, the count rate is reduced
significantly.
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

PHYSICS 0625/32
Paper 3 Core Theory March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:
Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

PUBLISHED
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

PUBLISHED
1(a) 5.0 ÷ 500 or 0.01 (cm) B1
1(b) 30 × 20 × 5 or length × width × height or cross-sectional area × length B1
1(c) balance B1
1(d) D = M / V in any acceptable form C1
2400 ÷ 3000 C1
0.80 (g / cm3) or 0.8 (g / cm3) A1
2(a)(i) 2nd box ticked section B B1
2(a)(ii) distance = area under graph or line or 0.5 × base × height C1
20 × 5 × 0.5 C1
50 (m) A1
2(b)(i) (average speed =) (total) dist ÷ (total ) time C1
(250 × 4) C1
1000 ÷ 80 C1
12.5 (m / s) A1
2(b)(ii) 43.88 – 20.16 or 23.72 B1

PUBLISHED
3(a) 12.5 (mm) B1
3(b) (spring) B M1
same load gives greater extension (than spring A) owtte A1
3(c)(i) 43.9 – 19.7 or 24.2 (cm) B1
3(c)(ii) Any two from: B2

measure the extension for different (number of 1.0 N) loads
repeat each reading (as each (1.0 N) load is removed) AND calculate average (extension for each load)
(take reading from ruler with) eye level with pin
4(a) any three from: B3

water flows down (from reservoir)
idea of gravitational / potential energy (transferred to kinetic (energy))
water turns turbine
turbine turns generator
4(b) Any three from: B3

• does not contribute to atmospheric pollution / acid rain
• does not contribute to greenhouse gases / global warming
• renewable energy source (so will not run out)

• short start-up time / can meet surges in demand owtte
• conserve non-renewable reserves / fossil fuels
• reduces dependence on fossil fuels (from other countries)
4(c)(i) kinetic B1
4(c)(ii) efficient B1

PUBLISHED
5(a)(i) (pressure) increases B1
5(a)(ii) any four from: B4

(air) molecules / particles have more (kinetic) energy / move faster
more frequent collisions

harder collisions (with walls)
collisions with walls
idea of collisions causing force
5(b) P = F / A in any form words or numbers C1
0.59 A1
N / cm2 B1
5(c)(i) (Area = π × r2 =) 50.2654 ( cm2) B1
5(c)(ii) smaller area (in contact with the table) B1
6(a) expansion / voltage / potential difference / emf B1

length / colour / pressure / volume / resistance / density
6(b)(i) 8:30 pm B1
6(b)(ii) 9:00 pm B1
(explanation) Slope / gradient of graph is less B1

or temperature drops / falls (more) slowly / slower
6(c) insulator B3
conduction
convection

PUBLISHED
7(a)(i) (angle) Z B1
7(a)(ii) any other part of em spectrum or (seismic) S-waves B1
7(b)(i) 3 curved waves after gap M1
waves evenly spaced and centred on gap (by eye) A1
7(b)(ii) diffraction B1
8(a)(i) ammeter in series with power supply B1
8(a)(ii) variable resistor symbol in series with lamp B B1
8(a)(iii) voltmeter symbol seen B1
voltmeter symbol in parallel with lamp B B1
8(b) V = I R in any form C1
6.0 ÷ 0.2 accept 6 ÷ 0.2 C1
30 (Ω) A1

PUBLISHED
9(a)(i) X-rays / X-radiation B1
9(a)(ii) Radio waves B1
9(b) ultrasound B1
9(c) For full marks the method described must work. B4

any four from:
Means of producing sharp sound
use of suitable reflecting surface
measure distance travelled by sound
Method for measurement of time for sound to travel measured distance.
use of speed = distance / time
10(a) any four from: B4

needle moves (one way) as N pole / magnet moves downward / into coil
as coil cuts across magnetic field (of magnet)
needle moves in opposite direction as N pole / magnet moves upward / out of coil
field is cut in opposite direction
needle at zero when spring at max extension
magnet is stationary so no cutting of field lines
10(b) (device) X is a step-up transformer B1
(device) Y is a step-down transformer B1

PUBLISHED
11(a) friction (between cloth and rod) B1
(causes) electrons to move B1
from cloth / to rod B1
11(b) rod {moves or rotates} away B1
like charges repel B1
12 For full marks the method described must work. B4

any four from:
take background reading / reading without source
use piece of paper between source and detector
beta particles can pass through paper or alpha particles stopped / absorbed by paper?)
reading on detector similar / unchanged
so no alpha particles emitted
use few mm of aluminium between source and detector
reading on detector now similar to background reading
(because) beta particles stopped by a few mm of aluminium

* 7 1 8 3 2 6 5 1 9 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/32
Paper 3 Theory (Core) February/March 2018
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 149763/5
2
1 A student has a pile of A4 paper for his computer printer.
Fig. 1.1 shows the dimensions of the pile of paper.
20.0 cm
5.0 cm
30.0 cm
(a) The pile contains 500 sheets of paper.
Calculate the average thickness of one sheet of paper.
average thickness = .................................................... cm [1]
(b) Show that the pile of paper has a volume of 3000 cm3. Use the information shown in Fig. 1.1.
[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/F/M/18

3
(c) The student measures the total mass of the paper in the pile.
State the name of a device used to measure mass.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The mass of the paper in the pile is 2400 g.
Calculate the density of the paper.
density = .............................................. g / cm3 [3]
[Total: 6]

4
2 Some cyclists are racing around a track.
(a) Fig. 2.1 shows the speed-time graph for one cyclist.
25.0
B
20.0
speed
m/s C
15.0
10.0 A
5.0
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(i) Tick the box that represents the cyclist travelling at constant speed.
D [1]
(ii) Calculate the distance travelled by the cyclist in the first 5 seconds.
distance = ..................................................... m [3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/F/M/18

5
(b) The length of the track is 250 m.
Another cyclist goes around the track four times (four laps). This takes 80.0 seconds.
(i) Calculate the average speed of this cyclist.
average speed = ................................................. m / s [4]
(ii) A friend of the cyclist starts a stopwatch at the beginning of the race.
Fig. 2.2 shows the reading on the stopwatch when the cyclist has gone around the track
once.
Fig. 2.3 shows the reading on the stopwatch when the cyclist has gone around the track
twice.
1 1
min s 100 s min s 100 s
Fig. 2.2 Fig. 2.3
Calculate the time taken for the cyclist to go around the track during the second lap.
time = ....................................................... s [1]
[Total: 9]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the load-extension graphs for two springs, A and B.
25
load / N
20
spring A
15
spring B
10
0
0 10 20 30 40
extension / mm
Fig. 3.1
(a) Determine the extension of spring A for a load of 10 N.
extension = .................................................. mm [1]
(b) State which spring is easier to stretch and give a reason for your answer.
spring ........................................................................................................................................
reason .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/F/M/18

7
(c) A different spring is suspended from the edge of a bench, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
bench
spring
19.7
cm pin
43.9
cm
metre rule load = 6.0 N
100 cm mark 100 cm mark
Fig. 3.2 Fig. 3.3
With no load on the spring, the pin points to 19.7 cm on the metre rule, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
When a load of 6.0 N is attached to the spring, the pin points to 43.9 cm, as shown in Fig. 3.3.
(i) Calculate the extension of this spring for a load of 6.0 N.
extension = .................................................... cm [1]
(ii) Describe how a student could use the equipment in Fig. 3.2 to obtain accurate readings
for a load-extension graph for this spring.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]

8
4 Fig. 4.1 represents a hydroelectric system for generating electrical energy.
reservoir
pipe
power
station
water
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe how the power station uses the water in the reservoir to generate electrical energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) State three advantages of generating electrical energy using a hydroelectric system
compared with using a coal-fired power station.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/F/M/18

9
(c) An electric drill is shown in Fig. 4.2. It uses electrical energy.
Fig. 4.2
Complete the sentences about the electric drill.
Use words from the box. Each word may be used once, more than once, or not at all.
efficient kinetic potential powerful reliable thermal
(i) The electric drill usefully transforms electrical energy into .......................... energy. [1]
(ii) A second electric drill transforms the same amount of electrical energy per second as the
first one. It wastes more of this energy.
The second drill is less ......................................... than the first drill. [1]
[Total: 8]

10
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a glass bottle containing air. The bottle is sealed with a cap.
cap
air
Fig. 5.1
(a) The air in the bottle becomes warmer.
(i) State what happens to the pressure of the air in the bottle.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the pressure of the air in the bottle changes. Use your ideas about gas
molecules.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The bottle has a weight of 5.4 N and an area of 9.2 cm2 in contact with the table.
Calculate the pressure produced by the bottle on the table. Give the unit.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/F/M/18

11
(c) Fig. 5.2 shows another bottle. The bottle is on a table. Part of the base of this bottle is not in
contact with the table.
cap
air
bottom of bottle
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.3 shows the base of the bottle. The shaded area is not in contact with the table.
4.0 cm
(i) The base of the bottle is circular. The radius of the outer circle is 4.0 cm as shown in
Fig. 5.3. Calculate the area of this circle.
area = .................................................. cm2 [1]
(ii) The bottle shown in Fig. 5.2 has the same mass as the bottle shown in Fig. 5.1. Explain
why the bottle shown in Fig. 5.2 exerts more pressure on the table than the bottle shown
in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

12
6 A thermometer is used to measure the temperature inside a room in a house.
(a) State a physical property that varies with temperature and can be used in a thermometer.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 6.1 shows how the temperature of the room changes between 6:00 pm and 11:00 pm.
20
temperature / °C
15
10
6:00 pm 7:00 pm 8:00 pm 9:00 pm 10:00 pm 11:00 pm
time of day
Fig. 6.1
A heater in the room is switched on at 6 pm. The room has a large window. A large amount of
thermal energy is transferred through the window. The window in the room has thick curtains.
Closing the curtains reduces the loss of thermal energy from the room.
(i) Suggest the time at which the heater is switched off.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest the time at which the curtains were closed and explain your answer. Use
information from the graph.
time ...................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/F/M/18

13
(c) In cool climates, people use mineral wool to reduce heat loss from houses. Mineral wool is
made of fibres and trapped air, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
fibres
pocket of trapped air
Fig. 6.2
Use words from the box to complete the sentences. Each word may be used once, more than
once, or not at all.
conductor conduction convection emitter insulator radiation radiator
Air is a good ............................................ .
When air is trapped between fibres, it reduces heat loss by ..................................... and by
........................................ .
[3]
[Total: 7]

14
7 (a) A ray of light refracts as it travels from air into glass, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
ray of normal
light
x
air w
glass y
Fig. 7.1
(i) State which angle w, x, y or z, is the angle of refraction.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Light is a transverse wave.

State another example of a transverse wave.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 represents some wavefronts approaching a barrier with a narrow gap.
barrier with
narrow gap
direction of travel
for wavefronts
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw three wavefronts that have passed through the gap. [2]
(ii) State the name of the effect in (b)(i).
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/F/M/18

15
8 A student sets up an electrical circuit. She draws part of the circuit diagram, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
lamp A
lamp B
Fig. 8.1
(a) On Fig. 8.1, draw the circuit symbols for three devices so that the student can:
(i) measure the total current in the circuit [1]

(ii) vary the current in the lamp B only [1]
(iii) measure the potential difference (p.d.) across lamp B. [2]
(b) The current in lamp A is 0.20 A. The potential difference (p.d.) across lamp A is 6.0 V.
Calculate the resistance of lamp A.
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [3]
[Total: 7]

16
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 represents the seven main regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
infra-red
radio waves microwaves visible light ultraviolet gamma rays
radiation
Fig. 9.1
(i) In Fig. 9.1, one region is not named.

State the name of the radiation in this region.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State which region has waves with the longest wavelength.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Tick the box for the wave with the lowest speed in air.
ultraviolet
ultrasound
visible light [1]
(c) A group of students want to determine the speed of sound in air.
Describe a method they can use. State the measurements they need to make.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/F/M/18

17
10 (a) A teacher demonstrates electromagnetic induction using the apparatus shown in Fig. 10.1.
spring
S
magnet
N
coil
centre-zero
millivoltmeter
Fig. 10.1
The teacher pulls the magnet down until one end is inside the coil. The teacher then releases
the magnet. The magnet moves up and down repeatedly. As it moves, one end of the magnet
enters and leaves the coil.
Describe and explain the readings on the centre-zero millivoltmeter as the magnet enters and
leaves the coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]

18
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a system for transmitting electricity from a power station.
132 000 V
pylon
power 22 000 V 240 V

station X Y homes
Fig. 10.2
State the name of the device used in X and the name of the device used in Y.
X ...............................................................................................................................................
Y ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/F/M/18

19
11 (a) A student rubs a polythene rod with a dry cloth. The polythene rod becomes negatively
charged.
Describe and explain how the rod becomes negatively charged.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The negatively charged polythene rod hangs from a nylon thread so that it is free to turn.
The student charges a second polythene rod and brings it close to the first rod, as shown in
Fig. 11.1.
nylon negatively
thread charged
polythene rod
negatively
charged
polythene rod
Fig. 11.1
Describe and explain what happens when the negatively charged rods are close to each
other.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]

20
12 Fig. 12.1 shows a radioactive source placed close to a radiation detector and counter. The detector
can detect α, β and γ radiation.
radioactive radiation
source detector counter
Fig. 12.1
The radioactive source emits β-particles only.
Describe how you could show that the source emits β-particles only.
As part of your answer, you may draw on Fig. 12.1 and add any other apparatus you may need.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/F/M/18

PHYSICS 0625/42
Paper 4 Extended Theory March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a) Rate of change of velocity OR change of velocity / time B1

OR change of velocity over time OR (v – u)/t
1(b)(i) Straight line from origin to (15, 28) B1
Horizontal line {from (15, 28)} to (32, 28) B1
a = (v – u) / t C1
OR (t =) (v – u) / a OR (0 – 28) / 2.0
= 14 (s) C1
Straight line from (32, 28) to (46, 0) A1
1(b)(ii) 1 Towards the centre of the circle / inwards B1
2 Velocity is (continually) changing its direction B1

PUBLISHED
2(a) (Because g.p.e. is) B1

the work done by the force
OR the force × the distance that the object rises
OR mgh and height is greater
2(b) mgh OR 80 × 65 × 10 × 1600 C1
8.3 × 107 J A1
2(c) Method 1
W = Pt OR E = Pt in any form C1
Work input =1500 × 103 × 30 × 60 OR 2.7 × 109 J C1
Efficiency = work output / work input (x 100) C1
0.031 OR 3.1 % A1
Method 2
P = E/t in any form (C1)
Power output = 8.3 × 107 / 30 × 60 (C1)
Efficiency = power output / power input (× 100) (C1)
0.031 OR 3.1% (A1)

PUBLISHED
3(a) ...(the) force × its perpendicular distance from pivot / a point B1
3(b)(i) centre of mass B1
3(b)(ii) (mass =) 160 / 10 = 16 kg B1
3(b)(iii) (Not moving up or down because) no resultant (vertical) force C1

OR upward force = downward force
80 N + 80 N = 160 N A1
(Not rotating because) no resultant moment (about any point) C1

OR (sum of) clockwise moments = (sum of) anticlockwise moments
clockwise moment (about centre) = 80 × 1.2 A1

anticlockwise moment (about centre) = 80 × 1.2
4(a) Molecules of hot liquid collide with (surface of) spoon B1
transfer energy / heat to (molecules of) spoon B1
(amplitude of) vibration of spoon’s molecules increases / is faster (increasing spoon’s temperature) B1
4(b) Molecules of hot liquid (also) transfer energy to (free) electrons in the spoon B1
These (free) electrons move through the metal B1
4(c) (Q =) mc∆θ C1
150 × 4.2 × (80 – 56) C1
15000 J A1

PUBLISHED
5(a)(i) Sketch showing straight lines with sudden changes of direction B1
5(a)(ii) Any 3 marks from 4 points:
Air molecules move in random / different directions B1
Smoke particles are hit B1
by air molecules B1
Change direction at each collision OR undergo Brownian motion B1
5(b) F = (mv – mu) / t in any form OR Impulse = mv – mu C1
= 20 × 4.2 / 60 C1
1.4 N A1
6(a) A: infra-red B: ultra-violet C: X-(rays) D: γ-(rays) B2
6(b)(i) n = sin i / sin r C1

OR sin r = sin i / n OR sin r = sin 35 / 1.50
r = 22° A1
6(b)(ii) Refraction at XY drawn with r < i B1
Refraction at XZ drawn with r > i B1
6(b)(iii) Blue ray drawn below red ray in prism and drawn with r < i M1
Ray to right of prism diverging downwards from red ray A1

PUBLISHED
7(a) n = speed in air / speed in water C1

OR speed in water = 3.0 × 108 / 1.33
2.3 × 108 m / s A1
Answers to (b)(i), (b)(ii) and (b)(iii) all combined to maximum of 5 marks on same screen
7(b)(i) Wavefronts in plastic: B1

meet wavefronts in air
make smaller angle with boundary than wavefronts in air and downwards to the left B1
parallel to each other B1
7(b)(ii) Arrow(s) perpendicular to wavefronts in plastic and downwards to right B1
7(b)(iii) r in plastic between refracted wavefront and boundary B1
OR (B1)
At a point where refracted wavefront meets boundary, normal to boundary drawn and line perpendicular to wavefront drawn.
r in plastic between the two lines drawn

PUBLISHED
8(a) P = IV C1
OR (I =) 50 / 12
4.2 A A1
8(b)(i) (E =) QV C1
(E =) 270 × 103 × 12 C1
3.2 × 106 J / 3200 kJ A1
8(b)(ii) Volume of fuel used = 3.2 × 106 / 3.6 × 104 C1
89 cm3 A1
OR 90 cm3 if 3.24 × 106 used

PUBLISHED
9(a)(i) Resistor: tick in 2nd box B1
9(a)(ii) Lamp: tick in 1st box B1
9(b) (R =) V / I OR (R =) 6.0 / 4.4 C1
1.4 Ω A1
9(c) Current in lamp = 4.4 A Current in resistor = 4.0 A C1
Current from supply (= 4.0 + 4.4) = 8.4 A A1
OR (C1)
(With 6 V p.d.) RL = 6 / 4.4 = 1.36 Ω RR = 6 / 4 = 1.5 Ω
Combined resistance = (1.36 × 1.5) / 2.86) = 0.71 Ω
Current = 6 / 0.71 = 8.4 A (A1)
9(d) p.d. across lamp = 4.9 V p.d. across resistor = 6.0 V C1
Total p.d. (= 4.9 + 6.0) = 10.9 V A1
OR (C1)
(With 4 A current) RL = 5 / 4 = 1.25 Ω RR = 6 / 4 =1.5 Ω Total R = 2.75 Ω
Total p.d. = 2.75 × 4 = 11.0 V (A1)

PUBLISHED
10(a) Strength of magnetic field / magnet B1
Speed (of movement of wire) B1
Length of AB / wire (within field) B1
10(b)(i) Vp / Vs = Np / Ns C1

OR (Ns =) 8000 × 12 / 240
400 (turns) A1
10(b)(ii) Circuit connected to A and B with resistor and diode with correct circuit symbols in series B1
11(a)(i) In box / cupboard with lead walls B1
11(a)(ii) (Handle) with (long) tongs OR remote-controlled device OR wearing lead gloves OR wearing lead suit B1
11(b) Col 1: gamma / γ (rays) B1

alpha / α (particles)
beta / β (particles)
Col 3: – B1
a few cm or up to 10 cm
a few m or up to 10 m
Col 4: thick lead or 30 cm lead or very thick concrete or 3 m concrete B1
–
thin aluminium or 2 mm aluminium
11(c)(i) alpha / α (particles or rays) B1
11(c)(ii) beta / β (particles or rays) B1

* 9 4 3 9 9 8 5 6 4 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) February/March 2018
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (SC/SW) 149762/5
2
1 (a) Define acceleration.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time axes for the graph of the motion of a car.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) The car starts from rest.
From time = 0 to time = 15 s, the car has a constant acceleration to a speed of 28 m / s.
From time = 15 s to time = 32 s, the car has a constant speed of 28 m / s.
From time = 32 s, the car has a constant deceleration of 2.0 m / s2 until it comes to rest.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph, using the space below for any calculations.
[5]
(ii) From time = 15 s to time = 32 s, the path of the car is part of a circle.
For this motion, state
1. the direction of the resultant force on the car,
...........................................................................................................................................
2. what happens to the velocity of the car.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

3
2 (a) A force is used to move an object from the Earth’s surface to a greater height.
Explain why the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the object increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a train moving up towards the top of a mountain.
Fig. 2.1
The train transports 80 passengers, each of average mass 65 kg, through a vertical height of
1600 m.
Calculate the increase in the total gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the passengers.
increase in g.p.e. = ......................................................... [2]
(c) The engine of the train has a power of 1500 kW. The time taken to reach the top of the
mountain is 30 minutes.
Calculate the efficiency of the engine in raising the 80 passengers 1600 m to the top of the
mountain.
efficiency = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 7]

4
3 (a) Complete the statement by writing in the blank spaces.
The moment of a force about a pivot is equal to ......................................................................
multiplied by .......................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a horizontal rod of length 2.4 m and weight 160 N. The weight of the rod acts
at its centre. The rod is suspended by two vertical ropes X and Y. The tension in each rope is
80 N.
80 N 80 N
2.4 m
rope X rope Y
rod
160 N
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the name given to the point at which the weight of the rod acts.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the mass of the rod.
mass = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) The rod is in equilibrium.
Using data from Fig. 3.1, explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

5
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a cold plastic spoon that has just been placed in hot liquid in a cup.
plastic spoon
hot liquid
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe, in terms of molecules, why the temperature of the whole of the spoon increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The plastic spoon is replaced by a metal spoon.
Describe an additional process by which the temperature of the whole of this spoon increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The cup contains 150 g of liquid of specific heat capacity 4.2 J / (g °C). When the cold spoon is
placed into the hot liquid, the temperature of the liquid decreases from 80 °C to 56 °C.
Calculate the loss of thermal energy from the liquid.
energy loss = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]

6
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus used to observe the motion of smoke particles that are in the air
in a box.
eye
microscope
air molecules
light and
smoke particles
Fig. 5.1
Light from a lamp enters the box through a window in one side of the box. The smoke particles
are observed using a microscope fixed above a window in the top of the box.
(i) The motion of a single smoke particle is observed through the microscope.
In the circle shown, sketch the path of this smoke particle.
[1]
(ii) Explain why the smoke particle follows the path that is observed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

7
(b) A tennis player is practising by hitting a ball many times against a wall.
The ball hits the wall 20 times in 60 s. The average change in momentum for each collision
with the wall is 4.2 kg m / s.
Calculate the average force that the ball exerts on the wall.
average force = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 represents the electromagnetic spectrum.
visible light
radio waves microwaves A B C D
Fig. 6.1
State the radiation in each of the regions represented by A, B, C and D in Fig. 6.1.
A ................................................................
B ...............................................................
C ...............................................................
D ...............................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

9
(b) A source emits visible light.
Fig. 6.2 shows a ray of red light from the source incident on the face XY of a glass prism at
point S.
normal
i S
ray of
red light
Y Z
Fig. 6.2
The angle of incidence i of the ray is 35 °. The refractive index of the glass for red light is 1.5.
(i) Calculate the angle of refraction in the glass at S.
angle of refraction = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) On Fig. 6.2, draw the refracted ray at face XY and the ray emerging from face XZ of the
prism. Label this ray R. [2]
(iii) A ray of blue light follows the same path as the ray of red light incident on the face XY.
On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of this ray in the prism and emerging from the prism.
Label this ray B. [2]
[Total: 8]

10
7 (a) The speed of a light wave in air is 3.00 × 108 m / s. The refractive index of water is 1.33.
Calculate the speed of the light wave in water.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows parallel wavefronts of a light wave in air incident on a boundary with a
transparent plastic.
direction
of light wave
air
transparent
plastic
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1,
(i) draw the positions of the four refracted wavefronts in the plastic, [3]
(ii) draw an arrow to show the direction of travel of the refracted wave, [1]
(iii) label the angle of refraction r of the light wave. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

11
8 (a) The lamp of a car headlight is rated at 12 V, 50 W.
Calculate the current in the lamp when operating normally.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) A car is driven at night.
In a journey, the total charge that passes through the 12 V battery is 270 kC.
(i) Calculate the electrical energy transferred.
energy = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) The fuel used by the car provides 3.6 × 104 J / cm3.
Calculate the volume of fuel used to provide the energy calculated in (b)(i).
volume = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows current-potential difference graphs for a resistor and for a lamp.
6.0
current / A
4.0 lamp
2.0
resistor
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
potential difference / V
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) The potential difference (p.d.) applied to the resistor is increased. Tick the box that
indicates the effect on the resistance of the resistor.
resistance increases
resistance is constant
resistance decreases
[1]
(ii) The potential difference (p.d.) applied to the lamp is increased. Tick the box that indicates
the effect on the resistance of the lamp.
resistance increases
resistance is constant
resistance decreases
[1]
(b) The p.d. across the lamp is 6.0 V. Calculate the resistance of the lamp.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

13
(c) The lamp and the resistor are connected in parallel to a 6.0 V supply.
Calculate the current from the supply.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(d) The lamp and the resistor are connected in series to another power supply. The current in
the circuit is 4.0 A.
Calculate the total p.d. across the lamp and the resistor.
p.d. = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a straight wire AB placed in the magnetic field between the poles of a magnet.
The ends of AB are connected to a galvanometer.
N S
Fig. 10.1
When AB is moved vertically, the needle of the galvanometer shows a deflection.
State three factors that affect the size of the deflection.
1 ...............................................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................................
3 ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a transformer.
240 V P S 12 V
Fig. 10.2
(i) The primary coil P has 8000 turns and an input of 240 V. The secondary coil S has an
output of 12 V.
Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil.
number = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18
15
(ii) A circuit containing a resistor is connected to the terminals A and B.

A direct current (d.c.) is required in this resistor.
On Fig. 10.2, draw this circuit. [1]
[Total: 6]

16
11 (a) To ensure the safety of workers in laboratories where radioactive sources are used, describe
how radioactive materials
(i) should be stored,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) should be handled.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Complete the table below for three types of emission from radioactive sources.
type of emission nature range in air absorbed by
electromagnetic radiation several km
helium nucleus 0.2 mm paper
electron
[3]
(c) State the type of radiation emitted when
an americium nucleus ( Am) decays into a neptunium nucleus ( Np),

241 237
(i) 95 93
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
a phosphorus nucleus ( 15 P) decays into a silicon nucleus ( 16 Si).

32 32
(ii)
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

PHYSICS 0625/52
Paper 5 Practical Test February/March 2018
* 5 6 9 6 0 1 3 4 6 2 *
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
DC (SC) 150179/3
2
The Supervisor is asked to give (and attach to the Supervisor’s Report form printed on pages 7 and 8)
a brief description of the apparatus supplied, mentioning any points that are likely to be of importance
question 4.
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/CI/F/M/18

3
Question 1
Items to be supplied by the Centre (per set of apparatus unless otherwise specified).
(i) Metre rule with a scale graduated in mm. See note 1.
(ii) Triangular block to act as a pivot for the metre rule. This block is to stand on the bench.
(iii) Mass of 20 g, labelled Q. The mass must be able to stand on the rule.
Note
1. The metre rule should approximately balance on the pivot, with the scale facing upwards, when
the 50 cm mark is over the pivot.
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/CI/F/M/18 [Turn over

4
Question 2
(i) Two lamps, one 2.5 V, 0.3 A or similar, labelled X, and the other 6 V, 0.4 A or similar, labelled Y.
See note 2.
(ii) Power supply of approximately 2 V to 3 V. See note 3.

(iv) Sufficient connecting leads to set up the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1, with 4 spare leads.
(v) Ammeter capable of measuring currents up to 1.00 A with a resolution of at least 0.05 A. See
note 4.
(vi) Voltmeter capable of measuring up to 3.0 V with a resolution of at least 0.1 V. See note 4.
Notes
1. The circuit is to be set up for candidates as shown in Fig. 2.1. The voltmeter must have leads and
terminals that enable it to be connected to different parts of the circuit.
power supply
X Y
Fig. 2.1
2. The lamps must have suitable terminals so that candidates are able easily and quickly to rearrange
the circuit. Spare lamps should be available.
must be available.
4. Either analogue or digital meters are suitable. Any variable settings should be set by the Supervisor
and fixed, e.g. taped. Spare meters should be available.
Connect the circuit as shown in Fig. 2.1 and check that the circuit is working.
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/CI/F/M/18

5
Question 3
Items to be supplied by the Centre (per set of apparatus unless otherwise specified).
(i) Thermometer: −10 °C to 110 °C, graduated in 1°C intervals. See note 1.
(ii) Clamp, boss and stand. See note 1.
(iii) 250 cm3 beaker. See notes 1 and 2.
(iv) Supply of hot water. See notes 3 and 4.
(vi) Paper towels to soak up any water spills.
Notes
1. The thermometer, clamp, boss and stand are to be set up for candidates as shown in Fig. 3.1. The
thermometer bulb must be well below the 100 cm3 level of the beaker. Candidates must be able
easily and safely to read temperatures up to 100 °C and to move the thermometer in and out of the
beaker.
thermometer clamp
beaker
bench
Fig. 3.1
2. If the beaker does not have volume markings, the 200 cm3 and 100 cm3 levels must be indicated
on the beaker.
will require about 400 cm3 of hot water in total. They must be able to pour hot water into the beaker
safely.
4. Candidates must be warned of the dangers of burns or scalds when using very hot water.
Action at Changeover
Empty the water from the beaker. Check that the apparatus is intact and is arranged as in Fig. 3.1.

6
Question 4
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/CI/F/M/18

7
0625/52
General
in the scripts;
for each experiment for each session, must be enclosed with the scripts. The space below can be used
for this, or it may be on separate paper.

8
CENTRE NO. ..........................................................................................................................................
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
the examination.
SIGNED ......................................................
Supervisor
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/CI/F/M/18

PHYSICS 0625/52
Paper 5 Practical March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a) 5 b values decreasing 1
all < 43.0 cm and b calculation correct 1
1(b) graph:
• axes labelled correct orientation, with quantity and unit 1
• appropriate scales (plots occupying at least ½ grid) 1
• plots all correct to ½ small square and precise plots 1
• well judged line and thin line 1
1(c)(i) G present 1
and triangle method seen on graph
1(c)(ii) MR in range 70 (g) to 400 (g) 1
2 / 3 significant figures and unit 1
1(d) (difficult to see correct mark) and: 1

measure width of mass and add ½ width to mark at edge of mass /
mean value of marks at both edges of mass /
mark centre line of mass and edge of rule /
line up mark through gap in slotted mass
1(e) more accurate 1

and errors have less effect ( with larger values) /
less % uncertainty

PUBLISHED
2(a)(i) IS <1.00 (A) 1
2(a)(ii) VX and VY both <3.00 (V) and VX < VY 1
2(a)(iii) VS within 10% of (VX + VY) 1
2(a)(iv) statement matching results 1
justification matching statement with comparative values used 1

e.g. within limits of experimental accuracy
2(b) correct calculation of R1 1
2 / 3 sig figs and unit Ω 1
2(c) lamps in parallel arrangement 1
all circuit elements in correct arrangement and circuit symbols correct 1
2(d)(i) IP and VP present and V and A units correct throughout 1
2(d)(ii) R2 > R1 1

PUBLISHED
3(a) θ for 200 cm3 decreasing 1
3(b)(i) θ for 100 cm3 decreasing more quickly 1
3(b)(ii) s, °C, °C all correct 1
30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 1
3(c) conclusion matching results 1
justification matching conclusion with correct mention of comparative temperature change over 0 to 180 s 1
3(d)(i) unit °C / s 1
3(d)(ii) correct calculation of x1 and x2 < x1 1
3(e) statement matching results 1

with results used in explanation and reference to different starting temperatures for x1 and x2
3(f) experiment with lid and no insulation 1
experiment with insulation and no lid 1

PUBLISHED
4 MP1 factor: 1
clear statement of appropriate variable to test
MP2 control variable: 1

named variable which should be kept constant
MP3 apparatus: 1
metre rule and any apparatus essential to variable under test
MP4 method: 1
measure factor under test
and drop ball
and measure diameter / depth of depression
MP5 repeat for new value of variable under test 1
MP6 additional point: 1

repeat experiment or each value of factor and average /
means of measuring depth / diameter of crater accurately /
apparatus for measuring diameter of ball accurately /
measure diameter of ball / crater in different places (and take mean) /
smooth / flatten sand surface /
at least 5 sets of data taken /
reliable means of releasing ball /
sensible values for factor quoted
MP7 graph: 1
diameter / depth of depression vs appropriate continuous variable

* 0 7 2 5 7 7 5 3 4 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/52
Paper 5 Practical Test February/March 2018
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
DC (SC/JG) 150178/5
2
1 In this experiment, you will determine the mass of a metre rule by a balancing method.
a
block Q
metre rule b
pivot P
0 cm mark 50.0 cm mark 100 cm mark
Fig. 1.1
(a) Place the metre rule on the pivot. Place block Q on the metre rule with its centre at the
95.0 cm mark. Keep Q at the 95.0 cm mark and adjust the position of the metre rule on the
pivot until the metre rule is as near to being balanced as possible.
The distance a between the centre of Q and the 50.0 cm mark has been recorded in Table 1.1.
In the table, record the position of the pivot P.
Calculate the distance b between the centre of Q and the pivot P, using the formula
b = (position of Q – position of P).
Repeat the procedure for positions of Q at the 90.0 cm, 85.0 cm, 80.0 cm and 75.0 cm marks.
Record your values for the position of P and your values for b in the table.
Table 1.1
position of Q position of P
a / cm b / cm
/ cm / cm
95.0 45.0
90.0 40.0
85.0 35.0
80.0 30.0
75.0 25.0
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/F/M/18

3
(b) Plot a graph of a / cm (y-axis) against b / cm (x-axis). You do not need to start your axes at the
origin (0,0).
[4]
(c) (i) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
G = ............................................................... [1]
M
(ii) Calculate the mass MR of the metre rule using the equation MR = ,
(G – 1)
where M = 20 g. Record the value for MR to a suitable number of significant figures for
this experiment.
MR = ............................................................... [2]

4
(d) Describe why it is difficult to place the block Q at the correct mark on the metre rule each time.
Explain how you overcame this difficulty. You may draw a diagram to help your explanation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) Two students carry out the experiment correctly but with different values for the mass of
block Q. One student obtains values of b that are larger than those obtained by the other
student.
State and explain whether the larger values of b are likely to produce a more accurate value
for the mass of the metre rule.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/F/M/18

5
2 In this experiment, you will investigate a circuit containing different lamps.
power supply
X Y
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) Switch on. Record the current IS in the circuit.
IS = ............................................................... [1]
(ii) Record the potential difference (p.d.) VX across lamp X.
VX = ....................................................................
Connect the voltmeter to measure the p.d. VY across lamp Y.

Record VY .
VY = ....................................................................
[1]
(iii) Disconnect the voltmeter.
Connect the voltmeter to measure the p.d. VS across both lamps X and Y connected in
series.
Record VS.
VS = ................................................................[1]
Switch off.

6
(iv) A student suggests that VS should be equal to (VX + VY).
State whether your readings support this suggestion. Justify your statement with
statement ..........................................................................................................................
justification ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Calculate the resistance R1 of lamp X. Use your readings from (a)(i) and (a)(ii) and the
V
equation R1 = X . Record your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for your
experiment. IS
R1 = ............................................................... [2]
(c) The circuit components are to be rearranged so that
• lamps X and Y are connected in parallel

• the ammeter measures the current in lamp X only
• the voltmeter measures the p.d. across the lamps.
Draw a circuit diagram of this arrangement.
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/F/M/18

7
(d) (i) Set up the circuit as described in (c).
Switch on. Measure and record the current IP in lamp X and the p.d. VP across the
lamps.
IP = ....................................................................
VP = ....................................................................
[1]
Switch off.
(ii) Calculate the new resistance R2 of lamp X. Use your readings from (d)(i) and the
V
equation R2 = P .
IP
R2 = ............................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]

8
3 In this experiment, you will investigate how the volume of water affects the rate at which water in a
beaker cools.
The thermometer must remain in the clamp throughout the experiment.
thermometer clamp
beaker
bench
Fig. 3.1
(a) Pour 200 cm3 of hot water into the beaker.

Place the thermometer in the water.
In the first row of Table 3.1, record the maximum temperature θ of the water and immediately
start the stopclock.
Record, in the table, the temperature θ of the water at times t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s, 150 s
and 180 s.
Remove the thermometer from the beaker and empty the beaker. [1]
(b) (i) Repeat (a), using 100 cm3 of hot water in the beaker. [1]
(ii) Complete the headings and the time column in the table. [2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/F/M/18

9
Table 3.1
beaker beaker
with 200 cm3 of hot water with 100 cm3 of hot water
t/ θ/ θ/
(c) Write a conclusion stating how the volume of water in the beaker affects the rate of cooling of
the water. Justify your answer by reference to your results.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) (i) Using your results for 100 cm3 of water, calculate the average rate of cooling x1 for the
first 90 s of the experiment. Use your readings from the table and the equation
θ0 – θ90
x1 = ,
t
where t = 90 s and θ0 and θ90 are the temperatures at 0 s and 90 s.
Include the unit for the rate of cooling.
x1 = ............................................................... [1]
(ii) Using your results for 100 cm3 of water, calculate the average rate of cooling x2 in the
last 90 s of the experiment. Use your readings from the table and the equation
θ90 – θ180
x2 = ,
t
where t = 90 s and θ90 and θ180 are the temperatures at 90 s and 180 s.
x2 = ............................................................... [1]
10
(e) A student suggests that it is important that the experiments with the two volumes of water
should have the same starting temperatures.
State whether your values for x1 and x2 support this suggestion. Justify your statement with
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(f) Another student wants to investigate whether more thermal energy is lost from the water
surface than from the sides of the beakers.
Describe an experiment that could be done to investigate this.
You may draw a diagram to help your description.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/F/M/18

11
4 A student is investigating the factors that affect the size of the crater (hole) a ball makes when it is
dropped into sand.
Plan an experiment which would enable you to investigate one factor which might affect the size
of the crater. You are not required to carry out the experiment.
metal balls of different sizes

a tray of sand.
In your plan, you should:
• state which factor is being investigated,
• state the key variables that you would control,
• list any additional apparatus needed,
• explain briefly how you would carry out the experiment including what would be measured
and how this would be done,
• state the precautions which should be taken to obtain reliable results,
• suggest a suitable graph which could be drawn from the results.
You may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................

12
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/F/M/18

PHYSICS 0625/62
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a) measure width of mass and add ½ width to mark at edge of mass / 1
mean value of marks at both edges of mass /
mark centre line of mass and edge of rule /
line up mark through gap in slotted mass
1(b) method such as: 1

find point which just tips one way
move rule to find point which just tips other way
balance point is between these where rule tips either way / owtte 1
1(c)(i) graph:
• axes labelled correct orientation, with quantity and unit 1
• appropriate scales (plots occupying at least ½ grid) 1
• plots all correct to ½ small square and precise plots 1
• well judged line and thin line 1
1(c)(ii) G present and triangle method seen on graph 1
1(c)(iii) MR in range 100 g to 400 g 1
2 / 3 significant figures and unit 1
1(d) more accurate 1

and errors have less effect ( with larger values) /
less % uncertainty

PUBLISHED
2(a)(i) θ for beaker A = 87(.0)(°C) and θ for beaker B = 89(.0)(°C) 1
2(a)(ii) s, °C, °C all correct 1
30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 1
2(b) one precaution e.g.: 1

read at 90° (to scale) / perpendicularly,
stir (before reading) / wait until reading stops rising(at start)
2(c) conclusion matching results 1
justification matching conclusion with correct mention of comparative temperature change over 0 to 180 s 1
2(d)(i) unit °C / s 1
2(d)(ii) x1 = 0.094 / ecf and x2 = 0.067 1
2(e) statement matching results 1

with results used in explanation and reference to different (starting) temperatures for x1 and x2
2(f) experiment with lid and no insulation 1
experiment with insulation and no lid 1

PUBLISHED
3(a) correct voltmeter symbol in parallel with lamp X 1
3(b) IS = 0.34 (A) 1
3(c)(i) VX = 1.2 (V) and VY = 1.9 (V) 1
3(c)(ii) VS present and correct units (A, V) seen in (b) and (c) 1
3(c)(iii) statement matching results 1
justification matching statement with use of comparative values 1

(e.g. 3.1 and 3.0 are within limits of experimental accuracy)
3(d) correct calculation of R1 (3.5 / ecf) 1
3(e)(i) lamps in parallel arrangement 1
all circuit elements in correct arrangement and all circuit symbols correct 1
resistance increases with temperature 1
3(e)(ii) R2 > R1 and brighter lamp has higher temperature 1

PUBLISHED
4 MP1 factor: 1
clear statement of appropriate variable to test
MP2 control variable: 1

named variable which should be kept constant
MP3 apparatus: 1
metre rule and any apparatus essential to variable under test
MP4 method: 1
measure factor under test
and drop ball
and measure diameter / depth of depression
MP5 repeat for new value of variable under test 1
MP6 additional point: 1

repeat experiment or each value of factor and average /
means of measuring depth / diameter of crater accurately /
apparatus for measuring diameter of ball accurately /
measure diameter of ball / crater in different places (and take mean) /
smooth / flatten sand surface /
at least 5 sets of data taken /
reliable means of releasing ball /
sensible values for factor quoted
MP7 graph: 1
diameter / depth of depression vs appropriate continuous variable

* 7 9 1 7 9 4 6 5 4 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/62
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical February/March 2018
1 hour

DC (NF/SW) 150177/4
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/F/M/18

3
1 A student is determining the mass of a metre rule by a balancing method.
He is using the apparatus shown in Fig. 1.1.
a
block Q
metre rule b
pivot
0 cm mark 50.0 cm mark 100 cm mark
Fig. 1.1
(a) He places the metre rule on the pivot and then places block Q with its centre at the 95.0 cm
mark.
The student stated that it is difficult to place the mass accurately at the 95.0 cm mark.
Explain how the student could overcome this. You may draw a diagram to help your
explanation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

4
(b) The student keeps block Q at the 95.0 cm mark and adjusts the position of the metre rule on
the pivot until the metre rule is as near to being balanced as possible.
Describe a method to find the point at which the metre rule is as near to being balanced as
possible.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The student determines the distance a between the centre of block Q and the 50.0 cm mark
and also the distance b between the centre of block Q and the pivot.
He repeats the procedure for positions of block Q at the 90.0 cm, 85.0 cm, 80.0 cm and
75.0 cm marks. His results are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
position of Q
a / cm b / cm
/ cm
95.0 45.0 39.0
90.0 40.0 34.3
85.0 35.0 30.0
80.0 30.0 25.2
75.0 25.0 21.4
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/F/M/18

5
(i) Plot a graph of a / cm (y-axis) against b / cm (x-axis). You do not need to start your axes at
the origin (0, 0).
[4]
(ii) Determine the gradient G of your line. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
G = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) Calculate the mass MR of the metre rule using the equation MR = M ,
(G – 1)
where M = 20 g. Record the value for MR to a suitable number of significant figures for
this experiment.
MR = ...........................................................[2]

6
(d) Two students carry out the experiment correctly but with different values for the mass of
block Q. One student obtains values of b that are larger than those obtained by the other
student.
State and explain whether the larger values of b are likely to produce a more accurate value
for the mass of the metre rule.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/F/M/18

7
BLANK PAGE

8
2 Some students are investigating how the volume of water affects the rate at which water in a
beaker cools.
They are using the apparatus shown in Fig. 2.1.

100
100
clamp
90
90
clamp
80
80
thermometer A thermometer B
beaker A beaker B
bench
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) 200 cm3 of hot water is poured into beaker A and the initial temperature rises to the value
shown on thermometer A in Fig. 2.1.
In the first row of Table 2.1, record this temperature θA for time t = 0.
100 cm3 of hot water is poured into beaker B. The temperature rises to the value shown
on thermometer B in Fig. 2.1.
In the first row of the table, record this temperature θB for time t = 0.
[1]
(ii) The temperatures θA and θB of the water in each experiment at times t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s,

120 s, 150 s and 180 s are shown in the table.
Complete the headings and the time column in the table. [2]
Table 2.1
beaker A beaker B
with 200 cm3 of water with 100 cm3 of water
t/ θA / θB /
0
85.0 86.0
83.0 83.0
81.5 80.5
80.0 78.0
78.5 76.0
77.5 74.5
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/F/M/18

9
(b) Describe one precaution which should be taken to ensure that the temperature readings in
the experiment are as accurate as possible.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Write a conclusion stating how the volume of water in the beaker affects the rate of cooling of
the water. Justify your answer by reference to the results.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) (i) Using the results for 100 cm3 of water, calculate the average rate of cooling x1 for the
first 90 s of the experiment. Use the readings from the table and the equation
θ0 – θ90
x1 = ,
t
where t = 90 s and θ0 and θ90 are the temperatures at time 0 and at time 90 s.
x1 = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Using the results for 100 cm3 of water, calculate the average rate of cooling x2 in the last
90 s of the experiment. Use the readings from the table and the equation
θ90 – θ180
x2 = ,
t
where t = 90 s and θ90 and θ180 are the temperatures at time 90 s and at time 180 s.
x2 = ............................................................[1]

10
(e) A student suggests that it is important that the experiments with the two volumes of water
should have the same starting temperatures.
State whether your values for x1 and x2 support this suggestion. Justify your statement with
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(f) Another student plans to investigate whether more thermal energy is lost from the water
surface than from the sides of the beakers.
Describe an experiment that could be done to investigate this.
You may draw a diagram to help your description.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/F/M/18

11
3 A student is investigating a circuit containing different lamps.

She is using the circuit shown in Fig. 3.1.
power supply
X Y
Fig. 3.1
(a) On Fig. 3.1, draw a voltmeter connected so that it measures the potential difference (p.d.)
across lamp X.
[1]
(b) The student uses the ammeter to measure the current in the circuit.
0.4 0.6
0.2 0.8
0 1.0
Fig. 3.2
Record the current IS in the circuit, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
IS = ............................................................[1]

12
(c) (i) The student uses the voltmeter to measure the p.d. VX across lamp X and then
reconnects the voltmeter to measure the p.d. VY across lamp Y.
2 3 2 3
1 4 1 4
0 5 0 5
V V
Fig. 3.3 Fig. 3.4
Record the value of the p.d. VX across lamp X, shown in Fig. 3.3.
VX = ...............................................................
Record the value of the p.d. VY across lamp Y, shown in Fig. 3.4.
VY = ...............................................................
[1]
(ii) She then measures the p.d. VS across both lamps in series.
2 3
1 4
0 5
Fig. 3.5
Record the value of the p.d. VS across both lamps in series, shown in Fig. 3.5.
VS = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/F/M/18

13
(iii) A student suggests that VS should be equal to (VX + VY).

State whether the readings support this suggestion. Justify your statement with reference
to the results.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
justification ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Calculate the resistance R1 of lamp X. Use the readings from (b) and (c)(i) and the
V
equation R1 = X .
IS
R1 = ...................................................... Ω [1]
(e) (i) The circuit components are to be rearranged so that
• lamps X and Y are connected in parallel

• the ammeter measures the current in lamp X only
• the voltmeter measures the p.d. across the lamps.
Draw a circuit diagram of this arrangement.
[2]

14
(ii) The student sets up the circuit as described in (e)(i).
She measures and records the current in lamp X and the p.d. across the lamps.
She then calculates a new resistance R2 for lamp X in this parallel circuit.
8.3 Ω
R2 = ...............................................................
The student notices that lamp X is very bright in this parallel circuit, but it was dim in the
series circuit in (a).
Suggest how temperature affects the resistance of a lamp.

Justify your suggestion by reference to the value of R1 from (d) and the value of R2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/F/M/18

15
4 A student is investigating the factors that affect the size of the crater (hole) a ball makes when it is
dropped into sand.
Plan an experiment which would enable you to investigate one factor which might affect the size
of the crater.
The apparatus available includes
metal balls of different sizes

a tray of sand
In your plan you should:
• state which factor is being investigated,
• state the key variables that you would control,
• list any additional apparatus needed,
• explain briefly how you would carry out the experiment including what would be measured
and how this would be done,
• state the precautions which should be taken to obtain reliable results,
• suggest a suitable graph which could be drawn from the results.
You may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................

16
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/F/M/18

PHYSICS 0625/51
Paper 5 Practical Test May/June 2018
* 6 1 7 2 0 0 1 2 4 9 *
e-mail info@cie.org.uk
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
DC (ST/CT) 150766/3
2
The Supervisor is not allowed to consult the Question Paper before the examination. The teacher
question 4.
The purpose of the Practical Physics Test is to find out whether the candidates can carry out simple
(iii) A report must be made of any assistance given to a candidate, with the name and candidate
© UCLES 2018 0625/51/CI/M/J/18

3
Question 1
(i) Clamp, boss and stand.
(ii) Pendulum bob attached to approximately 110 cm of thin inextensible string.
(iii) Metre rule.
(iv) Stopclock or stopwatch with a minimum precision of 0.1 s. Candidates may use their own
wristwatch if suitable.
(v) Split cork or similar device to hold the string of the pendulum between the jaws of the clamp.
Notes
1. The pendulum should be set up for the candidates with length approximately 60 cm from the
bottom of the split cork to the bottom of the pendulum bob.
2. Candidates must be able easily to adjust the length of the pendulum up to a length of 100 cm. The
pendulum must be able to swing freely at this length.
3. It may be necessary to increase the stability of the clamp stand (for example, using a G-clamp or
by placing a weight on the base).
Arrange the pendulum as described in Note 1.
© UCLES 2018 0625/51/CI/M/J/18 [Turn over

4
Question 2
(i) Power supply of approximately 1.5 V – 3 V. Where candidates are provided with a power
supply with a variable output voltage, the voltage must be set by the Supervisor and fixed
(e.g. taped). See note 2.
(ii) Three resistors of nominal value 4.7 Ω with a power rating of at least 2 W. See note 3.
(iv) Ammeter capable of reading up to 1.00 A with a resolution of at least 0.05 A. See note 4.
(v) Voltmeter capable of measuring the supply p.d. with a resolution of at least 0.1 V. See note 4.
(vi) Sufficient connecting leads to construct the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1.
Notes
1. The circuit is to be connected by the Supervisor as shown in Fig. 2.1.
power supply
R1 R2 R3
Fig. 2.1
2. If cells are to be used, they must remain adequately charged throughout the examination. Spare
cells must be available.
3. The resistors must be labelled R1, R2 and R3. The values of resistance must not be visible to the
candidates. The resistors must have suitable terminals so that candidates are able easily and
quickly to rearrange the circuit.
4. Either analogue or digital meters are suitable. Any variable settings must be set by the Supervisor
and fixed (e.g. taped). Spare meters should be available.
Set up the circuit so that it is arranged as shown in Fig. 2.1.

Check that the circuit works. Switch off.
© UCLES 2018 0625/51/CI/M/J/18

5
Question 3
(i) Converging lens, focal length between 14 cm and 16 cm, with a suitable holder.
(ii) Illuminated object with a triangular hole of height 1.5 cm (see Figs. 3.1 and 3.2). The hole is to
be covered with thin translucent paper (e.g. tracing paper). See notes 1 and 2.
(iii) Metre rule, calibrated in mm.
card
translucent paper card
card
lamp
1.5 cm
support
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2 Fig. 3.3
Notes
power, with a suitable power supply.
2. The centre of the triangular hole, the lamp filament and the centre of the lens in its holder are all to
be at the same height above the bench.
Check that the apparatus is ready for the next candidate. The apparatus should not be left as arranged
by a previous candidate.
Question 4

6
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/51/CI/M/J/18

7
0625/51
General
in the scripts;

8
CENTRE NO. ..........................................................................................................................................
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
Declaration (to be signed by the Supervisor).
the examination.
SIGNED ......................................................
Supervisor
© UCLES 2018 0625/51/CI/M/J/18

PHYSICS 0625/52
* 0 5 3 9 9 5 8 1 9 1 *
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
DC (LEG/CGW) 150764/1
2
The order in which a given candidate attempts the four questions is immaterial. It is suggested
that candidates spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3 and about 15 minutes on
question 4.
The purpose of the Practical Physics Test is to find out whether the candidates can carry out simple
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/CI/M/J/18

3
Question 1
(i) Plastic or polystyrene drinks cup with a volume of approximately 180 cm3 – 250 cm3.
(ii) 30 cm ruler graduated in mm. Candidates may use their own.
(iv) A beaker containing approximately 200 cm3 of water at room temperature. See note 1.
(v) Top-pan balance capable of measuring masses up to 200 g to the nearest gram. A balance
may be shared between several candidates but the balance must be situated so that it is
easily accessible to them.
(vi) Supply of paper towels to mop up any spills of water.
Notes
1. The beaker must be labelled ‘W’.
Refill the beaker W.
Empty the measuring cylinder and plastic cup.
Replace the plastic cup, if necessary.

4
Question 2
(i) Thermometer, –10 °C to 110 °C, graduated in 1°C intervals.
(ii) 250 cm3 beaker.
(iv) Stopclock, stopwatch or wall-mounted clock showing seconds. Candidates may use their own
wristwatch if suitable. The question will refer to a stopclock.
(v) Supply of hot water. See notes 1 and 2.
(vi) Clamp, boss and stand. See note 3.
(vii) Supply of paper towels to mop up any spills of water.
Notes
1. The hot water is to be supplied for each candidate by the Supervisor. The water should be
maintained at a temperature as hot as is reasonably and safely possible. Each candidate will
require about 300 cm3 of hot water.
2. Candidates should be warned of the dangers of burns or scalds when using very hot water.
3. The clamp, boss and stand must be set up for the candidates with the thermometer held in the
clamp. The candidates must be able to read temperatures up to 100 °C.
thermometer
Fig. 2.1
Empty the beaker and measuring cylinder.
Check the supply of hot water.
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/CI/M/J/18

5
Question 3
(i) Converging lens, focal length between 14 cm and 16 cm, with a suitable holder.
(ii) Illuminated object with a triangular hole of height 1.5 cm to 2.0 cm (see Figs. 3.1 and 3.2). The
hole is to be covered with thin translucent paper (e.g. tracing paper). See notes 1 and 2.
(iii) Metre rule calibrated in mm.
translucent paper card card card

lamp
1.5 cm
to 2.0 cm support
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2 Fig. 3.3
Notes
power, with a suitable power supply.
Question 4

6
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/CI/M/J/18

7
0625/52
General
in the scripts;

8
CENTRE NO. ..........................................................................................................................................
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
the examination.
SIGNED .......................................................................
Supervisor
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/CI/M/J/18

PHYSICS 0625/53
* 1 9 3 0 7 6 6 0 5 7 *
e-mail info@cie.org.uk
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
DC (ST) 150762/3
2
The Supervisor is not allowed to consult the Question Paper before the examination. The teacher
question 4.
(iii) A report must be made of any assistance given to a candidate, with the name and candidate
© UCLES 2018 0625/53/CI/M/J/18

3
Question 1
(i) 250 cm3 beaker. See notes 1 and 3.
(ii) Two lids to fit the beaker, labelled A and B. See note 2.
(iii) Thermometer: –10 °C to 110 °C, graduated in 1 °C intervals. See note 1.
(iv) Clamp, boss and stand. See note 1.
(vi) Supply of hot water. See notes 4 and 5.
(vii) Paper towels to soak up any water spillages.
Notes
1. The thermometer, clamp, boss and stand are to be set up for candidates as shown in Fig. 1.1. The
thermometer bulb must be well below the 100 cm3 level of the beaker.
Candidates must be able easily and safely to read temperatures up to 100 °C and to move the
thermometer in and out of the beaker.
thermometer
beaker
Fig. 1.1

4
2. Thin cardboard is a suitable material for the lids.

Lid A and lid B must be cut to shape as shown in Fig. 1.2 and Fig. 1.3. They must each be stable
when partly covering the beaker as shown.
lid A lid B
beaker beaker
Fig. 1.2 Fig. 1.3
3. If the beaker does not have volume markings, the 100 cm3 level must be indicated.
will require about 250 cm3 of hot water in total.
They must be able to pour hot water into the beakers safely. Candidates will need to dispose of
hot water during the experiment.
5. Candidates should be warned of the dangers of burns and scalds when using very hot water.
Empty the water from the beaker. Check that the apparatus is intact and is arranged as in Fig. 1.1.
Spare lids, labelled A and B, must be available.
© UCLES 2018 0625/53/CI/M/J/18

5
Question 2
(i) One 2 W resistor approximately 2 Ω, labelled ‘fixed resistor’. See note 2.
(ii) Three 2 W resistors, approximately 1 Ω, 3 Ω and 10 Ω, labelled X, Y and Z respectively. See

notes 1 and 2.
(iii) Power supply of approximately 2 V – 3 V. See note 3.

(iv) Switch. The switch may be an integral part of the power supply.
(v) Sufficient connecting leads to set up the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1.
(vi) Ammeter capable of measuring currents up to 1.00 A with a resolution of at least 0.05 A . See
note 4.
(vii) Voltmeter capable of measuring up to 3.0 V with a resolution of at least 0.1 V . See note 4.
Notes
1. These resistors must have suitable terminals so that candidates are able easily and quickly to
connect X, Y and Z into the circuit.
2. The circuit is to be set up for candidates as shown in Fig. 2.1. The fixed resistor is to remain in the
circuit during the experiment.
fixed resistor
power supply
Fig. 2.1
must be available.
4. Either analogue or digital meters are suitable. Any variable settings should be set by the Supervisor
and fixed, e.g. taped. Spare meters should be available.
Connect the circuit as shown in Fig. 2.1. Ensure that resistor X is connected in the circuit. Check that
the circuit is working.
6
Question 3
(i) Converging lens of focal length between 14 cm and 16 cm with a suitable holder.
(ii) Metre rule calibrated in mm.
(iii) Illuminated object consisting of rigid card with a triangular hole of height 1.5 cm to 2.0 cm (see
Fig. 3.1). The hole is to be covered with thin translucent paper (e.g. tracing paper) secured
with adhesive tape. See note 1.
(iv) Plain white screen. A white sheet of stiff card approximately 150 mm × 150 mm, fixed to a
wooden support, is suitable (see Fig. 3.2).
(v) 50 cm or 30 cm ruler, graduated in mm. Candidates may use their own.
Notes
1. The lamp used for the illuminated object should be low voltage, 24 W or greater, with a suitable
power supply.
2. The lamp filament, the centre of the hole which forms the object and the centre of the lens in its
holder must all be the same height above the bench.
3. The apparatus should be situated away from direct sunlight.
adhesive tape
card
1.5 cm – 2.0 cm
support
translucent paper
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2
Check that the apparatus is intact and that the lamp is working.
Replace or re-cover the screen if it has been marked.
Switch off.
Question 4
© UCLES 2018 0625/53/CI/M/J/18

7
0625/53
General
in the scripts;

8
CENTRE NO. ..........................................................................................................................................
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
the examination.
SIGNED ......................................................
Supervisor
© UCLES 2018 0625/53/CI/M/J/18

Grade thresholds – June 2018
Cambridge IGCSE™ Physics (0625)

Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0625 (Physics) in the June 2018 examination.

maximum raw
mark A B C D E F G
available
Component 11 40 – – 23 20 17 15 13
Component 12 40 – – 25 21 17 15 13
Component 13 40 – – 24 21 18 15 12
Component 21 40 27 23 20 18 16 14 12
Component 22 40 28 24 20 18 16 13 10
Component 23 40 28 25 22 19 16 13 10
Component 31 80 – – 47 40 33 26 19
Component 32 80 – – 41 35 28 20 12
Component 33 80 – – 43 35 26 19 12
Component 41 80 46 34 22 19 16 13 10
Component 42 80 50 39 29 23 18 14 10
Component 43 80 44 33 23 19 14 10 6
Component 51 40 25 22 19 16 14 11 8
Component 52 40 28 25 23 20 17 14 11
Component 53 40 26 23 20 17 15 12 9
Component 61 40 28 24 21 18 16 12 8
Component 62 40 28 25 22 19 16 13 10
Component 63 40 25 21 18 15 13 10 7
Combination of
Components
BX 21, 41, 51 143 121 99 77 67 58 48 38
BY 22, 42, 52 152 131 110 89 76 64 51 38
BZ 23, 43, 53 141 121 101 82 69 57 44 31
CX 21, 41, 61 147 124 101 79 69 60 49 38
Grade thresholds continued
Combination of
Components
CY 22, 42, 62 153 131 109 88 75 63 50 37
CZ 23, 43, 63 140 120 100 80 67 55 42 29
FX 11, 31, 51 – – – 112 96 81 66 51
FY 12, 32, 52 – – – 112 95 78 62 46
FZ 13, 33, 53 – – – 110 92 75 58 41
GX 11, 31, 61 – – – 114 98 83 67 51
GY 12, 32, 62 – – – 111 94 77 61 45
GZ 13, 33, 63 – – – 108 90 73 56 39
PHYSICS 0625/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core) May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and
some Cambridge O Level components.
IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.

0625/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
1 A 1
2 D 1
3 C 1
4 B 1
5 D 1
6 C 1
7 A 1
8 B 1
9 D 1
10 D 1
11 A 1
12 C 1
13 D 1
14 C 1
15 A 1
16 C 1
17 B 1
18 B 1
19 B 1
20 B 1
21 A 1
22 B 1
23 A 1
24 A 1
25 B 1
26 D 1
27 C 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED
29 A 1
30 C 1
31 C 1
32 D 1
33 D 1
34 B 1
35 C 1
36 C 1
37 D 1
38 D 1
39 C 1
40 C 1

PHYSICS 0625/12
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
1 A 1
2 B 1
3 C 1
4 C 1
5 D 1
6 A 1
7 B 1
8 B 1
9 D 1
10 D 1
11 C 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 D 1
15 D 1
16 B 1
17 B 1
18 D 1
19 B 1
20 B 1
21 C 1
22 A 1
23 C 1
24 B 1
25 D 1
26 C 1
27 B 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 D 1
31 D 1
32 D 1
33 B 1
34 A 1
35 A 1
36 C 1
37 D 1
38 B 1
39 A 1
40 B 1

PHYSICS 0625/13
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
1 A 1
2 D 1
3 C 1
4 B 1
5 B 1
6 B 1
7 D 1
8 B 1
9 C 1
10 B 1
11 A 1
12 D 1
13 B 1
14 B 1
15 B 1
16 C 1
17 B 1
18 C 1
19 B 1
20 D 1
21 A 1
22 A 1
23 B 1
24 C 1
25 D 1
26 C 1
27 B 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 B 1
31 B 1
32 D 1
33 B 1
34 C 1
35 B 1
36 C 1
37 D 1
38 C 1
39 A 1
40 B 1

PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
1 A 1
2 C 1
3 D 1
4 B 1
5 A 1
6 A 1
7 B 1
8 B 1
9 C 1
10 C 1
11 C 1
12 C 1
13 D 1
14 D 1
15 B 1
16 B 1
17 C 1
18 B 1
19 D 1
20 B 1
21 A 1
22 D 1
23 A 1
24 D 1
25 C 1
26 B 1
27 C 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED
29 D 1
30 B 1
31 D 1
32 B 1
33 B 1
34 C 1
35 A 1
36 A 1
37 D 1
38 D 1
39 C 1
40 A 1

PHYSICS 0625/22
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
1 A 1
2 C 1
3 B 1
4 C 1
5 D 1
6 C 1
7 D 1
8 B 1
9 C 1
10 D 1
11 D 1
12 C 1
13 B 1
14 D 1
15 B 1
16 B 1
17 B 1
18 D 1
19 B 1
20 D 1
21 A 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 D 1
25 C 1
26 B 1
27 B 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED
29 D 1
30 B 1
31 D 1
32 B 1
33 D 1
34 A 1
35 A 1
36 A 1
37 D 1
38 D 1
39 A 1
40 A 1

PHYSICS 0625/23
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
1 A 1
2 C 1
3 A 1
4 B 1
5 A 1
6 A 1
7 B 1
8 D 1
9 B 1
10 B 1
11 B 1
12 D 1
13 B 1
14 D 1
15 B 1
16 C 1
17 B 1
18 B 1
19 B 1
20 D 1
21 A 1
22 A 1
23 D 1
24 B 1
25 C 1
26 D 1
27 D 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 C 1
31 D 1
32 B 1
33 A 1
34 C 1
35 C 1
36 C 1
37 D 1
38 C 1
39 D 1
40 A 1

PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Core Theory May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a) 72 (s) 1
1(b) (average speed =) distance ÷ time 1
120 ÷ 54 1
2.2(2) (m / s) 1
1(c) area under line OR three areas indicated OR (dist =) (av.) speed × time OR 1/2 (b + h) × L 1
1 1
× 3.5 × 4.0 OR 7 (m) seen OR 6 × 3.5 OR 21 (m)
2
1 1
6 × 3.5 OR 21 (m) AND { × 3.5 × 4.0 OR 7 (m)} OR 14 (m)
2
(21 + 14 =) 35 (m) 1
2(a)(i) measure mass of empty measuring cylinder/beaker 5

add measured/fixed volume of liquid
measure mass of measuring cylinder/beaker and liquid
determine mass of liquid (by subtracting mass empty from mass when full)
use of D = M/V
2(a)(ii) g / cm3 OR kg / m3 1
2(b)(i) (polythene is) less dense (than water) 1
2(b)(ii) W = m × g in any form OR (m =) W ÷ g OR 100 g weighs 1 N 1
0.84 ÷ 10 OR 100 (g) × 0.84 1
0.084 (kg) OR 84 g 1

PUBLISHED
3(a) 43.0 + 2.4 = 45.4 (N) 1
(74.2 – 45.4 =) 28.8 (N) 1
upwards 1
3(b) 1
4(a) Any four from: 4

specs/dots (of light)
(smoke/air particles) moving
(smoke/air particles) randomly
(because fast moving ) air molecules collide with smoke particles
(producing)Brownian motion
4(b) evaporate/evaporation 1
high(er) energy/enough energy/fast(er) moving molecules OR molecules with great(er) KE 1
escape (from the water surface) 1

PUBLISHED
5(a) Q 3
S
P
R
5(b) any one advantage from: 2

continuous supply/steady supply or reverse argument
any one disadvantage from:

only available in certain areas/thin crust/near geysers or can damage water table OR limited lifespan/rocks can cool
6(a) (26 – 23 =) 3(°C) 1
6(b) any three from: 3

use metal pipe
paint black or use black pipe
use matt or dull (paint)
(place) reflector behind pipe
use long(er) pipe
use pipe with great(er) surface area
slow(er) flow rate
(place) glass/(clear) plastic cover over pipe
6(c) infra-red (radiation through space/air) 1
conduction through pipe 1

PUBLISHED
7(a)(i) blue between indigo and green 1
yellow between green and orange 1
7(a)(ii) arrow pointing right 1
7(b)(i) ray(s) refracted down at first boundary (air/glass) 1
correct refraction for candidate’s ray (in glass prism) 1
7(b)(ii) refraction 1
8(a)(i) tape measure 1
8(a)(ii) reflection (of sound) 1
8(b) time for sound to travel to wall and back = 1.0 s 1
340 m in 1.0 s 1
(speed =) 340 1
m/s 1

PUBLISHED
9(a)(i) X-rays between gamma rays and ultraviolet 1
microwaves between infra-red and radio 1
9(a)(ii) ring drawn around radio on Fig.9.1 1
9(b) any two from: 2

lead/metal apron
(use long) tongs
limit (time of) exposure
point source away (from you) owtte
10(a) resistor identified 1
10(b) quantity unit 2

current NOT amps ignore ammeter A/amps/amperes
quantity unit 2
potential difference or p.d. or emf V/volts ignore voltmeter
10(c) increasing (length) increases resistance owtte 1
increasing (diameter) decreases resistance owtte 1

PUBLISHED
11(a)(i) cell and switch connected in series with any part of conductor (on Fig.11.1) 1
correct symbols used – (on Fig.11.1) 1
11(a)(ii) circular 1
around conductor/wire 1
11(a)(iii) no change/nothing 1
11(b) conductor/wire between the poles of a magnet 1
opposite poles facing each other 1
current in wire 1
wire moves/Flemings left hand rule indicated 1
12(a)(i) α or alpha 1
12(a)(ii) α or alpha 1
12(b)(i) beta or β 1
beta emission would be affected by the thickness of the metal owtte 1
12(b)(ii) (counter) reading higher 1
12(b)(iii) rollers move apart/provide less force/pressure owtte 1
12(b)(iv) 38 1

PHYSICS 0625/32
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a) 3
1 mark for each correct line. 2 or more lines from any section loses the mark.
1(b) (distance travelled) = area under graph OR ½ × base × height 1
½ × 40 × 20 1
400 (m) 1
1(c) 1st section/WX/from 0 s to 30 s has greater gradient than last (section)/YZ/from 60 s to 100 s 1

PUBLISHED
2(a) (W =) m × g 1
650 × 8 1
5200 (N) 1
2(b)(i) (volume of log =) 3 × 0.04 = 0.12 (m3) 1
D = M / V OR (D =) M / V 1
550 (kg / m3) 1
2(b)(ii) The density of logs is less than density of water owtte. 1
3(a)(i) (moment =) force × distance 1
150 × 0.5 1
75 1
Nm 1
3(a)(ii) accept any example involving turning forces 1
3(b) increase distance (of force from pivot point ) 1

PUBLISHED
4(a)(i) 38 (°C) 1
4(a)(ii) 2nd box ticked i.e. expansion of liquid 1
4(b) conduction 1
4(c) any three from: 3

water is a fluid
water molecules gain (kinetic) energy/move faster/further apart
water expands/volume increases
warm/hot water or molecules rises
convection (current created)
cooler/cold/water falls/sinks (to be heated again)
correct reference to density change of water 1
5(a) (focal length =) 5 (cm) 1
5(b)(i) straight line through F and then parallel to PA from centre of lens 1
5(b)(ii) straight line from top of object through centre of lens 1
5(b)(iii) image indicated at point where rays cross 1
arrow drawn inverted on RHS of lens 1

PUBLISHED
6(a) (thermal energy is used) to produce steam 1
steam turns a turbine 1
(turbine) turns a generator 1

radioactive material/waste produced
problems storing waste
long half-life of waste/fission products
(accidental) leak of nuclear/radioactive material
7(a)(i) microwaves 1
7(a)(ii) 3.0 × 108 (m / s) 1
7(a)(iii) ultraviolet or X-rays or gamma/γ-rays 1
7(b)(i) X-rays any one from: detecting broken bones/damaged teeth or detecting/treating cancer 1
gamma: any one from: detecting/treating cancer or sterilising (hospital) equipment/food 1
7(b)(ii) any two from: 2

ionising radiations/high frequency/high energy (e-m radiation)
(may) damage or mutate cells/DNA
(may) cause radiation burns

PUBLISHED
8(a)(i) vibrates 1
8(a)(ii) longitudinal 1
8(a)(iii) vacuum 1
8(b)(i) 1000 (Hz) 1
8(b)(ii) frequency in range 10 001 to 30 000 (Hz) 1
8(b)(iii) lowest frequency heard by humans is 20 Hz 1
(but) elephants can hear frequencies below 20 Hz 1
8(b)(iv) ultrasound 1
9(a)(i) top box (electrons) ticked 1
9(a)(ii) 12 + 6 seen or 18 (Ω) 1
9(a)(iii) (V =) I × R 1
(V =) 0.50 × 18(.0) 1
(V =) 9.0 (V) ecf from (a)(ii) 1
9(b) (reading/current) increases 1
(because effective circuit) resistance decreases/resistors in parallel have less resistance 1

PUBLISHED
10(a)(i) second box (The balloon loses electrons) ticked 1
10(a)(ii) positive (charge) 1
like charge(s) repel 1
10(b) circle around copper AND silver 1
11(a)(i) (Q is the) secondary/output (coil) 1
11(a)(ii) 1. (soft–) iron 1
2. core 1
11(a)(iii) magnetic field OR e.m.f. OR magnet 1
changing OR alternating 1
11(a)(iv) EITHER 1
more AND step-down
OR
fewer AND step-up

smaller current (in wires)
smaller drop in p.d./voltage (across cables)
smaller heating effect
less energy wasted/more efficient
thinner cables can be used
fewer pylons neededl
(electricity) can be transmitted over long(er) distances

PUBLISHED
12(a) 3
1 mark for each correct line. 2 or more lines from any section loses the mark.
12(b)(i) 18 / 6 or 3 half lives seen or implied 1
1 / 8 or division by 8 1
1.5 (mg) 1
12(b)(ii) any two from: 2

high energy/fast-moving
electron/negatively charged particle
about 2000 times smaller than a proton/neutron
12(b)(iii) any one from: 1

new element formed
neutron becomes/turns into a proton
Z/proton number increases by one
neutron number decreases by one

PHYSICS 0625/33
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a) 2 : 33 : 65 – 1 : 22 : 15 OR 153.65 – 82.15 1
71.50 (s) 1
1(b) 4 × 20 OR 4000 × 20 1
(average speed =) distance ÷ time 1
80 000 ÷ 1600 1
50 (m / s) 1
1(c)(i) (section) P or from 0 s to 2.5 s 1
(line has) greatest gradient 1
1(c)(ii) dist travelled = area under graph OR ½ × b × h 1
½ × 2.5 × 40 1
50 (m) 1

PUBLISHED
2(a) W = m × g 1
50 ÷ 1000 OR 0.05 seen 1
0.5 (N) 1
2(b) any 4 from: 4

fix ruler vertically
add weight/hanger to spring
fix pin (horizontally) to (top/bottom) of weight hanger
pin arranged so near ruler scale
ensure load stationary
eye level with pin to take reading (of length)
determine extension for given load
repeat for different loads
3(a)(i) (D =) m ÷ v in any form 1
120 ÷ 16.0 1
7.50 (g / cm3) 1
3(a)(ii) 10 (m / s2) 1
3(b)(i) (downward force) weight AND (upward force) air resistance/friction/drag 1
3(b)(ii) (1.2 – 0.3 =) 0.9 (N) 1

PUBLISHED
4 moment = force × (perp.) distance (from pivot/bracket) 1
25 × 90 or 25 × 0.9 1
2250 or 22.5 1
N cm or N m 1
5(a) P = F ÷ A OR (F =) P × A in any form 1
20 000 × 0.009 1
1800 (N) 1
5(b) pressure increases 1
any two from: 2

molecules move faster/have more ke
collide harder/more often (with walls of can)
(change in momentum due to) collisions impart(s) force on can walls

PUBLISHED
6(a)(i) 80 – 56 OR 24(°C) 1
6(a)(ii) 20 – 18 or 2(°C) 1
6(b) water hotter (at start) 1
(so) greater temperature difference (between can and surroundings) 1
6(c) (dull) black 1
greater (rate of) loss of thermal energy (from dark colours) 1

OR
black or it is better radiator/emitter (of thermal energy)
7(a) (part A) radio 1
(part B) visible/light 1
7(b) transverse 1
7(c)(i) IR/infra-red 1
7(c)(ii) gamma OR γ OR X-rays OR ultraviolet 1

PUBLISHED
8(a)(i) Longitudinal 1
8(a)(ii) Amplitude 1
8(a)(iii) pitch 1
8(b) frequencies (of sound) 1
above 20 000 Hz 1
9(a) Any two from: 2

pole of magnet placed on/near steel rod
magnet stroked along rod owtte
repeat strokes
same direction
9(b) place pole of rod next to a known magnet 1
like poles repel 1
9(c) accept iron loses magnetism easily owtte or reverse argument 1

PUBLISHED
10(a)(i) variable resistor 1
change the current 1
10(a)(ii) Any three from: 3

use low value of current
measure (and record) current
measure (and record) voltage
repeat other values (of I and V)
plot graph of pd against current (and find gradient) OR use V = I × R
10(b)(i) V = I × R in any form OR (I =) V ÷ R 1
240 ÷ 21.8 1
11.0 (A) 1
10(b)(ii) Answer in range 12 to 15 (A) 1

PUBLISHED
11(a) Correctly-drawn magnetic field around coil 1
lines to start and end near coil/tube 1
field line arrows point towards left hand of coil 1
11(b) electromagnet 1
11(c) (when switch S1 is closed there is a) current in the coil (of wire) 1
(soft) iron (core) becomes magnetised/magnetic field created 1
soft iron armature attracted (to core) 1
contacts/A and B close/(motor) circuit completed/current in motor circuit 1
12(a) neutron 1
electron 1
12(b) upper row: 2 in both 1
lower row: 1 in left box AND 3 in right box 1
12(c)(i) weak(ly) penetrating 1
12(c)(ii) Any two from: 2

absorbed over a short distance
large mass
high charge
highly ionising
cause cell mutation/damage DNA
(high risk) of developing cancer

PHYSICS 0625/41
Paper 4 Extended Theory May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a) Mention of gradient of graph at t = 30 s OR tangent drawn at t = 30 s and triangle drawn 1
Acceleration in range 0.30 to 0.45 m / s2 1
1(b) Acceleration less/at a slower rate 1
Less driving force OR greater resistive force/friction/air resistance/drag 1
Resultant force less 1
1(c) Area under graph 1
Distance = (20 × 40) + (½ × 40 × 10) OR ½ × (30 + 20) × 40 1
1000 m 1
2(a) Chemical (potential energy) 1
2(b)(i) (E =) m × g × h OR 32 × 10 × 2.5 1
800 J 1
2(b)(ii) Output power = E ÷ t OR 800 ÷ 5.4 OR 148.148 (W) 1
Eff. = output (power) ÷ input (power) OR Pout ÷ Pin OR Eout ÷ Ein OR output power ÷ 0.65 OR 148.148 ÷ 0.65 OR 800 ÷ 0.65 1
= 230 W 1
2(c) Advantage: not dependent on weather/wind blowing OR always available 1
Disadvantage: polluting OR CO2/SO2/greenhouse gases emitted OR leads to global warming OR oil must be transported 1
OR not renewable OR oil will run out/be used up

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) W = (4.8 × 10 =) 48 N 1
3(a)(ii) (P = ) F ÷ A OR 48 ÷ (0.12 × 0.16) 1
2500 Pa 1
3(b) Atmospheric pressure (in addition to liquid pressure) 1
3(c) P = hdg or in words OR (d =) P ÷ hg OR 2500 ÷ (0.32 × 10) 1
780 kg / m3 1
OR d = M ÷ V = 4.8 ÷ (0.12 × 0.16 × 0.32) (1)
780 kg / m3 (1)
4(a)(i) (Molecules) vibrate 1
4(a)(ii) random/haphazard/in all directions 1
Any one of: 1

with high speed
freely
zig-zag
in straight lines
4(b) (Molecules) collide with walls (of box) OR (Molecules) rebound from walls (of box) 1
Change of momentum (occurs) 1
force (on walls) = (total) change of momentum per second 1
Pressure = (total) force ÷ (total) area (of walls) 1

PUBLISHED
5(a)(i) Refraction OR reflection 1
5(a)(ii) If refraction in (i) 1

Change or increase or decrease in speed of wave OR change of refractive index OR
If reflection in (i) (1)

Mention of surface or boundary
5(b)(i) 2 points both labelled F at 3.5 cm either side of optical centre of lens 1
5(b)(ii) Any two of: 2

Paraxial ray from tip of O refracted through farther F/3.5 cm
Undeviated ray from tip of O through optical centre of lens
Ray from tip of O through nearer F refracted paraxially
Image/I drawn from intersection of rays to principal axis with indication that image is inverted 1
5(b)(iii) In range 3.6 to 4.1 cm 1
5(b)(iv) (Image is) real and light passes through it OR can be projected/seen on a screen OR refracted rays cross/meet 1

PUBLISHED
6(a)(i) At least 3 circular wavefronts centred on gap extending to at least half of semicircle 1
Same spacing as incident wavefronts 1
6(a)(ii) At least 3 straight, parallel, wavefronts, approximately same length as width of gap 1
Ends of straight lines curving towards but not reaching barrier 1
6(b) Any four of: 4

Diagram to show: labelled barrier, incident straight or curved waves
Diagram shows appropriately reflected waves
Water surface e.g. tank of water/ripple tank/pond/acceptable alternative
How waves are produced: e.g., moving end or length of solid rod dipping into surface OR small solid object thrown in.
Detail of barrier: made of metal, glass or wood fixed in position
How observed: by eye, video, film, stroboscope
7(a) (Metals) contain free/mobile electrons/delocalised electrons 1
7(b)(i) R α L and R α 1 ÷ A OR R α L ÷ A OR R = 16 × ½ ÷ 2 OR R = 16 ÷ 4 1
4.0 Ω 1
7(b)(ii) 1 ÷ R = (1 ÷ R1) + (1 ÷ R2) OR R = (R1 × R2) ÷ (R1 + R2) OR (1 ÷ R) = (1 ÷ 4) + (1 ÷ 16) OR (4 × 16) ÷ (4 + 16) 1
3.2 Ω 1
7(c)(i) 3E or 3 × E 1
7(c)(ii) IB > I2 > I1 (6th box ticked) 1

PUBLISHED
8(a) (Q =) mc∆θ OR 200 × 4.2 × 22 1
18000 J 1
8(b) Q = m × L OR (L =) Q ÷ m OR 18 480 ÷ 60 1
310 J / g 1
8(c) (Thermal) energy/heat transfers from surroundings OR into water 1
9(a) Would not be effective OR No 1
With current on OR the (alternating) current should not be switched off 1
Magnet should be withdrawn from the coil 1
OR Magnet would be alternately magnetised in different directions (1)
Would remain magnetised in the direction occurring at the moment of switching off (1)
9(b)(i) Coil turns 1
Clockwise/continuously 1
Current (in coil) reverses every half turn/when coil is in vertical position OR force on current in a magnetic field 1
9(b)(ii) 1 × (4 × T) 1
2 × (2 × T) 1
3 × (T ÷ 2) 1

PUBLISHED
10(a) To produce an alternating/changing magnetic field 1
so that current/voltage is induced (continuously) in the secondary coil OR secondary circuit 1
10(b)(i) Ns ÷ Np = Vs ÷ Vp in any form OR (Ns =) Np × Vs ÷ Vp OR 8000 × 6 ÷ 240 1
200 1
10(b)(ii) IpVp = IsVs in any form OR (Ip =) Is × Vs ÷ Vp OR 2.0 × 6 ÷ 240 1
0.050 A 1
10(b)(iii) (Number of lamps =) 2 ÷ 0.05 = 40 1
11(a) Number of protons = 86 and number of electrons = 86 1
Number of neutrons = 136 1
11(b) 218 1
84 Po
4 1
+2 α
11(c) 7.6 days = 2 half-lives or evidence of two halvings 1
(number of Rn atoms left = 6.4 × 106 ÷ 4 =) 1.6 × 106 1
number of α-particles emitted = (6.4 × 106 – 1.6 × 106 =) 4.8 × 106 1

PHYSICS 0625/42
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a)(i) 1 straight line from (0,0) to (10,50) 1
2 gradient/slope 1
1(a)(ii) a= ∆v ÷ ∆t in any form OR (a=) ∆v ÷ ∆t 1

OR (a =) (9–5) ÷ 10 OR 4 ÷ 10
(a =) 0.40 m / s2 1
1(b)(i) straight line down from any point on y-axis to any speed at 100 s 1
from (0,50) to (100,15) 1
1(b)(ii) uses area under graph OR av speed × time 1

OR s=ut + ½ at2 OR v2=u2 + 2as
100 × (50 + 15) ÷ 2 OR 100 × 15 + ½ (100 × 35) 1

OR 5000 – ½ × 0.35 × 1002
3300 m 1

PUBLISHED
2(a) average/overall/combined density (of the metal and air contained) less (than density of sea water) 1
2(b) (P =) h × ρ × g OR (V=) A × l in any form 1
(P= 1.2 × 1020 × 10 =) 12 000 (Pa) OR (V= 0.8 × 1.2 = ) 0.96 (m3) 1
P = F ÷ A OR (F =) P × A OR (W =) V × ρ × g 1
(F = 12240 × 0.80 =) 9800 N OR (F = W = ) 9800 N 1
2(c) same numerical answer as (b) 1
resultant/net (vertical) force = 0 OR downward force = upward force OR forces are balanced 1
3(a) (KE = ) ½ × m × v2 1
(KE = ) ½ × 9500 × 752 1
(KE = ) 2.7 × 107 J 1
3(b) KE = F × l OR (F = )KE ÷ l 1
OR (F =) 2.671875 × 107 × 150
OR v2 – u2 = 2ax OR (a =) v2 – u2 ÷ (2 × x)
OR (a = ) 752 ÷ (2 × 150) = 18.75
(F = ) 1.8 × 105 N 1
OR ((F =) m × a = 9500 × 18.75) = 1.8 × 105 N

PUBLISHED
4(a)(i) atoms drawn close to each other and in rows 1
4(a)(ii) atoms drawn far apart and randomly positioned 1
4(b)(i) (atoms) vibrate/oscillate 1
4(b)(ii) attractive forces between atoms/molecules (in the rock) OR energy/work to separate atoms/molecules 1
force (applied must be large enough) to overcome forces between atoms/molecules OR work/energy (large) enough to 1
separate atoms/molecules
4(c) helium spreads/diffuses/moves freely/collides with air (molecules) 1
the helium atoms travel in all directions/randomly/at high speed 1
OR helium rises (1)
helium has low density OR He atoms high speed (1)
5 diagram shows cans placed near heater 1
put thermometers in water AND observe readings 1
good detail e.g. 1

cans equal distances from heater
same water volumes/levels
thermometers same positions in cans
higher thermometer reading in black (painted) can OR black (surface) good/best/better absorber 1

PUBLISHED
6(a) frequency 35 000 Hz ringed 1
longitudinal ringed 1
6(b) v = f λ OR (λ = ) v ÷ f 1
(λ=) 3 × 108 ÷ 1.3 × 1017 1
(λ =) 2.3 × 10–9 m 1
6(c) X-rays ionising/harmful/dangerous (to humans) 1
Any one from: 1

patient rarely exposed
low total dose on patient
meaningful comment about benefit outweighs danger
dentist frequently exposed
total dose on dentist would be high if stayed in room
6(d) microwaves harmful/dangerous (to humans) 1
microwaves would pass through open door 1

PUBLISHED
7(a) (speed/it) decreases 1
refractive index > 1.0 OR sin (i) > sin (r) 1

OR i > r OR refraction/bends towards normal OR np>nw OR sin (i) ÷ sin (r) = cw ÷ cp
7(b)(i) paraxial ray refracts through F2 1
other ray continues undeviated 1
7(b)(ii) candidate’s rays from (b)(i) traced back to intersection 1
image marked from intersection of candidate’s rays to axis 1
7(b)(iii) in range 2.7 cm to 3.3 cm AND rays converge to the left of the object 1
7(b)(iv) virtual AND light does not pass through image/cannot be projected on to a screen OR object distance < f OR on left of object 1
8(a)(i) variable resistor OR rheostat 1
8(a)(ii) voltmeter symbol correctly connected across 20 Ω resistor 1
8(b) (I = )V ÷ R OR 6.0 ÷ 20 OR (any value < 6.0) ÷ 20 1
correct calculation of I for V>0 accept point on graph with correct co-ordinates, apart from the origin 1
straight line from (0,0) to (6.0,0.30) tolerance within ½ small square 1
8(c)(i) (combined resistance) less (than the resistance of either/smaller resistor) 1
8(c)(ii) steeper OR gradient greater OR description of how the line differs (e.g. reaches 0.40 A before V reaches 6.0 V) 1
ignore 2nd line above 1st line

PUBLISHED
9(a)(i) forces on AB and CD in opposite (vertical) directions 1
9(a)(ii) Column 2 increased by factor 3 Box 6 1
Column 3 increased by factor 3 Box 6 1
Column 4 decreased by factor 2 Box 3 1
9(b)(i) deflects OR shows I/V/p.d. 1
returns to zero 1
9(b)(ii) produces/changes magnetic field 1
S pole at bottom OR magnetic field opposes motion/(magnetic) field of magnet 1
10(a)(i) electrons/–ve charges (in metal) move o.w.t.t.e. to top half/move up 1
10(a)(ii) more –ve charges in top half than bottom OR more +ve charges in bottom half than top 1
NOT if contradiction e.g. more +ve in top and more –ve in top
10(a)(iii) helps (keep plastic sheet in place)/yes 1
unlike charges attract OR attractive force between metal plate and plastic sheet 1
10(b) 1 both threads angled away from other ball 1
2 like/same/positive charges repel 1

PUBLISHED
231
11(a) Th 1
90Th 1
11(b)(i) splitting of a nucleus into (2) parts/light(er)nucleus 1
11(b)(ii) (fission involves production of) ionising radiation OR radiation dangerous/harmful (to humans) 1
(thick concrete walls) absorb/stop the radiation (and so protect workers) 1
11(b)(iii) no CO2/SO2/greenhouse gases/acid rain 1
nuclear waste (disposal) OR leaks of radioactive material OR risk of radiation in case of accident 1
11(c) (52 hours =) 2 half-lives OR evidence of 2 halvings 1
(after 52 hours number of thorium atoms left = 4.8 × 109 ÷ 4 =) 1.2 × 109 1
OR (number of thorium atoms decayed =) ¾ × 4.8 × 109
(number of atoms decayed = 4.8 × 109 – 1.2 × 109 ) = 3.6 × 109 1

PHYSICS 0625/43
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a) tangent on graph OR gradient OR (a =) ∆v ÷ ∆t or (v – u) ÷ t C1
accept gradient increases; not gradient decreases C1
values from tangent or line 13 to 14 m / s2 A1
1(b)(i) gradient changes OR graph is curved B1
1(b)(ii) mass of space rocket decreases OR gravitational field strength decreases B1
1(c) area under graph OR (distance =) average speed × time C1
4550 × 100 OR (4100 + 5000) ÷ 2 × 100 C1
4.5/4.55/4.6 × 105 m A1
2(a)(i) (KE =) ½ × m × v2 C1
½ × 0.020 × 3502 C1
1200 J A1
2(a)(ii) (∆h =) KE ÷ mg OR 1200 ÷ (0.020 × 10) OR 1225 ÷ (0.020 × 10) C1
6000/6100 m A1
2(b)(i) (force of) air resistance acts downwards M1
adds to gravitational force/resultant force increases/deceleration increases/deceleration > g A1
2(b)(ii) (kinetic energy) to gravitational potential energy B1
(kinetic energy) to thermal/internal energy B1

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) (p =) h × ρ × g or 5.0 × 1000 × 10 C1
50 000 (Pa) C1
(total pressure = 50 000 + 1.0 × 105 =) 1.5 × 105 Pa A1
3(a)(ii) 1.5 × 105 Pa B1
3(b) (rises because) density of gas is less than density of OR resultant upward force on bubble B1
(as bubble rises) pressure (of gas in bubble) decreases B1
(volume of bubble increases because) p × V = constant OR V∝ 1 ÷ p B1
4(a) more energetic molecules escape/evaporate B1
less energetic molecules remain B1
average kinetic energy of molecules decreases OR temperature depends on kinetic energy B1
4(b) convection B1
surface/colder water more dense OR contracts B1
(cold water) sinks OR warmer water rises B1
4(c)(i)1 difference between the maximum temperature and minimum temperature it can measure B1
4(c)(i)2 distance moved by the thread per °C OR per unit temperature change B1
4(c)(ii) (range) increases and less expansion/increase in volume (of mercury per unit temperature rise) B1

PUBLISHED
5(a)(i) path shows three or more straight line sections B1
with sudden changes of direction and at least two different lengths B1
5(a)(ii) air molecules travelling in random (directions) B1
collide with the smoke particle B1
5(b) (average) speed of the molecules decreases B1
molecules collide less often (on the piston and the walls of the cylinder) B1
smaller momentum change molecules (on collision) B1
piston now has a greater force on its right-hand side OR pressure less than atmospheric B1
6(a) attempt at compressions and rarefactions B1
at least one compression labelled and at least one rarefaction labelled B1
wavelength and labelled λ B1
6(b)(i) (it/frequency remains) constant B1
6(b)(ii) (it/wavelength) decreases B1
6(c) 320 to 350 m / s B1

PUBLISHED
7(a) one side of wave(front) slows down before the other side B1
wave(front) slews around OR bends at boundary B1
bends towards the normal OR bends towards the side that slows first B1
7(b) (n =) c ÷ v OR (3.0 × 08) ÷ (1.9 × 108) C1
1.6 A1
8(a)(i) straight line from tip of O to tip of I B1
dotted line/lens marked at 3.0 cm from O B1
8(a)(ii) Any one of: B1

paraxial ray from tip of O refracting at lens to tip of I
paraxial ray to I from lens and ray from O to meet it at lens
8(a)(iii) (focal length) in range 2.2 cm to 2.6 cm B1
8(a)(iv) real and light pass through it/projected on to screen/rays converge B1
8(b) (focused rays) set fire to curtain B1

PUBLISHED
9(a) (R =) V ÷ I OR 12 ÷ 0.15 C1
80 Ω A1
9(b)(i) increases B1
9(b)(ii) (voltmeter reading) decreases OR less p.d. across variable resistor B1
more p.d. across 20Ω/fixed resistor B1
9(c)(i) 1.5 J of (electrical) energy supplied in driving charge around the circuit B1
energy per unit charge OR per coulomb B1
9(c)(ii) 8 B1
10(a)(i) there is a reading OR shows I/V/p.d. M1
then returns to zero/centre A1
10(a)(ii) S/south-pole at the right-hand end which attracts the magnet B1
opposes the change (causing the deflection) B1
10(b)(i) (turns ratio or NP ÷ NS =) VP ÷ VS OR 240 ÷ 12 C1
20 OR 20 ÷ 1 OR 20:1 A1
10(b)(ii) diode underlined B1

PUBLISHED
11(a)(i) β(-particles) B1
11(a)(ii) α(-particles) B1
11(a)(iii) γ(-rays) B1
11(b)(i) downward curve B1
11(b)(ii) 3 (half-lives identified) OR 168 ÷ 56 C1
1 ÷ 8 OR 9.0 × 105 (Rn) atoms remain C1
(7.2 × 06 – 9.0 × 105 =) 6.3 × 106 (α-particles emitted) A1

PHYSICS 0625/51
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a)(i) t = 13 to 15 (s) 1
1(a)(ii) T = t / 10 (s) 1
1(a)(iii) T2 correct 1
Unit s2 1
1(a)(iv) g correct calculation from T2 1
1(b)(i) New set of values present with t value greater than (a)(i) 1
1(b)(ii) g in range 8 to 12(m / s2) 1
both g (1(a)(iv) and 1(b)(ii)) values 9 to 11(m / s2) 1
1(c) Use of additional d values OR use a larger d value 1
Count more swings 1
1(d) Any one from: 1

Perpendicular viewing of rule
Counting beginning with zero (owtte)
Use of fiducial mark (owtte)
Use of set-square or horizontal rule to aid measurement of d
Use rule close to/touching the rule
Time taken from centre of swing, (not extremities)

PUBLISHED
2(a)(i) V1 to at least 1 dp and < 4 V 1
I to at least 2 dp and < 1 A 1
2(a)(ii) Correct calculation of R1 1
2(b)(i),(ii) R2 present within 10% of R1 1
2(c)(i),(ii) R3 present and V, A, Ω at least once and not contradicted 1
2(c)(iii) R correct and to 2 or 3 significant figures 1
2(d) Statement matches readings (Expect YES) 1
Justification to include the idea of within the limits of experimental accuracy (but accept beyond limits, if ecf allowed for 1
statement matching readings)
2(e) 3 resistors in parallel 1
Correct variable resistor symbol 1
Other symbols and circuit correct 1

PUBLISHED
3(a) Table:
First u 45 to 51 (cm) and first v 19 to 25 1
u values > v values 1
uv values correct 1
3(b) Graph:
Axes correctly labelled and right way round 1
Suitable scales 1
Good line judgement, single, thin, continuous line 1
3(c) Triangle method clearly shown on graph 1
Triangle using at least half of candidate’s line 1
3(d) Any two from: 2

Finding exact position that gives clearest image
Measuring to centre of lens
Room too bright/lamp too dim

PUBLISHED
4 Method to include: 1
Hot water in copper can, time taken for temperature to drop
Correct use of at least 3 larger outer containers, separately 1
Some indication that size of air gap is measured 1
Any two from: 2

Use of something to cover air gap
Use of lid on copper can
Same starting temperature
Same room temperature
Same volume of hot water
Use of ‘control’ with no outer container
Inner container standing on an insulator
Uniform air gap all round
Table with clear columns for temperature and / or time (to match method) and air-gap, with appropriate units 1
Conclusion: Least temperature drop OR longest time for temperature to drop shows lowest cooling rate OR best insulation 1
OR plot temperature against time and least gradient shows lowest cooling rate (ora)

PUBLISHED
Additional graph notes:
NOTE: The principle to apply here is ‘could I draw a significantly better line, using these points, under examination conditions?’ If the answer is
definitely ‘yes’, do not award the mark.
NOTE: – If candidate’s scale consists of actual readings at equal intervals this will produce a perfect straight line! The only marks available in
this case are the first (axes right way round and labelled) So maximum 1.
– If axes are wrong way round, the other 3 marks are still available.

PHYSICS 0625/52
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a)(i) 2 or more measurements 1
DB correct within ± 2 mm 1
1(a)(ii) DT correct within ± 2 mm 1
1(a)(iii) D correct average 1
1(b)(i) h sensible in cm 1
1(b)(i),(ii) V correct and V / 2 correct 1
1(c)(i) m recorded 1
1(c)(ii) ρ to 2/3 significant figures 1
Answer in range 0.9 to 1.3 1
g / cm3 (or equivalent) 1
1(d) Any one from: 1

part (a)
drawn circle not exact / thickness of rim or cup
part (b)
height is not length of side of cup / D2 increases the inaccuracy in D
part (c)
volume measurements only to nearest 1 or 2 cm3/mass of cup has been ignored

PUBLISHED
2(a) sensible value for θ R with unit 1
2(b) table: correct t values 1
temperatures decreasing 1
2(c) graph:
axes correctly labelled and right way round 1
suitable scales 1
good line judgement, thin, continuous line 1
2(d) horizontal line at θ R correctly positioned 1
2(e) any two from: 2

higher starting temperature
use of metal can instead of beaker
lower room temperature/cold water bath
use of a fan
container with a greater surface area/larger beaker
2(f) any one from: 1

perpendicular viewing of thermometer
wait for thermometer to reach θ MAX before reading
not allow thermometer to touch sides of beaker

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) v1 = 45 to 80 (cm) 1
3(a)(ii) value for f in range 14 to 16 (cm) 1
3(b)(i) v2 = 25 to 35 (cm) 1
3(b)(ii) f2 correct calculation 1
within 10% of f1 1
3(c) f to 2 or 3 significant figures 1
unit seen in (a), (b) or (c) and not contradicted 1
3(d) at least 3 values suggested 1
new values between 20 cm and 70 cm 1

use of darkened room/brighter lamp
mark position of centre of lens on holder
place metre rule on bench/clamp in position)
ensure object and (centre of) lens are same height from the bench
object and lens and screen perpendicular to bench
move screen slowly/back and forth to obtain best image

PUBLISHED
4 method to include:
place truck on ramp and (release) 1
measure distance (travelled) from bottom of ramp 1
repeat with different mass(es) (loaded on the same truck) 1
additional apparatus:
(metre) rule(r) / measuring tape 1
variables:
height/angle of ramp/number of supporting bricks 1
release position/height above bench 1
table with clear columns for mass, and distance travelled, with appropriate units in the headings of the table 1

PUBLISHED
this case are the first (axes right way round and labelled) so maximum 1.

PHYSICS 0625/53
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a) θ for beaker A decreasing 1
1(b)(i) θ for beaker B decreasing more slowly 1
1(b)(ii) s, ºC, ºC all correct 1
30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 1
1(c)(i) beaker with lid A (has a greater rate of cooling) 1
correct mention of comparative temperature change over 0 to 180s 1
1(c)(ii) any suitable change to apparatus relating to comparison e.g. 1

insulate sides / stand on mat
use plastic beaker
thicker lid
use of fan
use wider beaker
matching explanation e.g. 1

thermal energy only escapes from surface
less transfer of thermal energy by sides / bottom
less conduction through lid
larger surface area (for evaporation to occur)
1(d) straight line 1
through the origin 1
1(e) any one appropriate factor e.g. 1

volume of water
initial temperature of water
(same) lids
type / material / size of beaker
room temperature / appropriate environmental factor

PUBLISHED
2(a) I values, all decreasing and all < 1.00 A 1
V values, all increasing and all < 3.0 V 1
I to 2dp at least and V to 1dp at least 1
2(b) A, V 1
2(c) correct calculations of P 1
P for 3Ω > other P values 1
consistent 2 or consistent 3 significant figures 1
2(d) increases (at first) 1
to a maximum / then decreases 1
2(e) any two additions from: 2

draw a graph;
different / more resistors / values of resistance/greater range of values for resistance;
use (at least) 5 sets of values for resistance

PUBLISHED
3(a) hO = 1.0 to 2.5 (cm) 1
hI decreasing 1
3(b) N calculations correct 1
3(c) graph:
axes labelled correct orientation, with quantity and unit 1
appropriate scales (plots occupying at least ½ grid) 1
plots all correct to ½ small square and precise plots 1
well judged line and thin line 1
3(d) G in range 13.0 to 17.0 1
triangle method seen on graph occupying at least half line 1
3(e) any inherent difficulty e.g. 1

hand/ruler in way of image OR screen can move (when measuring)
matching improvement to apparatus e.g. 1

use translucent screen and view from behind OR fix ruler/grid to screen OR clamp screen in place

PUBLISHED
4 Apparatus: 1
forcemeter, (10 g and 100 g) masses/masses only (if clear they are used to change the mass of the block and as weights
to the block via the pulley)
Diagram: 1
block, workable means of pulling and measuring force
Method (2): 1
measure force required to make block slide/find mass (on pulley) required to make block slide
repeat for new value of mass 1
Precautions: 1
any one from:
same surface to slide on/repeat each measurement and take average / same angle of pulling force
Graph: 1
mass on block vs force (needed to slide)
Any additional point: 1

at least 5 sets of data taken / keep force horizontal / add mass of block to load / extra precaution

PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a) d = 5(.0) (cm) 1
1(b)(i) D = 50 (cm) 1
1(b)(ii) t = 14.06 1
1(b)(iii) T = 1.406 (allow ecf from 1(b)(ii): t/10 (s)) 1
1(b)(iv) T2 = 1.98 or 1.99 (allow ecf from 1(b)(iii)) 1
1(b)(v) g = 10.1 (allow ecf from 1(b)(iv)) 1
1(c)(i) Unit s2 1
1(c)(ii) g given to 2 or 3 significant figures 1
1(d) Use of additional d values OR use a larger d value 1
Count more swings 1
1(e) Any one from: 1

Perpendicular viewing of rule
Counting beginning with zero (owtte)
Use of fiducial mark (owtte)
Use of set-square or horizontal rule to aid measurement of d
Use rule close to/touching the bob
Time taken from centre of swing, (not extremities)
Measure length to top and bottom of bob and average
Measure string length and add radius of bob measured with callipers or micrometer

PUBLISHED
2(a)(i) EITHER V1 = 2.2 OR I = 0.46 correct 1
Both values correct and correct units V and A 1
2(a)(ii) R1 = 4.78 (Ω) (allow ecf from 2(a)(i)) 1
2(b) Statement matches readings (Expect YES) 1
Expect justification to include the idea of within the limits of experimental accuracy (but accept beyond limits, if ecf allowed for 1
statement matching readings)
2(c) R = 14.3 OR 14.4; 2 or 3 significant figures required 1
Unit Ω 1
2(d) 3V1 1
2(e) 3 resistors in parallel 1
Correct variable resistor symbol 1
Voltmeter symbol correct and circuit correct 1

PUBLISHED
3(a) uv values 1065, 1128, 1200, 1283, 1353 1
3(b) Graph: 1
(all marks are still available if uv values are wrong)
Axes correctly labelled and right way round
Suitable scales 1
3(c) Triangle method clearly shown on graph 1
Triangle using at least half of candidate’s line 1
3(d) G in range 14.0 to 16.0 1
f = G to 2 or 3 significant figures 1

Finding exact position that gives clearest image
Measuring to centre of lens
Room too bright/lamp too dim/image too faint

PUBLISHED
4 Method to include: 1
(Hot) water in copper can, time taken for temperature to drop
Correct use of at least 3 larger outer containers, separately 1
Some indication that size of air gap is measured 1
Any two from: 2

Use of something to cover air gap
Use of lid on copper can
Same starting temperature
Same room temperature
Same volume of hot water
Use of ‘control’ with no outer container
Inner container standing on an insulator
Uniform air gap all round
Table with clear columns for temperature and/or time (to match method) and air-gap, with appropriate units 1
Conclusion: Least temperature drop OR longest time for temperature to drop shows lowest cooling rate OR best insulation 1
OR plot temperature against time and least gradient shows lowest cooling rate (ora)

PHYSICS 0625/62
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1 / Level 2 Certificate.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a)(i) 2 or more measurements seen 1
DB = 4.8 ± 0.1 (cm) 1
1(a)(ii) D = 6.0 (cm) 1
1(b) 1 h = 7.8 (cm) AND 1

2 V = 220(.428) (cm3)
1(c) ρ = 1 / 1.1 / 1.05( .) 1
g / cm3 1
1(d) any one from: 1

part (a)
drawn circle not exact / thickness of rim or cup / thickness of the pencil line
part (b)
difficult to measure the height (in practice) / D2 increases inaccuracy in D
part (c)
mass of cup has been ignored
1(e) diagram showing clearly:
line of sight perpendicular to measuring cylinder 1
to the bottom of the meniscus 1

PUBLISHED
2(a) θ R = 23(.0) (°C) 1
2(b)(i) ensure thermometer / bulb / alcohol / mercury has reached the temperature of the water 1
2(b)(ii) s / seconds, °C 1
2(b)(iii) t values 30, 60, 90, 120, 150 1
2(b)(iv) graph:
axes correctly labelled and right way round 1
suitable scales (scales must start below θ R) 1
good line judgement, thin, continuous line 1
2(c) horizontal line at θ R correctly positioned 1

perpendicular viewing of thermometer
stir (before taking temperature reading)
don’t let the thermometer (bulb) touch the sides / bottom of beaker
wait for thermometer to reach θ MAX before reading

higher starting temperature / use hotter water
use of metal can instead of beaker / metal bench
lower room temperature / cold water bath
use of a fan
container with a greater surface area / larger beaker

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) v = 5.8(0) (cm) / 58 (mm) 1
3(a)(ii) V = 29(.0) (cm) 1
3(a)(iii) f1 = 11.8(3673) / 12 (cm) 1
3(b) f A= 12.0 (cm) 1
3(c) at least 3 new values suggested 1
all new values between 15 cm and 70 cm with at least 5 cm between each value 1

use of darkened room / brighter lamp
mark position of centre of lens on holder
place metre rule on bench / clamp in position
ensure object and (centre of) lens are same height (from the bench)
object and lens and screen perpendicular to bench
move screen slowly / back and forth to obtain best image

PUBLISHED
4 method to include:
place truck on ramp (and release) 1
measure distance (travelled) from bottom of ramp 1
repeat with different mass(es) (loaded on the same truck) 1
additional apparatus:
(metre) rule(r) / measuring tape 1
control variables:
height / angle of ramp / number of supporting bricks 1
release position / height above bench 1
table with clear columns for mass, and distance travelled, with appropriate units in the headings of the table 1

PUBLISHED
this case are the first (axes right way round and labelled) So maximum 1.

PHYSICS 0625/63
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1 / Level 2 Certificate.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a) 21(.0) (ºC) 1
1(b) s, ºC, ºC all correct 1
30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 1
1(c) appropriate precaution e.g. avoidance of parallax (only if explained) / wait until reading stops rising (at start) 1
1(d)(i) beaker with lid A (has a greater rate of cooling) 1
correct mention of comparative temperature change over 0 to 180 s 1
1(d)(ii) any suitable change to apparatus relating to comparison e.g. 1

insulate sides / stand on mat
use plastic beaker
thicker lid
use of fan
use wider beaker
matching explanation e.g. 1

thermal energy only escapes from surface
less transfer of thermal energy by sides / bottom
less conduction through lid
larger surface area (for evaporation to occur)
1(e) straight line 1
through the origin 1
1(f) any appropriate factor e.g.

volume of water
initial temperature of water
(same) lids
type / material / size of beaker
room temperature / appropriate environmental factor

PUBLISHED
2(b)(i) I = 0.86 (A) 1
V = 0.9 (V) 1
2(b)(ii) Ω 1
A, V 1
2(c) correct calculations of P (0.77 / ecf, 0.94, 0.58(W)) 1
consistent 2 or consistent 3 significant figures 1
2(d) increases (at first) 1
to a maximum AND then decreases 1
2(e) any 2 additions from: 2

draw a graph;
different / more resistors / values of resistance / greater range of values for resistance;
use (at least) 5 sets of values for resistance

PUBLISHED
3(a) hO = 1.4 (cm) 1
3(b)(i) hI = 4.5 (cm) 1
3(b)(ii) N = 0.31 / ecf 1
3(c) graph:
axes labelled correct orientation, with quantity and unit 1
appropriate scales (plots occupying at least ½ grid) 1
plots all correct to ½ small square and precise plots 1
well judged line and thin line 1
3(d) G in range 14.0 to 17.0 1
triangle method seen on graph occupying at least half line 1
3(e) any inherent difficulty e.g. 1

hand / ruler in way of image OR screen can move (when measuring)
matching improvement to apparatus e.g. 1

use translucent screen and view from behind OR fix ruler / grid to screen OR clamp screen in place

PUBLISHED
4 Apparatus: 1
forcemeter, (10 g and 100 g) masses / masses only (if clear they are used to change the mass of the block and as weights
to the block via the pulley)
Diagram: 1
block, workable means of pulling and measuring force
Method (2): 1
measure force required to make block slide / find mass (on pulley) required to make block slide
repeat for new value of mass 1
Precautions: 1
any one from:
same surface to slide on / repeat each measurement and take average / same angle of pulling force
Graph: 1
mass on block vs force (needed to slide)
Any additional point: 1

at least 5 sets of data taken / keep force horizontal / add mass of block to load / extra precaution

PHYSICS 0625/11
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*8871621324*

IB18 06_0625_11/3RP
2
1 A length of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.
cotton
cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
When the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.
six turns of cotton

pen
What is the distance once round the pen?
A 2.2 cm B 2.6 cm C 13.2 cm D 15.6 cm
2 A car is moving along a straight, level road, with a constant acceleration.
Which graph shows the motion of the car?
A B
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
3 A car takes 15 minutes to travel along a road that is 20 km long.
What is the average speed of the car?
A 0.75 km / h B 5.0 km / h C 80 km / h D 300 km / h
© UCLES 2018 0625/11/M/J/18

3
4 Diagram 1 shows a beam balance. A beaker with a wire loop balances the standard masses.
The beaker is then removed and hung from a spring. The spring extends by 5.0 cm, as in
diagram 2.
diagram 1 diagram 2
beam beaker with spring

standard balance wire loop
masses
attached
beaker with
wire loop
attached
The experiment is repeated with the same apparatus on the Moon, where the acceleration of free
fall is less than on Earth.
Which statement describes what happens on the Moon?
A The beam balance is balanced and the spring extends by 5.0 cm.
B The beam balance is balanced and the spring extends by less than 5.0 cm.
C The right-hand balance pan is higher and the spring extends by 5.0 cm.
D The right-hand balance pan is higher and the spring extends by less than 5.0 cm.
5 An empty beaker is placed on a top-pan balance. Some water is now poured into the beaker.
0.062 kg 0.106 kg
empty beaker beaker + water
What is the weight of the water?
A 0.044 kg B 0.168 kg C 0.0044 N D 0.44 N
© UCLES 2018 0625/11/M/J/18 [Turn over

4
6 Three liquids P, Q and R have different densities and do not mix. The liquids are placed in a
measuring cylinder and allowed to settle. A small block is then dropped into the measuring
cylinder and comes to rest, as shown.
Q
block
Which statement about the density of the block is correct?
A It is equal to the density of Q.

B It is greater than the density of P.
C It is greater than the density of R.
D It is less than the density of Q.
7 The diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder.
The mass of the liquid is 16 g.
25
cm3
20
15
10
A 0.80 g / cm 3 B 1.25 g / cm 3 C 36 g / cm 3 D 320 g / cm 3
© UCLES 2018 0625/11/M/J/18

5
8 A car is moving in a straight line on a level road. Its engine provides a forward force on the car. A
second force of equal size acts on the car due to resistive forces.
Which statement describes what happens?
A The car changes direction.

B The car moves at a constant speed.
C The car slows down.
D The car speeds up.
9 A hole is drilled in a square tile. The diagram shows the tile hanging freely on a nail.
Where is the centre of mass of the tile?
A
nail
tile
D
B
C
10 The diagram shows the energy transferred in a lamp in one second.
light energy out

total energy in = 60 J
= 100 J
wasted energy out

= 40 J
Which type of wasted energy is produced by the lamp?
A chemical potential energy

B electrical energy
C gravitational potential energy
D thermal energy

6
11 Which energy resource is not renewable?
A fossil fuel
B sunlight
C tides
D wind
12 A student does work by pulling a box across a horizontal floor.
She now pulls a second box along the same floor.
Which row indicates that the student is now doing twice as much work?
force used distance the

to pull box box is pulled
A is doubled is doubled
B is doubled is halved
C stays the same is doubled
D stays the same is halved
13 Four identical beakers are filled with equal volumes of liquids P or Q, as shown. Liquid P is more
dense than liquid Q.
At which point is the pressure the least?
liquid P B liquid Q D
A C
14 A woman has a weight of 600 N. She stands on a horizontal floor. The area of her feet in contact
with the floor is 0.050 m2.
What is the pressure she exerts on the floor?
A 1.2 × 103 N / m2
B 2.4 × 103 N / m2
C 1.2 × 104 N / m2
D 2.4 × 104 N / m2
© UCLES 2018 0625/11/M/J/18

7
15 On a warm day, a carton of fresh milk is covered with a wet cloth.
Why does this help to reduce the temperature of the milk?
A Some water evaporates from the cloth so the remaining water becomes cooler.
B The water has a very high thermal capacity.
C The water insulates the milk from the warm air around it.
D Water is always colder than the air around it.
16 Air is trapped in a cylinder by a piston.
The piston is pushed inwards and the volume of the air is reduced.
The temperature of the trapped air remains constant.
Which row describes how the average speed of the air molecules and the average distance
between them changes?
average speed average distance

of molecules between molecules
A increases decreases
B increases unchanged
C unchanged decreases
D unchanged increases
17 A wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.
wooden wheel
iron circle
Which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood?
A cooling the iron circle

B heating the iron circle
C heating the wooden wheel and cooling the iron circle
D heating the wooden wheel but not heating or cooling the iron circle

8
18 A student wishes to calibrate a mercury-in-glass thermometer with a °C scale.
Which values should she use for the lower fixed point and for the upper fixed point?
A melting point of ice boiling point of mercury

B melting point of ice boiling point of water
C melting point of mercury boiling point of mercury
D melting point of mercury boiling point of water
19 Which row gives the correct name for each change of state shown?
change of state
gas to liquid liquid to solid solid to liquid
A condensation melting solidification

B condensation solidification melting
C evaporation melting solidification
D evaporation solidification melting
20 On a cold day, a metal front-door knob X and a similar plastic knob Y are at the same
temperature.
Why does X feel cooler to the touch than Y?
A X convects thermal energy better than Y.

B X is a better thermal conductor than Y.
C X is a better insulator than Y.
D X is a better radiator of thermal energy than Y.
21 A liquid is heated and it expands.
How does this lead to the formation of a convection current?
A The density of the heated liquid decreases.

B The density of the heated liquid increases.
C The mass of the heated liquid molecules decreases.
D The mass of the heated liquid molecules increases.
© UCLES 2018 0625/11/M/J/18

9
22 Which arrow on the graph shows the amplitude of the wave?
displacement
B
A C
0
0 distance
23 In which situation is the wavelength of the wave changed?
A light from the Sun passing from air into water

B radio waves travelling from an Earth satellite to the Moon
C sound reflecting from a wall
D water waves passing through a narrow gap
24 Scout P signals to scout Q on the other side of a valley by using a mirror to reflect the Sun’s light.
Sun’s
scout P light
mirror
scout Q
Which mirror position allows the Sun’s light to be reflected to scout Q?
A B C D
mirror Sun’s Sun’s Sun’s Sun’s
light light light light

10
25 The diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum. The numbers indicate the approximate
wavelength at the boundaries between the various regions of the spectrum.
For a device to be able to make use of electromagnetic radiation, it needs an aerial of

approximately the same size as the radiation it is designed to work with.
P Q R S T U V
1m 10–3 m 7 × 10–7 m 4 × 10–7 m 10–8 m 10–11 m
A A mobile phone uses radiation from region P.

B A television satellite dish uses radiation from region Q.
C The receptor cells in an eye use radiation from region R.
D The remote controller for a television uses radiation from region U.
26 A dolphin has a range of audible frequencies of 150 Hz–150 kHz.
Which range of frequencies can be heard both by humans with good hearing and by dolphins?
A 20 Hz–150 Hz
B 20 Hz–150 kHz
C 20 kHz–150 kHz
D 150 Hz–20 kHz
27 A permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron.
permanent
S N P Q soft iron bar
magnet
What are the polarities of end P and of end Q?
end P end Q
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
© UCLES 2018 0625/11/M/J/18

11
28 Which metal is used for the core of an electromagnet?
A copper
B iron
C magnesium
D steel
29 The diagram shows a cell connected to three resistors R1, R2 and R3.
position 1 position 4
R1 R2
position 2 position 3
R3
A student connects an ammeter first in position 1, then in position 2, 3 and 4 in turn.
In which positions does the ammeter show the current in R1?
A 1, 2 and 4 B 1 and 2 only C 3 only D 4 only
30 A plastic rod is rubbed with a cloth. The rod becomes positively charged.
What happens to the plastic rod and what is the charge on the cloth?
plastic rod charge on cloth
A gains electrons negative

B gains electrons positive
C loses electrons negative
D loses electrons positive
31 A student measures the potential difference across a device and the current in the device.
Which calculation gives the resistance of the device?
A current + potential difference
B current ÷ potential difference
C potential difference ÷ current
D potential difference × current

12
32 The diagram shows three identical resistors, three ammeters and a battery, connected in a
circuit.
ammeter 1 A ammeter 2
A
A
ammeter 3
What is the order of the magnitudes of the readings on the ammeters from smallest to largest?
smallest intermediate largest
A ammeter 1 ammeter 2 ammeter 3

B ammeter 1 ammeter 3 ammeter 2
C ammeter 2 ammeter 3 ammeter 1
D ammeter 3 ammeter 2 ammeter 1
33 A student sets up this circuit.
What is the purpose of the circuit?
A to allow a lamp to be made dimmer or brighter as required

B to amplify the sound of a voice
C to light a lamp in the dark
D to sound a bell when the temperature rises
© UCLES 2018 0625/11/M/J/18

13
34 The diagram shows two voltmeters P and Q connected to a potential divider.
V voltmeter P
X
V voltmeter Q
The sliding connection at point X is moved towards the top of the diagram.
What happens to the reading on P and to the reading on Q?
reading on P reading on Q
35 Which statement about electromagnetic induction is correct?
A A strong magnet that is held stationary near a stationary conductor causes a greater effect
than a weak magnet.
B The effect occurs when a magnet and a conductor are both moved with the same speed and
in the same direction.
C The effect occurs when a magnet is moved away from a nearby conductor.
D The effect only occurs when a magnet is moved towards a conductor.
36 An electrical device changes the voltage of an electrical supply from 240 V a.c. to 20 V a.c.
What is this device?
A a generator
B a relay
C a transformer
D a voltmeter

14
37 In the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.
orbiting central
particle mass
What is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?
central mass orbiting particles
A neutron α-particles
B neutron electrons
C nucleus α-particles
D nucleus electrons
38 A neutral atom of argon-40 ( 40 39

18 A ) and a neutral atom of potassium-39 ( 19 K ) are compared.
Which atom has more electrons, and which atom has more protons?
more electrons more protons
A argon argon
B argon potassium
C potassium argon
D potassium potassium
39 Which statement about α-particles and β-particles is correct?
A α-particles are less ionising than β-particles.
B α-particles are more penetrating than β-particles.
C α-particles have greater mass than β-particles.
D α-particles have the same charge as β-particles.
© UCLES 2018 0625/11/M/J/18

15
40 An explosion in a nuclear reactor spread the isotope caesium-137 across a large area.
Ninety years after the explosion, the quantity of caesium-137 present will be 12.5% of its original
level.
What is the half-life of caesium-137?
A 11.25 years B 22.5 years C 30.0 years D 45.0 years
© UCLES 2018 0625/11/M/J/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/11/M/J/18

PHYSICS 0625/12
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*0690604720*

IB18 06_0625_12/2RP
2
cotton
cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
six turns of cotton

pen
A 2.2 cm B 2.6 cm C 13.2 cm D 15.6 cm
2 A ball is dropped in an evacuated tube. A series of photographs is taken at equal time intervals
from the time of release. Another ball of the same size but twice the mass is also dropped in the
same evacuated tube and photographed.
Which diagram shows the motion of the heavier ball?
heavier ball (mass ×2)

first ball A B C D
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/M/J/18

3
4 Which statement about the mass and the weight of an object is correct?
A They are both affected by changes in the acceleration of free fall.

B They are both forces.
C They have different units.
D Weight is calculated by dividing mass by the acceleration of free fall.
5 Two objects P and Q are placed in a beaker containing a liquid.
Object P floats in the liquid and object Q sinks.
Which row for the densities of object P, object Q and the liquid is possible?
density of object P density of object Q density of liquid

g / cm 3 g / cm3 g / cm 3
A 1.2 0.6 0.8

B 1.2 1.4 1.0
C 11.3 8.9 13.6
D 11.3 19.3 13.6
25
cm3
20
15
10

4
7 A spacecraft is travelling in space with no resultant force and no resultant moment acting on it.
Which statement about the spacecraft is correct?
A Its direction is changing.

B It is in equilibrium.
C Its speed is decreasing.
D Its speed is increasing.
8 A man holds a short ladder in four different positions.
The weight of the ladder causes a moment about the man’s shoulder.
In which position is the moment greatest?
A B C D
A
nail
tile
D
B
C
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/M/J/18

5
10 Which source of energy is renewable?
A coal
B natural gas
C oil
D wind

12 Air is trapped in a closed tube by a thread of mercury. The mercury thread is 100 mm long. The
tube is held as shown.
air
mercury
100 mm
Atmospheric pressure is 770 mm Hg.
What is the pressure of the trapped air?
A 100 mm Hg B 670 mm Hg C 770 mm Hg D 870 mm Hg

6
13 Brownian motion is the random motion of particles due to molecular bombardment.
In which states of matter is Brownian motion observed?
A gases, liquids and solids

B gases and liquids only
C gases and solids only
D liquids and solids only
14 The diagram shows the relative number of molecules in a liquid that have a given kinetic energy.
The graph is divided into sections so that each section contains the same number of molecules.
From which section does the greatest number of molecules escape from the liquid per unit time?
relative number
of molecules
A B C D
0
0 kinetic energy
15 An electric kettle heats some water. The same kettle then heats a different liquid. The
temperature of the liquid rises more rapidly than the temperature of the water.
What is a possible explanation of this difference?
A The liquid condenses on the cooler parts of the kettle less than the water does.
B The liquid expands more than the water as it heats up.
C The liquid has a lower boiling point than the water.
D The liquid has a smaller thermal capacity than the water.
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/M/J/18

7
wooden wheel
iron circle


18 Four thermometers, with their bulbs painted different colours, are placed at equal distances from
a radiant heater.
Which thermometer shows the slowest temperature rise when the heater is first switched on?
A matt black
B matt white
C shiny black
D shiny white

8
19 A tank contains water. Ripples are produced on the surface of the water.
What causes the ripples to refract?
A The cold water in the tank is replaced by warm water.

B The ripples change speed as they move from deep to shallow water.
C The ripples hit the wall of the tank.
D The ripples pass through a narrow gap.
20 The diagrams show a wave on the surface of the water in a tank at times 1.0 s apart. The wave is
produced at P and travels to the right.
4.0 cm
Which row gives the frequency and the speed of this water wave?
frequency speed
/ Hz cm / s
A 2.0 4.0
B 2.0 8.0
C 4.0 4.0
D 4.0 8.0
21 Light passes from glass into air.
Which diagram shows a ray of light incident at the critical angle on the air-glass boundary?
A B C D
glass glass glass glass

air air air air
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/M/J/18

9
Sun’s
scout P light
mirror
scout Q
A B C D
23 The table describes white light that passes through a prism and forms a spectrum.
colour refracted colour next

the most to the red
A red orange
B red yellow
C violet orange
D violet yellow
24 Where do all types of electromagnetic waves travel at the same speed?
A air
B a vacuum
C glass
D water

10
25 A siren is emitting a sound. As time passes, the sound becomes louder and higher pitched.
What is happening to the amplitude and to the frequency of the emitted sound wave?
amplitude frequency
permanent
magnet
end P end Q
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
27 The diagrams show three ammeters.
1 2 3
2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0

0
0
4.
8.
1.
2.
4.50 A
0
0
10.0
0.0
0.0
5.0
A A
Which ammeters show the same value of current?
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/M/J/18

11
29 A lamp is connected across one cell, then across two cells. The potential difference (p.d.) across
the lamp and the current in it are measured in each case.
The results are shown.
number
p.d. / V current / A
of cells
1 2.8 0.25
2 5.4 0.40
What is the change in the resistance of the lamp when the number of cells is increased from one
to two?
A It decreases by 0.015 Ω.
B It increases by 1.5 Ω.
C It increases by 2.3 Ω.
D It increases by 17 Ω.

12
30 An electrical heater transfers thermal energy to the surroundings.
The graph shows how the amount of thermal energy transferred varies with time.
400
thermal energy
transferred / J 300
200
100
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
time / s
The heater continues to transfer energy at the same rate.
How much thermal energy is transferred by the heater in 5.0 minutes?
A 200 J B 400 J C 2000 J D 12 000 J
31 Which electrical component does the symbol represent?
A a fuse
B a relay coil
C a thermistor
D a variable resistor
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/M/J/18

13

V voltmeter P
X
V voltmeter Q
34 A simple electric generator induces an electromotive force (e.m.f.).
Which modification would increase the induced e.m.f.?
A Increase the number of turns in the coil of the generator.

B Increase the distance between the magnetic poles.
C Reduce the strength of the magnetic field around the coil.
D Reverse the direction of the magnetic field.

14
35 A transformer has Np turns in the primary coil and Ns turns in the secondary coil.
Which row gives the values of Np and Ns for a transformer that steps up a voltage of 1200 V to
36 000 V?
Np Ns
A 2 000 60 000
B 2 000 600 000
C 60 000 2 000
D 600 000 2 000
36 A straight wire is perpendicular to the paper. It carries a current into the paper.
What is the magnetic field pattern and its direction near the wire?
A B C D
key
wire with current into the page
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/M/J/18

15
orbiting central
particle mass
B neutron electrons
D nucleus electrons
38 The table shows the composition of three different nuclei.
number of number of
nucleus
protons neutrons
X 3 3
Y 3 4
Z 4 3
Which nuclei are isotopes of the same element?
A X, Y and Z B X and Y only C X and Z only D Y and Z only

16
39 The table compares the penetrating abilities and ionising effects of α-radiation and of γ-radiation.
least most
penetrating ionising
A α α
B α γ
C γ α
D γ γ
40 Radioactive materials must be handled in a safe way.
What is not a safety procedure?
A Monitor exposure time to radioactive materials.

B Store radioactive materials in cardboard boxes.
C Use tongs to pick up the radioactive source.
D Wear protective clothing.
© UCLES 2018 0625/12/M/J/18

PHYSICS 0625/13
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*9915199420*

IB18 06_0625_13/4RP
2
cotton
cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
six turns of cotton

pen
A 2.2 cm B 2.6 cm C 13.2 cm D 15.6 cm
2 Four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.
Which ball has the greatest average speed?
A B C D
1.0 kg
2.0 kg
3.0 kg
4.0 m
4.0 kg
3.0 m
2.0 m
1.0 m ground
© UCLES 2018 0625/13/M/J/18

3
4 A person steps onto a bathroom scales.
The bathroom scales records both mass and weight.
Which row shows the readings on the scales?
mass weight
A 60 N 600 kg
B 60 kg 600 N
C 600 kg 60 N
D 600 N 60 kg
5 Which properties of an object can be changed by a force?
A direction of motion, mass and speed

B direction of motion, shape and speed
C direction of motion and speed only
D mass, shape and speed
6 A man holds a ladder in four different positions, pivoting around his shoulder.
The weight of the ladder causes a moment about the man’s shoulder.
In which position is the moment greatest?
A B C D

4
A
nail
tile
D
B
C
8 Which method of drying clothes has the least impact on the environment?
A Evaporate the water in them in an electrically heated tumble dryer.

B Hang them on a washing line in direct sunlight.
C Remove the water from them in an electric spin dryer.
D Suspend them close to a coal fire.

© UCLES 2018 0625/13/M/J/18

5
10 A simple barometer includes a column of mercury.
Which property of this column of mercury is used to give a measurement of atmospheric

pressure?
A its cross-sectional area

B its height
C its temperature
D its thermal capacity
25
3
cm
20
15
10
12 Brownian motion of particles is observed.
Which statements describe the movement of the particles?
1 The particles all travel along a curved path.

2 The particles move randomly.
3 The particles all travel in the same direction.
A 1 and 3 B 1 only C 2 and 3 D 2 only

6
13 A pure liquid is left in an open beaker and some of the liquid molecules escape by evaporation.
Which statement about this process is correct?
A None of the escaping molecules return to the liquid.

B The escaping molecules are generally the more energetic ones.
C The rate of escape of the molecules can be increased by increasing the depth of the liquid in
the beaker.
D The temperature of the remaining liquid is unaffected by the escape of the molecules.
wooden wheel
iron circle


© UCLES 2018 0625/13/M/J/18

7
16 Which diagram shows how the thermal capacity of a silver object depends on its mass?
A B
thermal thermal
capacity capacity
0 0
0 mass 0 mass
C D
thermal thermal
capacity capacity
0 0
0 mass 0 mass
17 The diagram shows a pan used for cooking food.
handle of pan
base of pan
Which row is correct for the materials used to make the base and the handle of the pan?
base of pan handle of pan
A good thermal conductor good thermal conductor

B good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor
C poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor
D poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor

8
18 A saucepan of water is heated from its base on an electric hob.
After five minutes the water near the top of the saucepan is becoming hot.
What is the main process of heat transfer within the water?
A condensation
B conduction
C convection
D radiation
19 The diagram shows a wave.
2.0
displacement
/ cm 1.0
0
0 4.0 8.0 12.0 16.0 20.0 24.0 28.0
–1.0 distance
/ cm
–2.0
amplitude of wavelength of
the wave / cm the wave / cm
A 1.0 4.0
B 1.0 8.0
C 2.0 4.0
D 2.0 8.0
© UCLES 2018 0625/13/M/J/18

9
20 The diagram shows a ray of light passing from glass to air, at the critical angle.
air Z
glass W Y
X
Which angles are the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction?
angle of angle of
incidence refraction
A W Y
B W Z
C X Y
D X Z
Sun’s
scout P light
mirror
scout Q
A B C D

10
22 It takes 0.24 seconds for a microwave signal to travel from a transmitting station on Earth to a
satellite and then back to the station on Earth. Microwaves travel at 3.0 × 108 m / s.
How far is the transmitting station from the satellite?
A 36 000 km
B 72 000 km
C 36 000 000 km
D 72 000 000 km
23 The diagram shows the ranges of human hearing and of ultrasound waves.
range of
human hearing ultrasound
0 101 102 103 104 105 106

2 × 101 2 × 104
To which characteristic of sound waves do the numbers on the diagram refer?
A amplitude in cm
B frequency in Hz
C speed in metres / second
D wavelength in metres
permanent
magnet
end P end Q
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
© UCLES 2018 0625/13/M/J/18

11
25 The diagram shows a permanent bar magnet placed on a wooden table. A student draws arrows
to show the direction of the magnetic field at four points.
Which arrow shows the direction of the magnetic field at that position?
D B
N S
26 Which statement about electric charges is correct?
A Like charges attract and unlike charges attract.

B Like charges attract and unlike charges repel.
C Like charges repel and unlike charges attract.
D Like charges repel and unlike charges repel.
27 The diagrams show two readings on the same ammeter. Reading 1 is taken before the ammeter
is connected in a circuit. Reading 2 shows the reading when the ammeter is connected in a
circuit.
1 2 1 2
0 3 0 3
A A
reading 1 reading 2
not connected in a circuit connected in a circuit
What is the current in the circuit?
A 0.80 A B 0.90 A C 0.95 A D 1.20 A

12
29 A battery in an electric circuit is connected to a lamp.
Chemical energy in the battery is transferred to which other types of energy?
A internal energy only

B kinetic energy and sound energy
C light energy and thermal energy
D light energy only
30 Which component is represented by the symbol shown?
A fixed resistor
B fuse
C thermistor
D variable resistor
© UCLES 2018 0625/13/M/J/18

13
31 A student sets up a circuit which she calls circuit 1. She records the value of the current I1, and
calculates the resistance R1 of the circuit.
A
A
V V
circuit 1 circuit 2
She then connects an identical resistor in parallel with the original resistor. She calls this circuit 2.
She records current I2 and calculates the total resistance R2 of this circuit.
Which row correctly compares the two currents and the two resistances in the circuits?
I2 R2
A greater than I1 greater than R1

B greater than I1 less than R1
C less than I1 greater than R1
D less than I1 less than R1


14
V voltmeter P
X
V voltmeter Q
34 The diagram shows a transformer.
core
primary coil
secondary coil
Which materials are the most suitable for the core and for the coils?
core material coil material
A copper copper
B copper iron
C iron copper
D iron iron
© UCLES 2018 0625/13/M/J/18

15
35 A current-carrying conductor placed in a magnetic field experiences a force.
Which changes result in reversing the direction of the force?
A Decrease the current, keeping the field direction constant.

B Increase the current and reverse the field direction.
C Increase the current, keeping the field direction constant.
D Reverse the current and reverse the field direction.
36 A solenoid is connected to a battery.
axis of
solenoid
solenoid
Which statement about the magnetic field at the centre of the solenoid is correct?
A The magnetic field along the axis is zero.
B The direction of the magnetic field is at an angle of 45° to the axis.

C The direction of the magnetic field is parallel to the axis.
D The direction of the magnetic field is perpendicular to the axis.
orbiting central
particle mass
B neutron electrons
D nucleus electrons

16
214
38 One isotope of lead is represented by the nuclide symbol 82
Pb .
How many neutrons and how many protons does one nucleus of this isotope contain?
number of number of
neutrons protons
A 82 132
B 82 214
C 132 82
D 214 82
39 Three sources of background radiation are listed.
1 cosmic rays
2 medical X-rays
3 radioactive emissions from radon gas from the ground
Which of these sources are naturally occurring?
A 1 and 3 only B 1 only C 2 and 3 only D 2 only
40 The rates of emission from four radioactive sources are measured at 20 minute intervals.
Each row in the table shows the results for one of the radioactive sources.
Which source has the longest half-life?
rate of emission / emissions per minute

time 0 time 20 min time 40 min
A 120 60 30
B 120 110 101
C 240 60 15
D 240 170 122
© UCLES 2018 0625/13/M/J/18

PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*7516764361*

IB18 06_0625_21/3RP
2
cotton
cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
six turns of cotton

pen
A 2.2 cm B 2.6 cm C 13.2 cm D 15.6 cm
2 When does an object falling vertically through the air reach terminal velocity?
A when the acceleration of the object becomes negative

B when the acceleration of the object is equal to g
C when the air resistance equals the weight of the object
D when the air resistance is greater than the weight of the object
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

3
3 A car is moving along a straight, level road, with a constant acceleration.
Which graph shows the motion of the car?
A B
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time

4
4 Diagram 1 shows a beam balance. A beaker with a wire loop balances the standard masses.
The beaker is then removed and hung from a spring. The spring extends by 5.0 cm, as in
diagram 2.
diagram 1 diagram 2
beam beaker with spring

standard balance wire loop
masses
attached
beaker with
wire loop
attached
The experiment is repeated with the same apparatus on the Moon, where the acceleration of free
fall is less than on Earth.
Which statement describes what happens on the Moon?
A The beam balance is balanced and the spring extends by 5.0 cm.
B The beam balance is balanced and the spring extends by less than 5.0 cm.
C The right-hand balance pan is higher and the spring extends by 5.0 cm.
D The right-hand balance pan is higher and the spring extends by less than 5.0 cm.
5 An object always has mass but does not always have weight.
What must be present and acting on the mass for it to have weight?
A a gravitational field
B a set of scales
C displaced water
D friction due to air resistance
6 A force acting on a moving ball causes its motion to change. This force stays constant.
What makes the force produce a greater change in the motion of the ball?
A decreasing the total mass of the ball

B increasing the temperature of the ball
C using a ball with a hollow centre but the same mass
D using a different material for the ball so that it has a lower density but the same mass
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

5
7 A balloon and a mass are attached to a rod that is pivoted at P.
balloon
45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5
P
cm
mass
The balloon is filled with helium, a gas less dense than air, so that it applies an upward force on
the rod.
The rod is horizontal and stationary.
Which action causes the rod to rotate clockwise?
A Move both the balloon and mass 10 cm to the left.

B Move both the balloon and mass 10 cm to the right.
C Move both the balloon and mass to the 25 cm mark.
D Move the balloon to the 20 cm mark and the mass to the 30 cm mark.
8 A car is moving in a straight line on a level road. Its engine provides a forward force on the car. A
second force of equal size acts on the car due to resistive forces.
Which statement describes what happens?
A The car changes direction.

B The car moves at a constant speed.
C The car slows down.
D The car speeds up.
9 Which expression gives the momentum of an object?
A mass × acceleration
B mass × gravitational field strength
C mass × velocity
D 1
2 × mass × (velocity)2

6
10 As energy is transferred into different forms, it eventually becomes dissipated.
What does this mean?
A All the energy disappears.

B The energy finally changes into every possible form of energy.
C The energy spreads out among the objects and their surroundings.
D The total amount of energy becomes less.
11 A ball of mass 1.2 kg is dropped from a height of 30 m. As it falls, 25% of its initial gravitational
potential energy is transferred to thermal energy.
What is the kinetic energy of the ball just before it hits the ground?
A 27 J B 90 J C 270 J D 360 J
12 A girl hangs by her hands from a bar in the gymnasium. She pulls herself up until her chin is level
with the bar.
The mass of the girl is 48 kg.
She pulls herself up through a distance of 0.25 m.
She does this in 2.0 s.
What is the useful power she uses to pull herself up?
A 6.0 W B 24 W C 60 W D 240 W
13 Four identical beakers are filled with equal volumes of liquids P or Q, as shown. Liquid P is more
dense than liquid Q.
At which point is the pressure the least?
liquid P B liquid Q D
A C
14 An oil tank has a base of area 2.5 m2 and is filled with oil to a depth of 1.2 m.
The density of the oil is 800 kg / m3.
What is the force exerted on the base of the tank due to the oil?
A 960 N B 2400 N C 9600 N D 24 000 N
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

7
15 When molecules of a gas rebound from a wall of a container, the wall experiences a pressure.
What is the cause of this pressure?
A the change in energy of the molecules

B the change in momentum of the molecules
C the change in power of the molecules
D the change in speed of the molecules

17 Which statements about boiling and about evaporation are both correct?
boiling evaporation
A takes place only at the surface takes place only at the surface
B takes place only at the surface takes place throughout the liquid
C takes place throughout the liquid takes place only at the surface
D takes place throughout the liquid takes place throughout the liquid
18 On a cold day, a metal front-door knob X and a similar plastic knob Y are at the same
temperature.
Why does X feel cooler to the touch than Y?
A X convects thermal energy better than Y.

B X is a better thermal conductor than Y.
C X is a better insulator than Y.
D X is a better radiator of thermal energy than Y.

8
19 Light travels at a speed of 2.0 × 108 m / s in a glass block.
In the glass, the wavelength of the light is 4.0 × 10–7 m.
What is the frequency of the light?
A 2.0 × 10–15 Hz
B 1.3 × 10–2 Hz
C 80 Hz
D 5.0 × 1014 Hz
20 Which arrow on the graph shows the amplitude of the wave?
displacement
B
A C
0
0 distance
Sun’s
scout P light
mirror
scout Q
A B C D
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

9
22 A prism is made from transparent plastic. In this plastic, light travels at 0.80 c, where c is its speed
in air. Light enters one face of the prism at right-angles as shown.
NOT TO
SCALE
The light just escapes from the sloping face of the prism.
What is angle θ ?
A 37° B 39° C 51° D 53°
23 The Sun emits infra-red radiation and light.
Light from the Sun reaches the Earth in 8 minutes.
Which row gives correct information about the infra-red radiation?
wavelength of time taken for infra-red

infra-red radiation radiation to reach Earth
A longer than wavelength of light 8 minutes

B longer than wavelength of light much less than 8 minutes
C shorter than wavelength of light 8 minutes
D shorter than wavelength of light much more than 8 minutes
24 A dolphin has a range of audible frequencies of 150 Hz–150 kHz.
Which range of frequencies can be heard both by humans with good hearing and by dolphins?
A 20 Hz–150 Hz
B 20 Hz–150 kHz
C 20 kHz–150 kHz
D 150 Hz–20 kHz

10
permanent
magnet
end P end Q
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
26 A steel magnet is placed inside a coil of wire.
Which method is used to demagnetise the magnet?
A connect the coil to an a.c. power supply

B connect the coil to an a.c. power supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil
C connect the coil to a d.c. power supply
D connect the coil to a d.c. power supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil
27 The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a rechargeable battery is 6.0 V.
What does this mean?
A 6.0 J is the maximum energy the battery can provide in 1.0 s.

B 6.0 J is the total energy the battery can provide before it has to be recharged.
C 6.0 J of energy is provided by the battery to drive a charge of 1.0 C around a complete circuit.
D 6.0 J of energy is provided by the battery to drive a current of 1.0 A around a complete circuit.
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

11
29 A water heater is connected to a 230 V supply and there is a current of 26 A in the heater. It takes
20 minutes to heat the water to the required temperature.
How much energy is supplied by the heater?
A 6.0 × 103 J B 1.0 × 104 J C 1.2 × 105 J D 7.2 × 106 J
30 Which electrical symbol represents a diode?
A B C D


12
V voltmeter P
X
V voltmeter Q
33 The diagram represents a digital circuit using a NOR gate and an AND gate.
X NOR
AND
Y
output
What is the truth table for this circuit?
A B C D
X Y Z output X Y Z output X Y Z output X Y Z output

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

13
34 Which statement about electromagnetic induction is correct?
A A strong magnet that is held stationary near a stationary conductor causes a greater effect
than a weak magnet.
B The effect occurs when a magnet and a conductor are both moved with the same speed and
in the same direction.
C The effect occurs when a magnet is moved away from a nearby conductor.
D The effect only occurs when a magnet is moved towards a conductor.
35 The diagram shows a current-carrying conductor in a magnetic field.
Which arrow shows the direction of the force acting on the conductor?
S D B N
36 Power losses in transmission cables are reduced by increasing the transmission voltage.
What is the explanation for this reduction?
A The current decreases, reducing thermal energy losses.

B The current increases, increasing the flow of charge.
C The resistance of the cable increases, reducing the current.
D The resistance of the cable decreases.

14
orbiting central
particle mass
B neutron electrons
D nucleus electrons
38 Nuclear fusion is a reaction that takes place in stars.
Which row describes this reaction?
action of atomic nuclei energy

A an atomic nucleus splits into absorbed
two or more smaller nuclei
B an atomic nucleus splits into released
two or more smaller nuclei
C atomic nuclei join together absorbed
to form a larger nucleus
D atomic nuclei join together released
to form a larger nucleus
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

15
39 The diagram shows emissions from a source passing into the electric field between two charged
plates.
+ + + + + + + + + +
source
– – – – – – – – – –
What is emitted by this source?
A neutrons and γ-rays only
B α-particles and β-particles only
C α-particles and γ-rays only
D β-particles and γ-rays only
40 The graph shows how the count rate registered by a counter near to a sample of a radioactive
isotope changes over a period of a few days. The background count rate is 5 counts per minute.
50
count rate
40
counts / minute
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
time / days
What is the half-life of the isotope?
A 2.0 days B 2.5 days C 3.0 days D 4.0 days
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*7373168877*

IB18 06_0625_22/3RP
2
cotton
cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
six turns of cotton

pen
A 2.2 cm B 2.6 cm C 13.2 cm D 15.6 cm

© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

3
3 A ball is dropped in an evacuated tube. A series of photographs is taken at equal time intervals
from the time of release. Another ball of the same size but twice the mass is also dropped in the
same evacuated tube and photographed.
Which diagram shows the motion of the heavier ball?
heavier ball (mass ×2)

first ball A B C D
4 Which statement about the mass and the weight of an object is correct?
A They are both affected by changes in the acceleration of free fall.

B They are both forces.
C They have different units.
D Weight is calculated by dividing mass by the acceleration of free fall.
5 Which statement about the mass of an object is correct?
A It is equal to the density divided by the volume.

B It is equal to weight multiplied by the gravitational field strength.
C It is the effect of a gravitational field on the object.
D It is the property that resists a change in velocity.

4
6 An object decelerates from 25.0 m / s to 5.0 m / s in a time of 4.0 s.
It has a mass of 50 kg.
What is the resultant force on the object?
A 0.63 N B 10 N C 250 N D 4000 N
7 A beam is pivoted at one end, as shown.
40 cm beam
X
pivot
6.0 N
The beam weighs 6.0 N and its weight acts at a point X, 40 cm from the pivot.
A force of 4.0 N is applied to the beam causing it to balance horizontally.
In which direction and where is the 4.0 N force applied?
A downwards at 20 cm to the left of X

B downwards at 20 cm to the right of X
C upwards at 20 cm to the left of X
D upwards at 20 cm to the right of X
8 A spacecraft is travelling in space with no resultant force and no resultant moment acting on it.
Which statement about the spacecraft is correct?
A Its direction is changing.

B It is in equilibrium.
C Its speed is decreasing.
D Its speed is increasing.
9 A car of mass 1000 kg travelling at 8.0 m / s collides with a lorry of mass 3000 kg that is travelling
at 2.0 m / s in the same direction. After colliding, the two vehicles stick together.
What is their speed after the collision?
A 2.0 m / s B 2.5 m / s C 3.5 m / s D 5.0 m / s
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

5
10 What is the main process by which energy is released in the Sun?
A α-decay
B β-decay
C nuclear fission
D nuclear fusion
11 The work done W by a force is related to the magnitude F of the force and the distance d moved
in the direction of the force.
Which equation for W is correct?
A W=d÷F
B W=d+F
C W=F÷d
D W=F×d
12 A crane on a construction site lifts concrete beams.
The useful work done by the crane is 4000 kJ in a time of 160 s.
What is the useful output power of the crane?
A 0.04 kW B 25 W C 25 kW D 640 kW
13 A submarine is in water of density 1.0 × 103 kg / m3. The submarine changes its depth. This causes
the pressure on it to change by 0.10 MPa.
What is the change in depth of the submarine?
A 0.10 m B 10 m C 100 m D 1000 m
A 960 N B 2400 N C 9600 N D 24 000 N

6


17 In an experiment, an object is heated.
The data from the experiment is shown.
● The energy transferred to the object is 3.0 kJ.

● The mass of the object is 2.0 kg.
● The rise in temperature of the object is 10 °C.
● The specific heat capacity of the object is 150 J / (kg °C).
What is the thermal capacity of the object?
A 30 J / °C B 300 J / °C C 3000 J / °C D 9000 J / °C
18 Four thermometers, with their bulbs painted different colours, are placed at equal distances from
a radiant heater.
Which thermometer shows the slowest temperature rise when the heater is first switched on?
A matt black
B matt white
C shiny black
D shiny white
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

7
19 A tank contains water. Ripples are produced on the surface of the water.
What causes the ripples to refract?
A The cold water in the tank is replaced by warm water.

B The ripples change speed as they move from deep to shallow water.
C The ripples hit the wall of the tank.
D The ripples pass through a narrow gap.
A 2.0 × 10–15 Hz
B 1.3 × 10–2 Hz
C 80 Hz
D 5.0 × 1014 Hz
Sun’s
scout P light
mirror
scout Q
A B C D

8
22 A scientist describes light as being monochromatic.
What does this tell you about the light?
A It has a single frequency.

B It has more than one wavelength.
C It travels at a single speed in a single direction.
D It travels at different speeds in different directions.
23 Which statement is not correct?
A The speed of long-wavelength infra-red radiation in a vacuum is greater than that of short-
wavelength ultraviolet light.
B The speed of microwaves in air is approximately 3.0 × 108 m / s.
C The speed of γ-rays emitted from a sample of cobalt-60 is 3.0 × 105 km / s.

D The X-rays emitted in a supernova explosion reach the Earth at the same time as the visible
light emitted.
24 A siren is emitting a sound. As time passes, the sound becomes louder and higher pitched.
What is happening to the amplitude and to the frequency of the emitted sound wave?
amplitude frequency
permanent
magnet
end P end Q
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

9
26 Which method is used to demagnetise a bar magnet?
A lower it into water

B heat it with a Bunsen burner
C place it in a metal box
D suspend it in a sling
27 What is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a cell?
A the amount of charge that passes through the cell per unit time
B the energy gained per unit charge as charge passes through the cell
C the total amount of charge flowing through the cell
D the total energy stored in the cell
29 A piece of wire is 40 cm long and has a diameter of 2.0 mm.
Its resistance is 0.30 Ω.
Which wire of the same material has a resistance of 0.15 Ω?
length / cm diameter / mm
A 20 1.0
B 20 4.0
C 80 1.0
D 80 4.0

10
30 A diode is used as a rectifier.
What is the purpose of a rectifier?
A to allow current to pass in either direction

B to change alternating current into direct current
C to switch off the circuit in case of a large current
D to provide an efficient source of light

V voltmeter P
X
V voltmeter Q
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

11
33 The circuit shown contains two gates.
Which truth table describes the operation of the circuit?
A B C D
P Q R P Q R P Q R P Q R
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
34 In an a.c. generator, a coil is rotated in a magnetic field and an electromotive force (e.m.f.) is
induced in the coil.
In which position of the coil does the e.m.f. have the largest value?
A B
coil coil
N S N S
C D
coil coil
N S N S

12
35 Wire P carries a current directed perpendicularly into the page. A compass is placed at point Q
which is close to wire P.
The magnetic field at Q due to the current is very much larger than the magnetic field of the
Earth.
In which direction does the North pole of the compass point?
P
B C
Q
A D
36 A transformer has Np turns in the primary coil and Ns turns in the secondary coil.
Which row gives the values of Np and Ns for a transformer that steps up a voltage of 1200 V to
36 000 V?
Np Ns
A 2 000 60 000
B 2 000 600 000
C 60 000 2 000
D 600 000 2 000
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

13
orbiting central
particle mass
B neutron electrons
D nucleus electrons
218
38 An isotope of polonium has the nuclide notation 84 Po .
A nucleus of this isotope decays by emitting an α-particle. A β-particle is then emitted to form
nuclide X.
What is the notation for nuclide X?

214 213 213 214
A 81 X B 82 X C 83 X D 83 X
39 The table compares the penetrating abilities and ionising effects of α-radiation and of γ-radiation.
least most
penetrating ionising
A α α
B α γ
C γ α
D γ γ

14
50
count rate
40
counts / minute
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
time / days
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*9561144955*

IB18 06_0625_23/4RP
2
cotton
cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
six turns of cotton

pen
A 2.2 cm B 2.6 cm C 13.2 cm D 15.6 cm

3 A sprinter runs a 100 m race in a straight line. The table shows how his speed changes with time
for the first 5.0 s of the race.
speed
0 1.7 4.1 5.7 6.5 6.8
m/s
time / s 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
What is the average acceleration of the sprinter between time 2.0 s and time 3.0 s?
A 1.6 m / s2 B 1.9 m / s2 C 4.1 m / s2 D 5.7 m / s2
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

3
4 A person steps onto a bathroom scales.
The bathroom scales records both mass and weight.
Which row shows the readings on the scales?
mass weight
A 60 N 600 kg
B 60 kg 600 N
C 600 kg 60 N
D 600 N 60 kg
5 An object has a weight of 7600 N in a gravitational field of strength 100 N / kg.
What is the mass of the object?
A 76 kg B 760 N C 7600 g D 76 000 N
6 A load is hung from a steel wire. The load is increased.
The length of the wire increases until the limit of proportionality is reached.
The load is now increased slightly.
What happens?
A The extension of the wire increases and the wire no longer obeys Hooke’s law.
B The extension of the wire decreases and the wire no longer obeys Hooke’s law.
C The extension of the wire increases and it obeys Hooke’s law.
D The extension of the wire decreases and it obeys Hooke’s law.
7 The diagram shows a uniform metre rule pivoted at the 30 cm mark.
metre rule
0 cm 30 cm 70 cm 100 cm
pivot
6.0 N 2.0 N
The rule balances when a weight of 6.0 N is hanging from the zero mark and a weight of 2.0 N is
hanging from the 70 cm mark.
What is the weight of the rule?
A 2.0 N B 5.0 N C 6.0 N D 13.0 N

4
8 An astronaut orbits the Earth in a space station.
Which is a vector quantity?
A the mass of the astronaut

B the speed of the satellite
C the temperature inside the satellite
D the weight of the astronaut
9 A visitor to a fairground throws a soft object of mass 0.12 kg at a coconut of mass 0.48 kg. The
soft object stops moving when it hits the coconut. In order to dislodge the coconut, it must be
made to move at 0.10 m/s.
What is the minimum speed with which the visitor should throw the soft object in order to dislodge
the coconut?
A 0.20 m/s
B 0.40 m/s
C 2.0 m/s
D 4.0 m/s
10 An aircraft with a mass of 300 000 kg is flying at an altitude of 2000 m with a speed of 100 m / s.
What is the kinetic energy of the aircraft?
A 1.5 × 104 kJ B 1.5 × 106 kJ C 3.0 × 106 kJ D 6.0 × 106 kJ
11 Which method of drying clothes has the least impact on the environment?
A Evaporate the water in them in an electrically heated tumble dryer.

B Hang them on a washing line in direct sunlight.
C Remove the water from them in an electric spin dryer.
D Suspend them close to a coal fire.
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

5
12 The vertical displacement of a mass of 0.20 kg changes with time. The graph shows how this
displacement changes.
displacement
/ cm
2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
time / s
–1
–2
–3
At which rate does it gain gravitational potential energy as it moves upwards?
A 0.025 W B 0.050 W C 0.20 W D 0.40 W
13 A simple barometer includes a column of mercury.
Which property of this column of mercury is used to give a measurement of atmospheric

pressure?
A its cross-sectional area

B its height
C its temperature
D its thermal capacity
A 960 N B 2400 N C 9600 N D 24 000 N

6

16 Two liquid-in-glass thermometers P and Q contain the same volume of mercury and have
capillary tubes of the same length.
Thermometer P has a capillary tube with a smaller diameter than thermometer Q.
Which thermometer has the greater range and which has the greater sensitivity?
greater greater
range sensitivity
A P P
B P Q
C Q P
D Q Q

© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

7
18 The diagram shows a pan used for cooking food.
handle of pan
base of pan
Which row is correct for the materials used to make the base and the handle of the pan?
base of pan handle of pan
A good thermal conductor good thermal conductor

B good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor
C poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor
D poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor
19 The diagram shows a wave.
2.0
displacement
/ cm 1.0
0
0 4.0 8.0 12.0 16.0 20.0 24.0 28.0
–1.0 distance
/ cm
–2.0
amplitude of wavelength of
the wave / cm the wave / cm
A 1.0 4.0
B 1.0 8.0
C 2.0 4.0
D 2.0 8.0

8
A 2.0 × 10–15 Hz
B 1.3 × 10–2 Hz
C 80 Hz
D 5.0 × 1014 Hz
Sun’s
scout P light
mirror
scout Q
A B C D
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

9
22 Images formed by lenses and mirrors can either be described as real or as virtual.
Which row describes real and virtual images of a point object?
real images virtual images

A formed where light rays an image in a plane mirror is an
meet example of a virtual image
B formed where light rays can be projected onto a screen
meet
C formed from where light rays an image in a plane mirror is an
appear to diverge example of a virtual image
D formed from where light rays can be projected onto a screen
appear to diverge
23 The diagram shows the air molecules in part of a sound wave at a particular moment in time.
Which statement is not correct?
A Earlier, there was compression at X.

B Later, there will be a rarefaction at X.
C This part of the wave is travelling horizontally across the page.
D This part of the wave is travelling towards the top of the page.

10
24 The diagram shows the ranges of human hearing and of ultrasound waves.
range of
human hearing ultrasound
0 101 102 103 104 105 106

2 × 101 2 × 104
To which characteristic of sound waves do the numbers on the diagram refer?
A amplitude in cm
B frequency in Hz
C speed in metres / second
D wavelength in metres
permanent
magnet
end P end Q
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
26 Which method is used to demagnetise a magnet?
A cool it in a freezer
B drop it into a beaker of water
C place it inside a coil carrying a direct current
D strike it with a hammer
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

11
27 Two power supplies are connected in separate circuits. Both power supplies provide the same
magnitude current.
Power supply P has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 1.5 V and power supply Q has an e.m.f. of
3.0 V.
Which statements are correct?
1 Source Q supplies twice the charge per unit time.

2 Source Q supplies twice the energy per unit charge.
3 Source Q supplies twice the energy per unit time.
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only
29 An electricity meter records that 200 MJ of electrical energy are drawn from the 240 V mains
supply in a 24 hour period.
What is the average rate of electrical charge passing through the meter?
A 9.6 C / h B 580 C / h C 35 kC / h D 0.83 MC / h
30 A 3.0 Ω resistor is connected in parallel with a 4.0 Ω resistor.
3.0 Ω
4.0 Ω
What is the resistance of this combination?

A 0.14 Ω B 0.58 Ω C 1.7 Ω D 7.0 Ω

12

V voltmeter P
X
V voltmeter Q
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

13
33 The diagram shows a logic circuit with inputs X and Y.
X
Y
Q
The output is Q.
Which truth table is correct?
A B
X Y Q X Y Q
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1 1 1
C D
X Y Q X Y Q
0 0 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 0
34 A wire connected to a resistor is moved in a magnetic field. A current is induced in the direction
shown.
In which direction is the wire moved?
wire
A
D B
N S R
C
induced
current

14
35 The diagram shows a transformer.
core
primary coil
secondary coil
Which materials are the most suitable for the core and for the coils?
core material coil material
A copper copper
B copper iron
C iron copper
D iron iron
36 A solenoid is connected to a battery.
axis of
solenoid
solenoid
Which statement about the magnetic field at the centre of the solenoid is correct?
A The magnetic field along the axis is zero.
B The direction of the magnetic field is at an angle of 45° to the axis.

C The direction of the magnetic field is parallel to the axis.
D The direction of the magnetic field is perpendicular to the axis.
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

15
orbiting central
particle mass
B neutron electrons
D nucleus electrons
38 The radiation from a radioactive source passes between two metal plates, and is deflected as
shown in the diagram. Between the plates there is a magnetic field directed into the plane of the
paper, as indicated by the crosses.
× × × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × × ×
Only one type of radiation is present.
Which situation is possible?
A The source emits alpha particles and there is an upwards electric field between the plates.
B The source emits alpha particles and there is no electric field between the plates.
C The source emits beta particles and there is an upwards electric field between the plates.
D The source emits gamma radiation and there is a downwards electric field between the
plates.

16
39 The nucleus of an isotope of nitrogen (N) absorbs a neutron. It then decays into an isotope of
carbon (C) and emits x.
1 14 14
0n + 7N → 6C + x
What is x?
A α-particle
B β-particle
C γ-radiation
D proton
50
count rate
40
counts / minute
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
time / days
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

* 1 5 3 5 0 6 4 3 4 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Theory (Core) May/June 2018
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/CGW) 150265/5
2
1 Model trains move along a track passing through two model stations. Students analyse the motion
of a train. They start a digital timer as the train starts to move. They record the time that it enters
Station A and the time it enters Station B.
Fig. 1.1 shows the time on entering Station A and the time on entering Station B.
hour min sec hour min sec
time entering Station A time entering Station B
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the time taken from the train entering Station A to the train entering Station B.
State your answer in seconds.
time taken = ....................................................... s [1]
(b) A faster train takes 54 s to travel from Station A to Station B. The distance between the stations
is 120 m.
Calculate the average speed of this train.
average speed = .................................................. m / s [3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/31/M/J/18

3
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows the speed-time graph for a train travelling on a different part of the track.
4.0
speed
m/s
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0
time / s
Fig. 1.2
Determine the total distance travelled by the train on this part of the track.
distance = ...................................................... m [4]
[Total: 8]

4
2 A 250 cm3 beaker containing some liquid is shown in Fig. 2.1.
beaker
unknown
volume of
liquid
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) A student has a measuring cylinder and a balance.
Describe an experiment to determine the density of the liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[5]
(ii) Suggest the unit of density used by the student.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows a block of polythene.
polythene
Fig. 2.2
(i) Polythene floats in water. Explain why polythene floats.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/31/M/J/18

5
(ii) The weight of the polythene block is 0.84 N.
Calculate the mass of the block.
mass = ..................................................... kg [3]
[Total: 10]

6
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows the vertical forces on a rocket.
thrust 74.2 N
air resistance 2.4 N

weight 43.0 N
Fig. 3.1
Calculate the resultant force on the rocket.
resultant force = ........................................................... N
direction = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows the speed and direction of motion of an object at a point in time.
150.0 m / s
object
Fig. 3.2
The resultant force on the object is zero for 10 seconds.
Deduce the speed and direction of motion after 5 seconds. Indicate the speed and direction
of the object by drawing a labelled arrow next to the object in Fig. 3.3.
Fig. 3.3
[1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/31/M/J/18
7
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a smoke cell. The cell contains smoke particles and air molecules. It is lit from
the side. A student views the motion of smoke particles in the cell by using a microscope.
microscope
smoke cell
air molecules
light and
smoke particles
Fig. 4.1
Describe and explain what the student sees when viewing the smoke particles through the
microscope.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Drops of water on a warm surface disappear after a short time. State the term used to
describe this process. Explain the process, using your ideas about molecules.
name of process .......................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]

8
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a geothermal power station. It generates electricity.
generating
station
cold water hot water

pumped down rises to the surface
Fig. 5.1
(a) In a geothermal power station, the process of generating electricity includes seven stages.
Four of the stages are shown below.
P steam turns a turbine

Q hot underground rocks heat the cold water
R the turbine spins a generator
S hot water rises to the surface
The flow chart in Fig. 5.2 shows the seven stages, but it is incomplete. Complete the flow
chart by adding the letters P, Q, R and S in the correct sequence.
cold water is pumped down
hot water produces steam
electricity is generated
Fig. 5.2
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/31/M/J/18

9
(b) The cost of electrical energy obtained from a geothermal power station is similar to the cost of
electrical energy obtained from wind turbines.
Describe one advantage and one disadvantage of using a geothermal power station to
generate electricity compared with using wind turbines.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]

10
6 A student constructs a device for absorbing thermal energy from the Sun. Fig. 6.1 shows the
device.
Sun
thermometer
Tank A
cold water thermometer
white plastic pipe

Tank B
warm water
Fig. 6.1
The student places the white plastic pipe in sunlight. The cold water flows slowly from Tank A to
Tank B. Energy from the Sun heats the water in the pipe.
Fig. 6.2 shows the temperatures in Tank A and Tank B.
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

°C
Thermometer showing temperature in Tank A.
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

°C
Thermometer showing temperature in Tank B.
Fig. 6.2
(a) Determine the rise in temperature of the water.
temperature rise = .................................................... ° C [1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/31/M/J/18

11
(b) The student wants to increase the thermal energy absorbed by the water in the pipe. Suggest
three improvements he can make to increase the thermal energy absorbed.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Describe how the thermal energy is transferred from the Sun to the water inside the pipe.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

12
7 The spectrum of white light is made up of seven colours.
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows a partially-completed spectrum. Two labels are missing.
violet indigo green orange red
Fig. 7.1
(i) On Fig. 7.1, write the name of the missing colour in each blank space. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 7.1, indicate the direction of increasing wavelength for the spectrum. Draw an
arrow in the box below the spectrum of colours. [1]
(b) A ray of red light strikes one face of a triangular glass prism as shown in Fig. 7.2.
ray of red light

glass prism
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw the path of the ray as it travels through the glass prism and enters
the air. [2]
(ii) State the term used to describe what happens to the ray of red light as it enters and
leaves the prism.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/31/M/J/18

13
8 This question is about measuring the speed of sound in air.
A student stands in front of a large wall. She hits a drum and hears an echo. Fig. 8.1 shows the
position of the student and the wall.
wall
student
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) State the name of a piece of equipment for measuring the distance from the student to
the wall.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain how sound forms an echo.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The student hits her drum repeatedly once per second. She walks away from the wall and
listens for the echo. When the student is 170 m from the wall she hears the echo from one
beat of the drum at the same time as the next beat of the drum.
Use this information to determine the speed of sound. State the unit.
speed = .......................................................... [4]
[Total: 6]

14
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a partially-labelled diagram of the electromagnetic spectrum.
A B
gamma ray ultraviolet visible infra-red radio
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.1, add the names of the missing radiations at A and at B. [2]
(ii) Indicate the radiation that has the lowest frequency. On Fig. 9.1, draw a ring around the
radiation. [1]
(b) State two safety precautions when handling sources that emit gamma radiation.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2018 0625/31/M/J/18

15
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit for determining the resistance of a component.
Fig. 10.1
(a) On Fig. 10.1, label the fixed resistor, by writing the letter R. [1]
(b) Two components in Fig. 10.1 measure electrical quantities.
Identify the quantity that each component measures.
Write each quantity and the unit of each quantity in the correct place in Table 10.1.
component quantity unit
Table 10.1
[4]
(c) A student uses the circuit in Fig. 10.1 to determine the resistance of wires made from the
same material.
State how the resistance of a wire is related to its length and its diameter.
length ........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
diameter ....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]

16
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a vertical conductor passing through a horizontal piece of card.
conductor
card
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 11.1, draw a cell and a switch in series with the conductor to form a complete
circuit.
Use the correct circuit symbols. [2]
(ii) A student sprinkles iron filings onto the card and closes the switch. There is a current in
the conductor. Describe the pattern of the magnetic field seen.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) The student reverses the direction of the current in the conductor. State the effect, if any,
on the pattern he sees.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/31/M/J/18

17
(b) Describe an experiment to show that a force acts on a current-carrying conductor in a

magnetic field. Show how to arrange the equipment. Include a diagram in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 9]

18
12 Radioactive decay may include the emission of:
α-radiation
β-radiation
γ-radiation
(a) (i) From the list, state the type of radiation which has the greatest ionising effect.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) From the list, state the type of radiation which has the lowest penetrating ability.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In a factory, rollers press aluminium metal to make thin foil sheets. An automatic system for
controlling the thickness of the foil uses a radioactive source. The automatic system changes
the gap between the top and bottom roller. Fig. 12.1 shows the equipment.
radioactive
rollers source thin
aluminium
radiation foil
radiation
detector
roller controller counter
Fig. 12.1
(i) Use your ideas about the properties of radiation to suggest and explain the type of
radiation used.
type of radiation .................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/31/M/J/18

19
(ii) The aluminium foil passing the radiation detector is too thin. Describe how this fault
affects the reading on the counter.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Suggest how the fault in (b)(ii) is corrected. State what happens to the rollers.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) The source used is strontium-90. A nucleus of strontium-90 can be described as 90 Sr.
38
State the number of protons in a nucleus of strontium-90.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/31/M/J/18

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/31/M/J/18

* 4 6 3 1 4 8 2 8 7 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/32
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/CGW) 150266/5
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a car.
25
speed
m/s X Y
20
15
10
5
Z
W
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, the labels W, X, Y and Z show the points when the car’s motion changed.
On Fig. 1.2, draw a line from each section of the graph to the correct description of the motion.
section of graph description of the motion
accelerating
from W to X
decelerating
from X to Y
stationary
from Y to Z
constant speed
Fig. 1.2 [3]
(b) Calculate the distance that the car travels between 60 s and 100 s.
distance travelled = ...................................................... m [3]
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows that the car’s acceleration is greater than its deceleration.
Explain how the graph shows this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/M/J/18

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a wooden raft. The raft is made from 8 logs.
The logs are all of the same type of wood.
log of wood
Fig. 2.1
(a) The average mass of each log is 65.0 kg.
Calculate the total weight of the raft.
total weight of the raft = ....................................................... N [3]
(b) (i) The mass of one of the logs is 66.0 kg. It is 3.0 m long and has a cross sectional area of
0.040 m2.
Calculate the density of the wood in the log.
density = ............................................... kg / m3 [3]
(ii) Explain why the log in (b)(i) floats on water.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

4
3 A man uses a metal bar to remove an iron nail from a piece of wood, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
150 N
nail 0.50 m
wood
pivot
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) The man applies a force of 150 N at a distance of 0.50 m from the pivot.
Calculate the moment of this force about the pivot. Include a unit.
moment = ...........................................................[4]
(ii) The force applied by the man produces a turning effect (moment) about the pivot.
Describe another example of using the turning effect of a force.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The man tries to use the metal bar to remove another nail from the piece of wood. He applies
the same force of 150 N at a distance of 0.50 m from the pivot.
The turning effect produced is not enough to remove this nail from the piece of wood.
Describe how the man can increase the turning effect without increasing the force.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/M/J/18

5
4 A Bunsen burner heats a beaker of water, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
thermometer
stand
beaker
water
Bunsen burner
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) Fig. 4.2 shows the thermometer used in Fig. 4.1.
State the temperature shown on the thermometer.
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

°C
Fig. 4.2
temperature = .................................................... ° C [1]
(ii) The thermometer shown in Fig. 4.2 uses a physical property that changes with
temperature.
Indicate the measurable property that changes with temperature. Tick one box.
expansion of glass
expansion of liquid
colour of liquid
colour of glass [1]

6
(b) Thermal energy (heat) transfers through the bottom of the beaker to the water.
State the name given to this process.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Thermal energy transfers throughout the water in the beaker.
Describe and explain how this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/M/J/18

7
5 Fig. 5.1 represents an object positioned on the principal axis of a thin lens.
principal
axis
object
F F
Fig. 5.1
Each small square of the grid represents 0.5 cm. Each principal focus of the lens is labelled F.
(a) Use the grid to determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ..................................................... cm [1]
(b) (i) On Fig. 5.1, draw a ray from the top of the object that passes through a principal focus,
then through the lens and beyond it.
[1]
(ii) On Fig. 5.1, draw a second ray from the top of the object that passes through the centre
of the lens. Continue the path of this ray to the edge of the grid. [1]
(iii) On Fig. 5.1, draw an arrow to show the position and nature of the image produced by the
lens. [2]
[Total: 5]

8
6 Nuclear fission is used in nuclear power stations to release thermal energy.
(a) Describe how the thermal energy is used to generate electricity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Describe two environmental problems that are due to using nuclear power stations.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/M/J/18

9
7 Fig. 7.1 shows some parts of the electromagnetic spectrum.
radio infra-red visible ultraviolet

X-rays γ-rays
waves waves light waves
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i) In Fig. 7.1, one part of the electromagnetic spectrum is not labelled.
State the name of this part.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The speed of visible light waves in a vacuum is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
Suggest a value for the speed of infra-red waves in a vacuum.
speed = .................................................. m / s [1]
(iii) Some parts of the electromagnetic spectrum have a wavelength shorter than that of
visible light.
State one example.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) X-rays and γ-rays are used in hospitals.
Describe one medical use for X-rays and one use for γ-rays.
X-rays ................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
γ-rays .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Explain why γ-rays are dangerous to living things.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

10
8 (a) Complete the sentences about sound. Use words from the box above each sentence.
(i) glows reflects refracts vibrates
Sound is produced when a source .............................................. . [1]
(ii) electromagnetic longitudinal transverse
Sound waves are .............................................. waves. [1]
(iii) metal vacuum liquid
Sound waves cannot travel through a .............................................. . [1]
(b) Humans, elephants, mice and dolphins have different hearing ranges. Fig. 8.1 shows the
hearing range for each type of animal.
1000 000
100 000
frequency / Hz
10 000
1000
100
10
0
humans elephants mice dolphins
Fig. 8.1
(i) State the lowest frequency of sound that can be heard by mice.
................................................................................................................................ Hz [1]
(ii) State the highest frequency of sound that can be heard by elephants.
................................................................................................................................ Hz [1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/M/J/18

11
(iii) Explain how the chart shows that elephants can hear some sounds that humans cannot
hear.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iv) State the term given to the high frequencies that dolphins can hear but humans cannot
hear.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a simple circuit.
A 0.50 A
V
12.0 Ω 6.0 Ω
Fig. 9.1
(i) The current in the wires of the circuit is a flow of particles.

Indicate the name of these particles. Tick one box.
electrons
atoms
protons [1]
(ii) Calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors.
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [1]
(iii) Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) reading that would be shown on the voltmeter.
potential difference (p.d.) = ...................................................... V [3]
(b) The circuit is changed.

The two resistors are connected in parallel.
Explain what happens, if anything, to the current reading on the ammeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/M/J/18

13
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a balloon hanging from an insulating thread.
insulating
thread
balloon
Fig. 10.1
(i) A student gives the balloon a positive charge.
Which statement explains why the balloon becomes positively charged? Tick one box.
The balloon gains electrons
The balloon loses electrons
The balloon gains protons
The balloon loses protons [1]

14
(ii) The student brings a charged rod close to the balloon as shown in Fig. 10.2.
+ +
+ +
+
+ +
charged +
+ +
rod + + +
Fig. 10.2
State the type of charge on the rod.
..................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Electrical charges can move easily through some materials.
Draw a circle around each material that charges can move through easily.
copper plastic rubber silver wood [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/M/J/18

15
11 Fig. 11.1 represents a transformer.
a.c. input Q
primary coil
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i) State the name of the part of the transformer labelled Q in Fig. 11.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) In Fig. 11.1, part P is made from a metal.
1. State the metal used to make part P. ..........................................................................
2. State the term given to part P. ....................................................................................

[2]
(iii) There is an alternating current (a.c.) in the primary coil.
Describe what this current produces in part P.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iv) Complete the sentence using terms from the box.
more fewer step-up step-down
When there are ......................... turns in the primary coil than in Q, the device is called a
......................... transformer. [1]
(b) The high-voltage transmission of electricity uses transformers.
Describe two advantages of transmitting electricity at high voltages rather than at low voltages.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
16
12 (a) The nuclide notation AZ X describes the nucleus of one type of atom.
Draw a line from each symbol to the correct description for that symbol.
symbol description
number of neutrons
A
element symbol
Z proton number
nucleon number
X
number of atoms
[3]
(b) (i) One radioactive isotope has a half-life of 6.0 years.

A sample of this isotope has a mass of 12 mg.
Calculate the mass of this isotope that remains in the sample after 18 years.
mass remaining = .................................................... mg [3]
(ii) The sample decays by emitting a β-particle.
Describe the nature of a β-particle.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) Describe how the nucleus of the isotope changes due to the emission of a β-particle.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/32/M/J/18

* 5 5 6 1 4 9 8 2 8 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/33
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/CGW) 150267/3
2
1 A student watches a car race around a track. He uses a stopwatch to measure the time for the car
to make one lap of the track.
(a) The student forgets to reset the stopwatch at the start of the race. Fig. 1.1 shows the time on
the stopwatch at the start and the time after going around the track once.
time at start time after going around the track once
min s 1 s min s 1 s
100 100
01:22. 02:33.
Fig. 1.1
Calculate the time the car takes to go around the track once, in seconds.
time = ....................................................... s [2]
(b) The length of the track is 4.0 km. The car goes around the track 20 times. The car takes
26 minutes and 40 seconds to complete the 20 laps.
Calculate the average speed of the car in m / s.
average speed = .................................................. m / s [4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/33/M/J/18

3
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows a speed-time graph for the car during part of the race.
80.0
speed V
m/s T
S
60.0
R
Q
40.0
20.0
P
0
0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(i) State the section of the graph that shows the greatest acceleration.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Calculate the distance travelled by the car during the first 2.5 seconds.
distance = ...................................................... m [3]
[Total: 11]

4
2 A student is using some 50 g masses.
(a) Calculate the weight of one 50 g mass.
weight of 50 g mass = ...................................................... N [3]
(b) The student uses the 50 g masses as loads to stretch a spring.
Fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus the student uses to obtain readings for a load-extension graph.
spring
pin
stand
50 g masses 50 g mass
rule
hanger
Fig. 2.1 (NOT to scale)
Describe how the student could use the apparatus and ensure that the readings are accurate.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/33/M/J/18

5
3 (a) The mass of a small steel ball is 120 g. The volume of the ball is 16.0 cm3.
(i) Calculate the density of the steel ball.
density = ............................................... g / cm3 [3]
(ii) The ball falls to the ground from rest. At a time of 0.2 s after it started to fall, its acceleration
is 10 m / s2.
State the acceleration of the ball at a time of 0.1 s after it started to fall.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows the vertical forces that act on a large plastic ball as it is falling.
0.3 N
large plastic
ball
1.2 N
(i) State the name given to each of the forces shown in Fig. 3.1.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) Calculate the size of the resultant force on the ball.
resultant force = ...................................................... N [1]
[Total: 6]

6
4 A lamp is attached to a wall, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
90.0 cm
lamp
pivot
wall
25.0 N
Fig. 4.1
Calculate the moment of the lamp about the pivot. Give the unit.
moment = .......................................................... [4]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/33/M/J/18

7
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a metal can containing air. The can is sealed with a lid.
lid
can
Fig. 5.1
The air in the can exerts a pressure of 20 000 N / m2 on the lid. The area of the can lid is 0.09 m2.
Calculate the force on the lid due to the air in the can.
force = ...................................................... N [3]
(b) The air in the can becomes warmer.
State and explain what happens to the pressure of the air in the can. Use your ideas about
gas molecules.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 6]

8
6 A student investigates the thermal energy lost from two metal cans, X and Y. The cans are identical
apart from their outside colour.
The student pours the same volume of hot water into each can and seals each can. The student
records the temperature of the water in each can at regular time intervals for a period of 35
minutes.
The equipment is shown in Fig. 6.1.
thermometer thermometer
hot water hot water
can X can Y
Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.2 is a graph of the results from the investigation.
80
temperature / °C
60
40
can X
can Y
20
0
0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0
time / minutes
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2018 0625/33/M/J/18

9
(a) For can X, use Fig. 6.2 to determine the drop in temperature of the water
(i) in the first five minutes
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) in the last five minutes.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain why the water cools at a greater rate during the first five minutes of the experiment,
compared with the last five minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The outside of one can is dull black and the outside of the other is shiny white.
State the colour of can Y. ......................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]

10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an incomplete diagram of the electromagnetic spectrum.
wavelength / m
1m 10−1 10−2 10−3 10−4 10−5 10−6 10−7 10−8 10−9 10−10 10−11 10−12 10−13
A microwaves infra-red B ultraviolet X-rays γ-rays
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i) In Fig. 7.1, section A and section B of the electromagnetic spectrum are not labelled.
State the names of these parts.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) An electromagnetic wave has a wavelength of 1.0 × 10–9 m. Use Fig. 7.1 to identify the
type of electromagnetic wave.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) All electromagnetic waves travel at the same speed in a vacuum.
State one other property that is the same for all electromagnetic waves.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) For each purpose, state one type of electromagnetic radiation that can be used.
(i) remote controllers for televisions
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) killing bacterial cells
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/33/M/J/18

11
8 (a) The boxes contain words about waves.
Complete each sentence. Choose a term from each box.
(i) an electromagnetic a longitudinal a transverse
Sound travels as .............................................. wave. [1]
(ii) amplitude pitch speed wavelength
A loud sound has a large .............................................. . [1]
(iii) amplitude pitch speed wavelength
A student listens to two sounds. The sound with the higher frequency has a higher
.............................................. . [1]
(b) Explain what is meant by the term ultrasound.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

12
9 A student magnetises a steel rod by using a permanent magnet.
(a) Describe a method that the student could use. You may draw a diagram to help you.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain how the student could test that the steel rod has been magnetised.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Magnets can be made from soft iron or from steel.
State one difference between the magnetic properties of soft iron and steel.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2018 0625/33/M/J/18

13
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows an electrical circuit.
12 V power supply
A X
Fig. 10.1
(i) State the name for the component labelled X and state its function in this circuit.
name for component .........................................................................................................
function ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe how the circuit shown in Fig. 10.1 could be used to find the resistance of the
fixed resistor R.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) An electrical heater has a resistance of 21.8 Ω when connected to a 240 V mains supply.
(i) Calculate the current in the heater.
current = ....................................................... A [3]
(ii) Suggest a rating for the fuse to be fitted to the mains plug for the heater.
fuse rating = ....................................................... A [1]
[Total: 9]
14
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a coil (solenoid) wrapped around a plastic tube. There is a current in the coil.
The arrows show the direction of the current in the coil.
plastic tube
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, draw the pattern of the magnetic field lines around the coil.
Add arrows to show the direction of the magnetic field. [3]
(b) A long soft iron bar is placed inside the plastic tube. There is a current in the coil. This forms a
device. State the name of the device.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/33/M/J/18

15
(c) Fig. 11.2 shows a relay operated by switch S.
springy metal M
A
contacts
B
pivot
insulator
soft iron armature
soft iron core

coil of
wire
Fig. 11.2
Using Fig. 11.2, describe how closing the switch, S, causes the electric motor to operate.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
........................................... ....................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 8]

16
12 (a) Fig. 12.1 shows a diagram to represent a helium atom, and an incomplete key.
key
proton
......................................
......................................
......................................
Fig. 12.1
Complete the key in Fig. 12.1. State the name of each particle. [2]
(b) The table in Fig. 12.2 compares two isotopes of helium.
3
2 He 5
2 He
number of protons
number of neutrons
Fig. 12.2
For each isotope, write the number of protons and the number of neutrons in the correct
places in the table. [2]
(c) The nucleus of the helium atom in (a) is the same as an α-particle.
(i) Describe the penetrating ability of α-particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why it is dangerous to swallow a source that emits α-particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/33/M/J/18

* 5 4 9 8 1 5 2 3 9 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) May/June 2018
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CE/SW) 150767/5
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a vehicle accelerating from rest.
30
speed 25
m/s
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the acceleration of the vehicle at time = 30 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Without further calculation, state how the acceleration at time = 100 s compares to the
acceleration at time = 10 s. Suggest, in terms of force, a reason why any change has taken
place.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Determine the distance travelled by the vehicle between time = 120 s and time = 160 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a fork-lift truck lifting a box.
box
Fig. 2.1
The electric motor that drives the lifting mechanism is powered by batteries.
(a) State the form of the energy stored in the batteries.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The lifting mechanism raises a box of mass 32 kg through a vertical distance of 2.5 m in 5.4 s.
(i) Calculate the gravitational potential energy gained by the box.
gravitational potential energy = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The efficiency of the lifting mechanism is 0.65 (65%).
Calculate the input power to the lifting mechanism.
input power = ...........................................................[3]
(c) The batteries are recharged from a mains voltage supply that is generated in an oil-fired
power station.
By comparison with a wind farm, state one advantage and one disadvantage of running a
power station using oil.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

4
3 A rectangular container has a base of dimensions 0.12 m × 0.16 m. The container is filled with a
liquid. The mass of the liquid in the container is 4.8 kg.
(a) Calculate
(i) the weight of liquid in the container,
weight = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the pressure due to the liquid on the base of the container.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Explain why the total pressure on the base of the container is greater than the value calculated
in (a)(ii).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The depth of liquid in the container is 0.32 m.
Calculate the density of the liquid.
density = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

5
4 (a) Describe the movement of the molecules in
(i) a solid,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) a gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A closed box contains gas molecules.
Explain, in terms of momentum, how the molecules exert a pressure on the walls of the box.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 7]

6
5 (a) A ray of light in air is incident on a glass block. The light changes direction.
State
(i) the name of this effect,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the cause of this effect.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 5.1, drawn to full scale, shows a thin converging lens of focal length 3.5 cm.
1.0 cm lens
1.0 cm
Fig. 5.1
(i) On Fig. 5.1, mark each of the two principal focuses and label each with the letter F. [1]
(ii) An object O of height 4.4 cm is placed a distance of 7.5 cm from the lens.
On Fig. 5.1, draw rays from the tip of the object O to locate the image. Draw and label
the image. [3]
(iii) Determine the height of the image.
height of the image = ...........................................................[1]
(iv) State and explain whether the image is real or virtual.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18
7
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts approaching a gap in a barrier.
wavefront
barrier
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw three wavefronts to the right of the barrier. [2]
(ii) Fig. 6.2 shows the gap in the barrier increased to five times the gap in Fig. 6.1.
wavefront
barrier
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw three wavefronts to the right of the barrier. [2]

8
(b) Describe, with a labelled diagram, an experiment using water waves that shows the reflection
of wavefronts that occur at a straight barrier.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

9
BLANK PAGE

10
7 (a) State, in terms of their structure, why metals are good conductors of electricity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A cylindrical metal wire W1, of length l and cross-sectional area A, has a resistance of 16 Ω.
l
A second cylindrical wire W2 having length 2 and cross-sectional area 2 A, is made from the
same metal.
Determine
(i) the resistance of W2,
resistance of W2 = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the effective resistance of W1 and W2 when connected in parallel.
resistance of parallel pair = ...........................................................[2]
(c) The parallel pair of resistors in (b)(ii) is connected to a battery that is made from three cells in
series, each of electromotive force (e.m.f.) E. There is a current in each resistor.
(i) State the e.m.f. of the battery.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The current in the battery is IB, the current in W1 is I1 and the current in W2 is I2.
Place a tick (3) in one box to indicate how these three currents are related.
I1 > I2 > IB
I1 > IB > I2
I2 > I1 > IB
I2 > IB > I1
IB > I1 > I2
IB > I2 > I1
I1 = I2 = IB
[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

11
8 In a laboratory at normal room temperature, 200 g of water is poured into a beaker. A thermometer
placed in the water has a reading of 22 °C.
Small pieces of ice at 0 °C are added to the water one by one. The mixture is stirred after each
addition until the ice has melted. This process is continued until the temperature recorded by the
thermometer is 0 °C.
The total mass of ice added to the water is found to be 60 g.
(a) The specific heat capacity of water is 4.2 J/(g °C).
Calculate the thermal energy lost by the water originally in the beaker.
thermal energy = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Assume that all the thermal energy lost by the water originally in the beaker is transferred to
the ice.
Calculate the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.
specific latent heat of fusion of ice = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Suggest a reason for any inaccuracy in the value of the specific latent heat of fusion of ice
calculated in (b). Assume the temperature readings and the values for the mass of the water
and the mass of the ice are accurate.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]

12
9 (a) A student wants to demagnetise a permanent bar magnet. She suggests these steps:
1. Place the magnet in a long coil.

2. Switch on a large alternating current in the coil.
3. Switch off the current.
4. Remove the bar from the coil.
State and explain whether the steps will always be able to demagnetise the magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) (i) Fig. 9.1 shows a coil supplied with current using a split-ring commutator.
coil
magnet
S
N split-ring
carbon brush
battery
Fig. 9.1
State and explain any motion of the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

13
(ii) The coil in Fig. 9.1 consists of three turns of wire. The magnetic field strength of the
magnet is M. With a current of 2.0 A in the coil, the coil experiences a turning effect T.
The first row of Table 9.1 shows this data.
Table 9.1
magnetic field
number of turns current in the coil / A turning effect
strength
3 2.0 M T
3 8.0 M
6 2.0 M
M
3 2.0 2
Complete Table 9.1 to give the turning effect for the changes made to the arrangement
shown in Fig. 9.1. Choose your answers from the box.
T T T
8 4 2 T 2T 4T 8T
[3]
[Total: 9]

14
10 (a) Explain why the voltage of the supply to the primary coil of a transformer must be alternating.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a transformer.
A
240 V 8000
mains turns
Fig. 10.1
There are 8000 turns in the primary coil of the transformer. The primary coil is connected to a
240 V mains supply. A 6.0 V lamp connected to the secondary coil operates at full brightness.
(i) Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil,
number of turns = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The current in the lamp is 2.0 A. The transformer operates with 100% efficiency.
Calculate the current in the primary circuit.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) The primary circuit contains a 2 A fuse.
Calculate the maximum number of lamps, identical to the lamp in (ii), that can be
connected in parallel in the secondary circuit without blowing the fuse.
number of lamps = ...........................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18
15
222
11 Radon-222 is radioactive. It can be represented as 86
Rn.
(a) For a neutral atom of radon-222, state
1. the number of protons, ...........................
2. the number of neutrons, ...........................
3. the number of electrons. ...........................

[2]
(b) A radon-222 nucleus decays by α-particle emission to a polonium (Po) nucleus.
Complete the equation for the decay of radon-222.
222
86
Rn [2]
(c) Radon-222 has a half-life of 3.8 days.
At a certain time, a sample contains 6.4 × 106 radon nuclei.
Calculate the number of α-particles emitted by the radon nuclei in the following 7.6 days.
number = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

* 0 9 3 9 7 7 2 1 6 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CE/SW) 150768/5
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows the axes of a distance-time graph for an object moving in a straight line.
80
distance / m
60
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) 1. On Fig. 1.1, draw between time = 0 and time = 10 s, the graph for an object moving
with a constant speed of 5.0 m / s. Start your graph at distance = 0 m.
2. State the property of the graph that represents speed.
....................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Between time = 10 s and time = 20 s the object accelerates. The speed at time = 20 s is
9.0 m / s.
Calculate the average acceleration between time = 10 s and time = 20 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

3
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows the axes of a speed-time graph for a different object.
50
speed
m/s
40
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(i) The object has an initial speed of 50 m / s and decelerates uniformly at 0.35 m / s2 for
100 s.
On Fig. 1.2, draw the graph to represent the motion of the object. [2]
(ii) Calculate the distance travelled by the object from time = 0 to time = 100 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 9]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a hollow metal cylinder containing air, floating in the sea.
surface
of sea air
1.8 m
1.2 m
seawater
bottom
Fig. 2.1
(a) The density of the metal used to make the cylinder is greater than the density of seawater.
Explain why the cylinder floats.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The cylinder has a length of 1.8 m. It floats with 1.2 m submerged in the sea. The bottom of
the cylinder has an area of cross-section of 0.80 m2.
The density of seawater is 1020 kg / m3. Calculate the force exerted on the bottom of the
cylinder due to the depth of the seawater.
force = ...........................................................[4]
(c) Deduce the weight of the cylinder. Explain your answer.
weight = ...............................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18
5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows an aircraft on the deck of an aircraft carrier.
Fig. 3.1
The aircraft accelerates from rest along the deck. At take-off, the aircraft has a speed of 75 m / s.
The mass of the aircraft is 9500 kg.
(a) Calculate the kinetic energy of the aircraft at take-off.
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[3]
(b) On an aircraft carrier, a catapult provides an accelerating force on the aircraft. The catapult
provides a constant force for a distance of 150 m along the deck.
Calculate the resultant force on the aircraft as it accelerates. Assume that all of the kinetic
energy at take-off is from the work done on the aircraft by the catapult.
force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 represents an atom.
Fig. 4.1
Representing atoms by circles approximately the same size as in Fig. 4.1, sketch
(i) on Fig. 4.2, the arrangement of atoms in a crystalline solid, [1]
(ii) on Fig. 4.3, the arrangement of atoms in a gas. [1]
solid gas
Fig. 4.2 Fig. 4.3
(b) (i) Describe the motion of the atoms in a solid.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A sculptor makes a statue from a block of crystalline rock using a cutting tool. Explain
why he must apply a large force to the tool to remove a small piece of rock.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A helium-filled balloon in the room of a house suddenly bursts.
State and explain, in terms of atoms, what happens to the helium from the balloon after the
balloon has burst.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

7
5 A student wants to investigate good and bad absorbers of thermal radiation. She has the apparatus
shown in Fig. 5.1, a supply of cold water and a metre rule.
small polished small 2 thermometers electric heater

can black-painted
can
Fig. 5.1
Explain how the student could use the apparatus she has available to carry out her investigation.
Describe the results she would expect to obtain. Draw a diagram of the set-up.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 4]

8
6 (a) Circle two of the following that apply to an ultrasound wave travelling in air.
frequency 3.5 Hz frequency 350 Hz frequency 35 000 Hz longitudinal
transverse speed 1.5 m / s speed 1.5 × 103 m / s speed 1.5 × 106 m / s
[2]
(b) Calculate the wavelength in a vacuum of X-rays of frequency 1.3 × 1017 Hz.
wavelength = ...........................................................[3]
(c) A dentist takes an X-ray photograph of a patient’s teeth. Explain why it is safe for the patient
to be close to the source of X-rays, but the dentist must stand away from the source.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) State, with a reason, why microwave ovens are designed only to work with the door closed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

9
BLANK PAGE

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light in water that is incident on a submerged, transparent plastic
block.
water
plastic
Fig. 7.1
State what happens to the speed of light as it enters the plastic block. Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows the two principal focuses F1 and F2 of a thin converging lens.
F1 F2
O
lens
1.0 cm
1.0 cm
Fig. 7.2
Fig. 7.2 also shows an object O of height 1.2 cm placed close to the lens. Two rays from the
tip of the object O are incident on the lens.
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

11
(i) On Fig. 7.2, continue the paths of these two rays for a further distance of at least 5 cm.
[2]
(ii) Using your answer to (b)(i), find and mark on Fig. 7.2 the image I of object O and label
this image. [2]
(iii) Determine the height of image I.
height = ...........................................................[1]
(iv) State and explain whether I is a real image or a virtual image.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit that contains a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 6.0 V, an ammeter, a
20 Ω resistor and component X.
6.0 V
A X
20 Ω
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) State the name of component X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The potential difference (p.d.) across the 20 Ω resistor is measured with a voltmeter.
On Fig. 8.1, draw the symbol for this voltmeter connected to the circuit. [1]
(b) The p.d. across the 20 Ω resistor is varied from zero to 6.0 V. For each value of p.d. a
corresponding current is measured.
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

13
On Fig. 8.2, draw a line to indicate how the current measured by the ammeter depends on
the p.d. across the 20 Ω resistor.
0.40
current / A
0.30
0.20
0.10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
p.d. / V
Fig. 8.2 [3]
(c) A second resistor is connected into the circuit in parallel with the 20 Ω resistor.
(i) State how the combined resistance of the two resistors in parallel compares with the
resistance of each of the resistors on its own.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The p.d. across the two parallel resistors is changed and the current in the battery for
each value of the p.d. is measured. A second line could be drawn on Fig. 8.2 to indicate
how the current measured by the ammeter depends on the p.d. across the two resistors
in parallel.
State how the second line differs from the original line. You are not expected to draw this
second line.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

14
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a coil ABCD with two turns. The coil is in a magnetic field.
B C
N S
A D
Fig. 9.1
When there is a current in the coil, the coil experiences a turning effect.
(i) Explain why there is a turning effect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The value of the current is 3 A. Place one tick in each column of the table to indicate how
the turning effect changes with the change described.
turning effect number of turns on coil current strength of magnetic

increased to six increased to 9 A field decreased by a
factor of 2
decreased by factor of 4
no change
increased by factor of 2
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

15
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a magnet held just below a vertical coil connected to a galvanometer.
Fig. 9.2
The magnet is released.
(i) State any effect on the galvanometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State any effect on the magnetic field produced by the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

16
10 (a) An uncharged conducting metal plate rests on insulating supports. Fig. 10.1 shows the plate
and a positively charged insulating plastic sheet placed on top of the metal plate.
plastic sheet
metal plate
insulating support insulating support
Fig. 10.1
(i) Describe any flow of charge that takes place when the plastic sheet is placed onto the
metal plate.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) On Fig. 10.1, draw how charges are now arranged within the metal plate. [1]
(iii) State and explain if this arrangement of charge helps to keep the plastic sheet in place.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

17
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows two uncharged conducting spheres suspended on insulating threads.
Fig. 10.2
1. The spheres are now both given positive charges. On Fig. 10.2, draw a possible position
of each sphere and thread.
2. Explain the positions you have drawn.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]

18
11 (a) A radioactive nucleus of uranium-235 decays to a nucleus of thorium and emits an α-particle.
Complete the equation.
235
92 U
.......
.......
Th + 42 α
[2]
(b) A nucleus of uranium-235 undergoes nuclear fission in a reactor.
(i) State what is meant by nuclear fission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why a nuclear reactor is surrounded by thick concrete walls.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State one environmental advantage and one environmental disadvantage of using a
fission reactor to generate electrical energy in a power station.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The thorium produced by the decay in (a) is also radioactive and has a half-life of 26 hours.
At a certain time, a pure sample of this isotope initially contains 4.8 × 109 atoms.
Calculate the number of atoms of this sample that decay in the following 52 hours.
number = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

* 5 7 1 8 2 9 1 8 0 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LEG/SG) 152968/4
2
1 There is no atmosphere on the Moon.
A space probe is launched from the surface of the Moon. Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of
the space probe.
5000
speed
m/s
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 100 200 300
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Determine the acceleration of the space probe at time = 0.
acceleration = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Between time = 0 and time = 150 s, the acceleration of the space probe changes.
(i) Without calculation, state how the graph shows this.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

3
(ii) During this time, the thrust exerted on the space probe by the motor remains constant.
State one possible reason why the acceleration changes in the way shown by Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Calculate the distance travelled by the space probe from time = 200 s to time = 300 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]

4
2 A rifle fires a bullet of mass 0.020 kg vertically upwards through the air. As it leaves the rifle, the
speed of the bullet is 350 m / s.
(a) Calculate
(i) the kinetic energy of the bullet as it leaves the rifle,
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) the maximum possible height that the bullet can reach.
maximum height = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The actual height reached by the bullet is less than the value calculated in (a)(ii).
(i) Explain, in terms of the forces acting on the bullet, why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) As the bullet rises through the air, its kinetic energy decreases.
State what happens to this energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

5
3 On a particular day, the atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. A bubble of gas forms at a point
5.0 m below the surface of a lake. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
(a) Determine
(i) the total pressure at a depth of 5.0 m in the water,
pressure = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) the pressure of the gas in the bubble.
pressure = ...........................................................[1]
(b) As the bubble rises to the surface, the mass of gas in the bubble stays constant. The
temperature of the water in the lake is the same throughout.
Explain why the bubble rises to the surface and why its volume increases as it rises.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

6
4 A beaker contains some water at room temperature. A student places a mercury-in-glass

thermometer in the water with the bulb of the thermometer just beneath the surface of the water.
Fig. 4.1 shows the arrangement.
thermometer
water
Fig. 4.1
The student uses an electric fan to blow air across the open top of the beaker. She notices that the
reading on the thermometer begins to decrease.
(a) Explain, in terms of water molecules, why the temperature of the water at the surface begins
to decrease.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The student places the thermometer near the bottom of the beaker. The electric fan continues
to blow air across the top of the beaker. After some time, the student observes that the
temperature of the water at the bottom of the beaker is decreasing.
State the name of the thermal transfer method causing this and explain what is happening in
the water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

7
(c) The thermometer used in this experiment has a small range and a large sensitivity.
(i) State what is meant by
1. range,
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. sensitivity.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain the effect on the range of the thermometer of using a smaller bulb that
contains less mercury.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

8
5 (a) A microscope that produces a very high magnification is used to observe the Brownian motion
of smoke particles in air.
Fig. 5.1(a) shows the apparatus used with the microscope. Fig. 5.1(b) represents the view
through the microscope and shows one of the smoke particles being observed.
smoke
particle
microscope
air molecules
light and
smoke particles
Fig. 5.1(a) Fig. 5.1(b)
(i) On Fig. 5.1(b), draw a possible path for the smoke particle. [2]
(ii) Describe how air molecules cause the smoke particle to follow the observed path.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a volume of gas in a cylinder.
piston
gas air at
atmospheric
pressure
Fig. 5.2
The piston in the cylinder is free to move. The piston moves to the left when the temperature
of the gas is decreased.
Explain, in terms of the molecules of the gas, why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18
9
6 Sound is a longitudinal wave.
(a) Sketch a representation of a longitudinal wave. On your sketch
• indicate and label a distance to show the wavelength,

• mark and label the centre of one compression,
• mark and label the centre of one rarefaction.
[3]
(b) A longitudinal wave passes from one medium into another medium. The speed of the wave is
slower in the second medium.
State what happens to
(i) the frequency of the wave,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the wavelength of the wave.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) State a typical value for the speed of sound in air.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]

10
7 (a) A ray of light travelling in air strikes a glass block at an angle of 30° to the normal. The light
slows down as it enters the glass block.
State and explain, in terms of wavefronts, what happens to the light.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The speed of light in this block of glass is 1.9 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
refractive index = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

11
8 (a) A thin converging lens is used to produce an image I of object O.
Fig. 8.1 shows O, I and the screen on which the image is produced.
screen
principal axis
1.0 cm
1.0 cm
Fig. 8.1
(i) On Fig. 8.1, draw a straight line to represent a ray from the tip of the arrowhead of O to
the tip of the arrowhead of I. Draw a vertical dotted line to indicate the position of the
lens. This dotted line must extend above and below the principal axis. [2]
(ii) Draw a second ray from the tip of the object O to the tip of image I. This ray should pass
through a principle focus. Label the principle focus, F. [1]
(iii) Determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ...........................................................[1]
(iv) Image I is further from the lens than object O is from the lens. Image I is described as
enlarged and inverted.
State and explain one other characteristic of I.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

12
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a spherical fishbowl, full of water, by a window. A black curtain hangs behind
the fishbowl.
window black curtain
fishbowl
bright
sunlight
water
Fig. 8.2
When full of water, the fishbowl can act as a converging lens.
Suggest one possible hazard of leaving the fishbowl next to the window in bright sunlight.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

13
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit that includes a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V.
12 V
A V
20 Ω
Fig. 9.1
The reading on the ammeter is 0.15 A.
(a) Calculate the resistance of the circuit.
resistance = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The variable resistor is adjusted so that its resistance decreases.
(i) State what happens to the reading on the ammeter.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the reading on the voltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The battery is formed from cells of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 1.5 V.
(i) Explain, in terms of electrical energy, what is meant by an electromotive force (e.m.f.)
of 1.5 V.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State how many 1.5 V cells are connected in series to form the battery.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) A bar magnet is held with its N-pole just inside one end of a coil.
Fig. 10.1 shows the coil connected to a galvanometer that has the zero mark in the centre of
the scale.
L
N S
Fig. 10.1
The magnet is pulled horizontally to the right at a constant speed through a large distance.
(i) State what happens to the galvanometer reading as time passes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) As the magnet moves, an N-pole is produced at the left-hand end L of the coil.
Explain why the pole at L is an N-pole.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A transformer has NP turns on the primary coil and NS turns on the secondary coil. The
transformer is used in a school laboratory as a 12 V alternating current (a.c.) supply. The
transformer is powered from the 240 V a.c. mains supply.
(i) Determine the turns ratio NP / NS of the transformer.
NP / NS = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The laboratory 12 V a.c. supply is rectified to produce a direct current (d.c.) supply.
Underline the component that the rectification circuit must include.
AND gate diode NOT gate potentiometer thermistor

[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18
15
11 (a) State the type of radioactive emission that causes
(i) the proton number of a nuclide to increase by 1,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the nucleon number of a nuclide to decrease by 4,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) no change in the proton number and no change in the nucleon number of a nuclide.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The isotope radon-220 is radioactive and it decays by α-particle emission.
(i) Fig. 11.1 shows a beam of α-particles entering the electric field between two charged
plates.
charged plate
+ + + + + + + + + +
electric
field
beam of
α-particles
– – – – – – – – – –
charged plate
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, sketch the path that the beam of α-particles follows in the electric field. [1]
(ii) The half-life of radon-220 is 56 s.
A sample of this isotope contains 7.2 × 106 atoms.
Predict the number of α-particles that the radon-220 in the sample emits in the next
168 s.
number of α-particles emitted = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

* 6 2 6 9 4 5 5 2 2 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/51
1 hour 15 minutes
Additional Materials: As listed in the Confidential Instructions

Total
DC (ST/CT) 150765/5
2
1 In this experiment, you will determine the acceleration of free fall g using a pendulum. Carry out
the following instructions, referring to Fig. 1.1 and Fig. 1.2.
clamp
clamp
one complete
bob
oscillation
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
A pendulum has been set up for you as shown in Fig. 1.1.
(a) Adjust the length of the pendulum until the distance d measured to the centre of the bob is
50.0 cm.
Displace the bob slightly and release it so that it swings. Fig. 1.2 shows one complete
oscillation of the pendulum.
(i) Measure the time t for 10 complete oscillations.
t = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the period T of the pendulum. The period is the time for one complete
oscillation.
T = .......................................................... [1]
(iii) Calculate T 2.
T 2 = .......................................................... [2]
(iv) Calculate the acceleration of free fall g using the equation g = 20 .

T2
g = .......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/51/M/J/18

3
(b) Adjust the pendulum until the distance d measured to the centre of the bob is 100.0 cm.
(i) Repeat the procedure in (a)(i), (a)(ii) and (a)(iii).
t = ...............................................................
T = ...............................................................
T 2 = ...............................................................
[1]
(ii) Calculate the acceleration of free fall g using the equation g = 40 .

T2
g = ...............................................................
[2]
(c) A student states that repeating the experiment improves the reliability of the value obtained
for g.
Suggest two changes that you would make to improve the reliability. The stopwatch cannot
be changed.
1. ............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
2. ............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) State one precaution that you took in this experiment in order to obtain accurate readings.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 11]

4
2 In this experiment, you will investigate resistance.
The circuit shown in Fig. 2.1 has been set up for you.
power supply
R1 R2 R3
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) Switch on. Measure and record the potential difference V1 across the resistor R1 and the
current I in the circuit. Switch off.
V1 = ...............................................................
I = ...............................................................
[2]
V1
(ii) Calculate the resistance of the resistor R1 using the equation R1 = .
I
R1 = .......................................................... [1]
(b) Disconnect the voltmeter.
Connect the voltmeter across the resistor R2. Switch on.
(i) Measure and record the potential difference V2 across the resistor R2. Switch off.
V2 = ...............................................................
V2
I
R2 = .......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/51/M/J/18

5
(c) Disconnect the voltmeter.
Connect the voltmeter across the resistor R3. Switch on.
(i) Measure and record the potential difference V3 across the resistor R3. Switch off.
V3 = ...............................................................
V3
I
R3 = .......................................................... [1]
(iii) Calculate the resistance R of resistors R1, R2 and R3 connected in series, using the
equation R = R1 + R2 + R3. Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures
for this experiment.
R = .......................................................... [1]
(d) State whether your results suggest that the three resistors have the same value of resistance.
Justify your statement by reference to your results.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

6
(e) Complete the circuit diagram in Fig. 2.2 to show:
You are not required to set up this circuit.
power supply
Fig. 2.2
[3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0625/51/M/J/18

7
BLANK PAGE

8
illuminated
object u v screen
lens
Fig. 3.1
(a) • Place the screen a distance D = 70.0 cm from the illuminated object.
• Place the lens between the object and the screen so that the lens is very close to the
screen.
• Move the lens slowly away from the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on
the screen.
(i) • Measure, and record in Table 3.1, the distance u between the centre of the lens and
the illuminated object.
• Measure, and record in the table, the distance v between the centre of the lens and
the screen.
(ii) Calculate the product uv. Record your answer in the table.
(iii) Repeat the procedure using values for D of 75.0 cm, 80.0 cm, 85.0 cm and 90.0 cm.
Table 3.1
D / cm u / cm v / cm uv / cm2
70.0
75.0
80.0
85.0
90.0
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/51/M/J/18

9
(b) Plot a graph of uv / cm2 (y-axis) against D / cm (x-axis). You do not need to start your axes at
the origin (0,0).
[4]
(c) The focal length f of the lens is numerically equal to the gradient of the line.
Determine the gradient G of the line. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
G = ...........................................................[2]
(d) Suggest two difficulties in this experiment when trying to obtain accurate readings.
1. ............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
2. ............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]

10
4 A student is investigating the effect of double-walled insulation on the rate of cooling of hot water
in a copper container. The student places the copper container inside a larger metal container. He
is investigating the effect of the size of the air gap between the copper container and larger metal
containers.
Plan an experiment to investigate the effect of the size of the air gap between the copper container
and larger metal containers on the rate of cooling of hot water.
The following apparatus is available:
a copper container
a number of metal containers of different diameters (all larger than the copper container)
a thermometer
a stopwatch
a measuring cylinder
a supply of hot water.
You can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.
You are not required to carry out this investigation.
• draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings
(you are not required to enter any readings in the table)
• explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.
You may draw a diagram if it helps your explanation.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2018 0625/51/M/J/18

11
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/51/M/J/18

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/51/M/J/18

* 8 3 5 3 9 4 6 6 6 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/52
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
DC (LEG/CGW) 150763/5
2
1 In this experiment, you will determine the density of water.
You are provided with a plastic drinks cup.
rim
cup
square A
base
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Place the cup, with the base at the bottom, in square A on this page. Draw carefully
around the base of the cup. Remove the cup from the paper. Take measurements from
your drawing to determine an accurate value for the diameter DB of the base of the cup.
Square A
DB = .................................................... cm [2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/M/J/18

3
(ii) Place the cup, with the rim at the bottom, in square B on this page. Draw carefully around
the rim of the cup.
Remove the cup from the paper. Take measurements from your drawing to determine
the diameter DT of the rim of the cup.
Square B
DT = .................................................... cm [1]
DB + DT
(iii) Calculate the average diameter D of the cup using the equation D = .
2
D = .................................................... cm [1]
(b) (i) Measure the vertical height h of the cup.
h = .................................................... cm [1]
(ii) 1. Calculate the volume V of the cup using the equation V = 0.785 D 2 h.
V = ....................................................... cm3
2. Calculate V / 2.
V / 2 = ....................................................... cm3
[1]

4
(c) You are provided with water in beaker W.
Pour a volume V / 2 of water into the measuring cylinder. Pour this water into the cup.
(i) Use the balance provided to measure the mass m of the cup containing the water.
m = ....................................................... g [1]
2m
(ii) Determine the density ρ of water using the equation ρ = .
V
Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment. Include
the unit.
ρ = .......................................................... [3]
(d) A student carries out all the instructions for this experiment with care, but his value for the
density of water ρ is not equal to the expected value.
Suggest, with a reason, a part of the procedure, (a), (b) or (c) that could give an unreliable
result.
part ................................
reason .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/M/J/18

5
BLANK PAGE

6
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.
thermometer
bench
Fig. 2.1
(a) Use the thermometer to measure room temperature θR.
θR = .......................................................... [1]
(b) Pour 200 cm3 of hot water into the beaker. Place the thermometer in the beaker of hot water.
• Record in Table 2.1 the temperature θ of the hot water at time t = 0 s. Immediately start
the stopclock.
• After 30 s, measure the temperature θ shown on the thermometer. Record the time
t = 30 s and the temperature reading in the table.
• Continue recording the time and temperature readings every 30 s until you have six sets
of readings.
[2]
Table 2.1
t/s θ / °C
0
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/M/J/18

7
(c) Plot a graph of θ / °C (y-axis) against t / s (x-axis). You do not need to start the y-axis at the
origin (0,0) but the value of room temperature θR must be marked on the y-axis.
[4]
(d) Draw a horizontal line across the graph grid to show the value of room temperature θR during
the experiment. [1]
(e) A student plans to repeat the experiment using the same thermometer and the same volume
of water. Suggest two changes to the apparatus or the procedure that would increase the
rate of cooling of the water.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(f) State one precaution that you took in order to record accurate readings.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 11]

8
illuminated
object u v
screen
lens
Fig. 3.1
(a) • Place the screen about 100 cm from the illuminated object.
• Place the lens between the object and the screen so that the centre of the lens is at a
distance u1 = 20.0 cm from the object.
• Adjust the position of the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on the screen.
(i) Measure the distance v1 between the centre of the lens and the screen.
v1 = .......................................................... [1]
u1v1
(ii) Calculate the focal length f1 of the lens using the equation f1 = .
(u1 + v1)
f1 = .......................................................... [1]
(b) (i) Repeat the procedure in (a), placing the lens between the object and the screen so that
the centre of the lens is at a distance u2 = 30.0 cm from the object.
v2 = .......................................................... [1]
u2v2
(ii) Calculate the focal length f2 of the lens using the equation f2 = .
(u2 + v2)
f2 = .......................................................... [2]
(c) Calculate the average value of the focal length f of the lens, using the two results from parts
(a) and (b). Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.
f = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/M/J/18

9
(d) The student states that taking more measurements improves the reliability of the value
obtained for f.
Suggest additional values for u that you would use.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) State two precautions that should be taken in this experiment to obtain accurate readings.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]

10
4 A student is investigating whether the distance that a toy truck will travel along a horizontal floor,
before stopping, depends on its mass.
The following apparatus is available to the student:
a ramp
blocks to support the ramp as shown in Fig. 4.1
toy truck
a selection of masses
other standard apparatus from the physics laboratory.
Plan an experiment to investigate whether the distance that the toy truck will travel along a
horizontal floor, before stopping, depends on its mass.
You are not required to carry out this investigation.
• state any apparatus that you would use that is not included in the list above
• draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your
readings (you are not required to enter any readings in the table).
You may add to the diagram in Fig. 4.1 to help your description.
ramp
floor
blocks
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/M/J/18

11
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/M/J/18

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/52/M/J/18

* 6 0 3 4 3 5 0 7 9 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/53
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
DC (ST/JG) 150761/5
2
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how partly covering the surface of the water in a beaker
affects the rate at which the water cools.
thermometer
lid partly covering surface
Fig. 1.1
lid A lid B
beaker uncovered area
uncovered area
Fig. 1.2 Fig. 1.3
(a) • Pour 100 cm3 of hot water into the beaker and cover half of it with lid A as shown in
Fig. 1.2. This leaves 50 % of the water surface uncovered.
• Place the thermometer into the hot water and record, in the first row of Table 1.1, the
temperature θ of the water at time t = 0. Immediately start the stopclock.
• Record, in the table, the temperature θ of the water at times t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s,

150 s and 180 s.
• Pour the water out of the beaker.
[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/53/M/J/18

3
(b) (i) Repeat (a), using lid B instead of lid A to cover more of the beaker as shown in Fig. 1.3.
This leaves only 25 % of the water surface uncovered. [1]
(ii) Complete the headings and the time t column in the table. [2]
Table 1.1
beaker with lid A beaker with lid B
t/ θ/ θ/
(c) (i) Write a conclusion to this experiment, stating for which lid the cooling rate is greater.
Explain your answer by reference to your results.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Suggest a change to the apparatus that could produce a greater difference between the
rates of cooling for lid A and lid B.
Explain why the change might produce a greater difference.
change ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

4
(d) A student thinks that the cooling rate is directly proportional to the percentage of the surface
area uncovered. He wants to draw a graph of cooling rate against the percentage of uncovered
area to investigate this.
Describe how his graph line will show whether the cooling rate and the percentage of surface
area uncovered are directly proportional.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) Students in other countries are carrying out the same experiment.
Suggest a factor that they should keep the same if they are to obtain similar readings.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0625/53/M/J/18

5
2 In this experiment, you will investigate a circuit containing resistors.

The fixed resistor must remain connected throughout the experiment.
Resistor X has a resistance R = 1 Ω.
fixed resistor
power supply
Fig. 2.1
(a) • Switch on.

Measure, and record in Table 2.1, the value of the current I in the circuit and the value of
the potential difference V across resistor X.
Switch off.
• Replace resistor X with resistor Y of value R = 3 Ω.

Repeat the above procedure.
• Replace resistor Y with resistor Z of value R = 10 Ω.

Repeat the above procedure.
[3]
Table 2.1
Resistor R/Ω I/ V/
X 1
Y 3
Z 10
(b) Add appropriate units to the column headings in the table. [1]

6
(c) Calculate the power P supplied to each of the resistors X, Y and Z.

Use your readings from (a) and the equation P = I × V.
Give your answers to a suitable number of significant figures.
Power P supplied to resistor X = ........................................................... W
Power P supplied to resistor Y = ........................................................... W
Power P supplied to resistor Z = ........................................................... W

[3]
(d) Describe how the value of the power P changes as R increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) A student wishes to investigate the relationship between P and R in more detail.
Suggest two modifications to the procedure that will enable him to do this.
1. ............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
2. ............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0625/53/M/J/18

7
BLANK PAGE

8
3 In this experiment, you will investigate the image produced by a converging lens.
triangular
object u screen
lens
ho
Fig. 3.1
(a) • Measure and record the height ho of the triangular object.
ho = .......................................................... cm
• Switch on the lamp.
• Set the distance between the triangular object and the lens, u, to 30.0 cm.
Move the screen until a clear focused image of the triangular object is seen.
Measure, and record in Table 3.1, the height hI of the image.
• Repeat the procedure for u values of 35.0 cm, 40.0 cm, 45.0 cm and 50.0 cm.
• Switch off the lamp.
Table 3.1
u / cm hI / cm N
30.0
35.0
40.0
45.0
50.0
[2]
(b) For each distance u, calculate, and record in the table, a value N using your results from (a)
h
and the equation N = o . [1]
hI
© UCLES 2018 0625/53/M/J/18

9
(c) Plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against N (x-axis). You do not need to start your axes at the
origin (0,0).
[4]
(d) Determine the gradient G of the graph.

Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
G = ...........................................................[2]
(e) Describe one difficulty that might be experienced when measuring the height of the image hI.
Suggest an improvement to the apparatus to overcome this difficulty.
difficulty .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
improvement .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]

10
4 A student is investigating the force needed to just slide a block across a surface.
Plan an experiment which will enable him to investigate how the force needed varies with the
mass of the block.
a light, flat wooden block fitted with a hook as shown in Fig. 4.1
a pulley which can be clamped to a bench.
flat block
hook
Fig. 4.1
• draw a clearly labelled diagram of how the apparatus will be arranged
• give brief instructions for carrying out the experiment
• describe any precautions which should be taken to ensure reliable results
• suggest a graph which could be drawn.
© UCLES 2018 0625/53/M/J/18

11
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/53/M/J/18

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/53/M/J/18

* 3 5 5 3 4 0 2 5 8 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/61
1 hour

DC (SC/CGW) 150894/5
2
1 A student is determining the acceleration of free fall g using a pendulum. Fig. 1.1 shows the
pendulum. Fig. 1.2 shows one complete oscillation of the pendulum.
clamp
clamp
bob one complete

oscillation
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
(a) On Fig. 1.1, measure the distance d.
d = ................................................... cm [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 is drawn 1/10th actual size.
(i) Calculate the actual distance D from the bottom of the clamp to the centre of the bob.
D = ................................................... cm [1]
The student displaces the bob slightly and releases it so that it swings. He measures the
time t for 10 complete oscillations. The time t is shown on the stopwatch in Fig. 1.3.
min sec
Fig. 1.3
(ii) Write down the time t shown in Fig. 1.3.
t = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) Calculate the period T of the pendulum. The period is the time for one complete
oscillation.
T = ......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/61/M/J/18

3
(iv) Calculate T 2.
T 2 = ......................................................... [1]
(v) Calculate the acceleration of free fall g using the equation g = 202 .
T
g = ......................................................... [1]
(c) The student adjusts the pendulum until the distance D measured to the centre of the bob
is 100.0 cm.
He repeats the procedure and obtains another value of T 2.

3.94
T 2 = ..............................................................
(i) On the dotted line above, write the unit for T 2. [1]
(ii) Calculate the acceleration of free fall g using the equation g = 402 and the value of T 2
T
from (c). Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.
g = ......................................................... [1]
(d) Another student states that repeating the experiment improves the reliability of the value
obtained for g.
Suggest two changes that you would make to improve the reliability. The stopwatch cannot
be changed.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) State one precaution that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain accurate
readings.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 11]

4
2 A student is investigating resistance.
She uses the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1.
power supply
R1 R2 R3
Fig. 2.1
(a) She measures the potential difference V1 across the resistor R1 and the current I in the
circuit.
Figs. 2.2 and 2.3 show the voltmeter and ammeter readings.
(i) Write down the readings shown on the meters in Figs. 2.2 and 2.3.
V1 = ..............................................................
I = ..............................................................
[2]
5 0.4 0.6
3 4 6 7
2 8 0.2 0.8
1 9
0 10 0 1.0
V A
Fig. 2.2 Fig. 2.3
© UCLES 2018 0625/61/M/J/18

5
V1
I
R1 = ......................................................... [1]
(b) The student measures the potential difference across each resistor in turn. She calculates
values for the resistance R2 and R3 of the resistor R2 and of the resistor R3. She records her
values as:
4.75 Ω
R2 = ..............................................................
4.81 Ω
R3 = ..............................................................
State whether the results suggest that the three resistors have the same value of resistance.
Justify your statement by reference to the results.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Calculate the combined resistance R of resistors R1, R2 and R3 connected in series, using
the equation R = R1 + R2 + R3. Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures
for this experiment.
R = ......................................................... [2]
(d) The student checks her result by connecting the voltmeter across all three resistors connected
in series. Tick the potential difference reading you would expect to be closest to the reading
she obtains.
V1
3
V1
3V1
[1]

6
(e) Complete the circuit diagram in Fig. 2.4 to show
power supply
Fig. 2.4
[3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0625/61/M/J/18

7
Question 3 starts on the next page.

8
Fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus.
illuminated
object u v screen
lens
Fig. 3.1
(a) The student places the screen a distance D = 70.0 cm from the illuminated object.
He places the lens close to the screen and moves the lens slowly away from the screen until
a clearly focused image is formed on the screen.
He measures the distance u between the centre of the lens and the illuminated object.
He measures the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen.
He repeats the procedure using values for D of 75.0 cm, 80.0 cm, 85.0 cm and 90.0 cm.
The readings are shown in Table 3.1.
Calculate, and record in Table 3.1, uv for each value of D.
Table 3.1
D / cm u / cm v / cm uv / cm2
70.0 22.0 48.4
75.0 20.7 54.5
80.0 20.0 60.0
85.0 19.5 65.8
90.0 19.0 71.2
[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/61/M/J/18

9
(b) Plot a graph of uv / cm2 (y-axis) against D / cm (x-axis). You do not need to start your axes at
the origin (0,0).
[4]
(c) Determine the gradient G of the line. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
G = ......................................................... [2]
(d) The focal length f of the lens is numerically equal to the gradient G of the graph. Write down
a value for the focal length f of the lens. Give your answer to a suitable number of significant
figures for this experiment.
f = ......................................................... [2]
(e) Suggest two difficulties in this experiment when trying to obtain accurate readings.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]

10
4 A student is investigating the effect of double-walled insulation on the rate of cooling of hot water
in a copper container. The student places the copper container inside a larger metal container. He
is investigating the effect of the size of the air gap between the copper container and larger metal
containers.
Plan an experiment to investigate the effect of the size of the air gap between the copper container
and larger metal containers on the rate of cooling of hot water.
The following apparatus is available:
a copper container
a number of metal containers of different diameters (all larger than the copper container)
a thermometer
a stopwatch
a measuring cylinder
a supply of hot water.
You can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.
• draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings
(you are not required to enter any readings in the table)
• explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.
You may draw a diagram if it helps your explanation.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2018 0625/61/M/J/18

11
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/61/M/J/18

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/61/M/J/18

* 4 3 2 2 9 1 5 7 8 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/62
1 hour

DC (SC/CGW) 150895/6
2
1 A student is determining the density of water. She is provided with a plastic cup, shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
(a) She draws around the base of the cup. Her drawing is shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
(i) From Fig. 1.2, take and record measurements to determine an accurate value for the
diameter DB of the base of the cup.
DB = ................................................... cm [2]
(ii) The student places the cup upside down and draws around the rim of the cup.
She determines the diameter DT of the rim of the cup.
7.2 cm
DT = ..............................................................
DB + DT
Calculate the average diameter D of the cup using the equation D = .
2
D = ................................................... cm [1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/M/J/18

3
(b) 1. On Fig. 1.3, measure the vertical height h of the cup.
Fig. 1.3
h = ........................................................ cm
2. Calculate the volume V of the cup using the equation V = 0.785 D 2 h.
V = ...................................................... cm3
[1]
(c) The student fills the cup with water. The mass of the cup with the water is shown in Fig. 1.4.
232 g
Fig. 1.4
m
Determine the density ρ of water using the equation ρ = and your value from (b)2.
V
Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment. Include the
unit.
ρ = ......................................................... [3]

4
(d) Suggest, with a reason, a part of the procedure (a), (b) or (c) that could give an unreliable
result for the density of water.
part .......................
reason .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(e) The student pours the water from the cup into a measuring cylinder.
Draw a diagram to show water in a measuring cylinder. Show clearly the meniscus and the
line of sight the student should use to obtain an accurate value for the volume of the water.
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/M/J/18

5
2 A student is investigating the cooling of water.
thermometer
bench
Fig. 2.1
(a) The thermometer in Fig. 2.2 shows room temperature θR at the beginning of the experiment.
Record θR.
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

°C
Fig. 2.2
θR = ......................................................... [1]
(b) The student pours 200 cm3 of hot water into the beaker.
He records the temperature θH of the hot water at time t = 0 and immediately starts a
stopclock.
He continues recording the temperature readings every 30 s. The readings are shown in
Table 2.1.
(i) Explain why the student should wait a few seconds after placing the thermometer in the
hot water before taking the first temperature reading.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
(ii) Complete the column headings in Table 2.1. [1]
(iii) Complete the time column in Table 2.1. [1]
Table 2.1
t/ θ/
0 70
60
52
49
46
43
(iv) Plot a graph of θ / °C (y-axis) against t / s (x-axis). You do not need to start the y-axis at
the origin (0,0) but the value of room temperature θR must be marked on the y-axis.
[4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/M/J/18

7
(c) Draw a horizontal line across the graph grid to indicate the value of room temperature θR, as
shown by the thermometer in Fig. 2.2. [1]
(d) State two precautions that you would take in order to obtain accurate readings in
this experiment.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) A student plans to repeat the experiment using the same thermometer and the same volume
of water.
Suggest two changes to the apparatus or the procedure that would increase the rate of
cooling of the water.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]

8
3 A student is determining the focal length of a lens.
screen
illuminated
object v
lens
Fig. 3.1
(a) The student adjusts the position of the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on
the screen.
(i) On Fig. 3.1, measure the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen.
v = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) Fig. 3.1 is drawn 1/5th actual size.
Calculate V, the actual distance from the lens to the screen
V = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) With a clearly focused image formed on the screen, the actual distance from the centre
of the lens to the illuminated object, U is 20.0 cm.
UV
Calculate the focal length f1 of the lens using the equation f1 = .
(U + V )
f1 = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The student repeats the procedure in (a), using a different distance U. She obtains another
value for the focal length f2.
12.2 cm
f2 = ..............................................................
Calculate the average value fA of the focal length of the lens, using f2 and your value for f1
in (a)(iii). Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.
fA = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/M/J/18

9
(c) The student states that taking more measurements improves the reliability of the value
obtained for fA.
Suggest additional values for U that you would use.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) State two precautions that you would take in this experiment to obtain accurate readings.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]

10
4 A student is investigating whether the distance that a toy truck will travel along a horizontal floor,
before stopping, depends on its mass.
The following apparatus is available to the student:
a ramp
blocks to support the ramp as shown in Fig. 4.1
toy truck
a selection of masses
other standard apparatus from the physics laboratory.
Plan an experiment to investigate whether the distance that the toy truck will travel along a
horizontal floor, before stopping, depends on its mass.
• state any apparatus that you would use that is not included in the list above
• draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your
readings (you are not required to enter any readings in the table).
You may add to the diagram in Fig. 4.1 to help your description.
ramp
blocks floor
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/M/J/18

11
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/M/J/18

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/62/M/J/18

* 6 0 7 2 7 3 7 3 9 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/63
1 hour

DC (SC/CGW) 150896/6
2
1 A student is investigating how partly covering the surface of the water in a beaker affects the rate
at which the water cools.
The apparatus used is shown in Fig. 1.1.
thermometer
lid
water
Fig. 1.1
(a)
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

°C
Fig. 1.2
Record the room temperature θR, shown on the thermometer in Fig. 1.2.
θR = ......................................................... [1]
(b) The student pours 100 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. She places lid A on the beaker. This
leaves half of the water surface uncovered, as shown in Fig. 1.3.
She records the temperature of the water in the beaker and immediately starts a stopclock.
She records the temperature θ of the water every 30 s. Her readings are shown in Table 1.1.
She repeats the procedure using lid B. This leaves a quarter of the water surface uncovered,
as shown in Fig. 1.4.
lid A beaker lid B beaker
uncovered area
uncovered area
Fig. 1.3 Fig. 1.4

© UCLES 2018 0625/63/M/J/18
3
Complete the headings and the time t column in Table 1.1. [2]
Table 1.1
beaker with lid A beaker with lid B
t/ θ/ θ/
0 80.0 81.0
77.0 79.0
74.5 77.5
72.5 76.0
70.5 75.0
69.0 74.0
68.0 73.5
(c) Describe a precaution that should be taken to ensure that the temperature readings are as
accurate as possible in the experiment.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) (i) Write a conclusion to this experiment, stating for which lid the rate of cooling is greater.
Explain your answer by reference to the results.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest a change to the apparatus that could produce a greater difference between the
rates of cooling for lid A and lid B.
Explain why the change might produce a greater difference.
change ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

4
(e) A student suggests that the rate of cooling is directly proportional to the percentage of the
uncovered surface area. He wants to draw a graph of cooling rate against the percentage of
uncovered area to investigate this.
Describe how his graph line will show whether the rate of cooling and the percentage of
uncovered surface area are directly proportional.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(f) Students in other countries carry out the same experiment.
Suggest one factor that they should keep the same if they are to obtain similar readings.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0625/63/M/J/18

5
BLANK PAGE

6
2 A student is investigating a circuit containing resistors.
He is using the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1.

Resistor X has a resistance R = 1 Ω.
power supply
Fig. 2.1
(a) On Fig. 2.1, draw a voltmeter connected so that it measures the potential difference (p.d.)
across resistor X. [1]
(b) The student uses the ammeter to measure the current in the circuit and uses the voltmeter to
measure the potential difference (p.d.) across resistor X. The readings are shown in Fig. 2.2
and Fig. 2.3.
0.4 0.6 2 3
0.2 0.8 1 4
0 1.0 0 5
A V
Fig. 2.2 Fig. 2.3
© UCLES 2018 0625/63/M/J/18

7
(i) The student repeats the procedure using resistors Y and Z.

His readings are shown in Table 2.1.
Record, in Table 2.1, the value of the current I in the circuit and the value of the potential
difference (p.d.) V across resistor X shown in Fig. 2.2 and Fig. 2.3.
Table 2.1
resistor R/ I/ V/
X 1
Y 3 0.55 1.7
Z 10 0.24 2.4
[2]
(ii) Add units to the column headings in Table 2.1. [2]
(c) Calculate the power P supplied to each of the resistors X, Y and Z.
Use the readings from Table 2.1 and the equation P = I × V.

Give your answers to a suitable number of significant figures.
power P supplied to resistor X = ......................................................... W
power P supplied to resistor Y = ......................................................... W
power P supplied to resistor Z = ......................................................... W

[2]
(d) Describe how the value of the power P changes as R increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Another student plans to investigate the relationship between P and R in more detail.
Suggest two modifications to the procedure that will enable her to do this.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]

8
3 A student is investigating the image produced by a converging lens.
She is using the apparatus shown in Fig. 3.1.
screen
illuminated
object u
lens
Fig. 3.1
(a) The illuminated object consists of a triangular-shaped hole in a piece of card. Fig. 3.2 shows,
full size, the illuminated object. Measure and record the height ho of the triangular-shaped hole.
ho = ................................................... cm [1]
card
ho
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2018 0625/63/M/J/18

9
(b) The distance u between the triangular object and the centre of the lens is set to 20.0 cm.
The screen is moved until a focused image of the illuminated object is seen, as shown
in Fig. 3.3.
screen
hI
Fig. 3.3
The student repeats the procedure for u values of 30.0 cm, 40.0 cm, 50.0 cm and 60.0 cm. Her
results are shown in Table 3.1.
(i) Measure and record in the first row of Table 3.1, the height hI of the image. [1]
(ii) Calculate, and record in the table, a value N using your measurements for ho and hI and
h
the equation N = o .
hI
Table 3.1
u / cm hI / cm N
20.0
30.0 1.5 0.93
40.0 0.9 1.6
50.0 0.6 2.3
60.0 0.5 2.8
[1]

10
(c) Plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against N (x-axis). You do not have to start your graph at the
origin (0, 0).
[4]
(d) Determine the gradient G of the graph.

Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
G = ......................................................... [2]
(e) Describe one difficulty that might be experienced when measuring the height of the
image hI. Suggest an improvement to the apparatus to overcome this difficulty.
difficulty .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
improvement .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0625/63/M/J/18
11
4 A student is investigating the force needed to just slide a block across a surface.
Plan an experiment that will enable him to investigate how the force needed varies with the mass
of the block.
a light, flat wooden block with a hook fitted as shown in Fig. 4.1
a pulley which can be clamped to a bench.
wooden block
hook
Fig. 4.1
• draw a clearly labelled diagram of how the apparatus will be arranged
• give brief instructions for carrying out the experiment
• describe any precautions which should be taken to ensure reliable results
• suggest a graph which could be drawn.

12
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/63/M/J/18

Physics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physics

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grade thresholds – November 2017

Cambridge IGCSE Physics (0625)

minimum raw mark required for grade:

Grade A* does not exist at the level of an individual component.

This document consists of 7 printed pages and 1 blank page.

Instructions for preparing apparatus

Number of sets of apparatus

The following regulations must be strictly adhered to.

(i) No hint may be announced to the candidates as a whole.

It is suggested that the following announcement be made to the candidates.

© UCLES 2017 0625/51/CI/O/N/17

(i) Metre rule with a mm scale. See note 1.

3. The value of the mass of P must not be visible to the candidates.

Remove the masses from the rule.

© UCLES 2017 0625/51/CI/O/N/17 [Turn over

1. The circuit is to be connected by the Supervisor as shown in Fig. 2.1.

5. Spare leads should be available.

Set up the circuit so that it is arranged as shown in Fig. 2.1.

© UCLES 2017 0625/51/CI/O/N/17

Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2

3. The apparatus is to be situated away from direct sunlight.

Check that the apparatus is ready for the next candidate.

No apparatus is required for this question.

© UCLES 2017 0625/51/CI/O/N/17 [Turn over

© UCLES 2017 0625/51/CI/O/N/17

This form must be completed and returned with the scripts.

(a) difficulties due to faulty apparatus;

(b) accidents to apparatus or materials;

(d) any help given to a candidate.

© UCLES 2017 0625/51/CI/O/N/17 [Turn over

Information required (cont.)

CENTRE NO. ..........................................................................................................................................

NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................

Declaration (to be signed by the Supervisor).

© UCLES 2017 0625/51/CI/O/N/17

This document consists of 8 printed pages.

Instructions for preparing apparatus

Number of sets of apparatus

The following regulations must be strictly adhered to.

(i) No hint may be announced to the candidates as a whole.

It is suggested that the following announcement be made to the candidates.

© UCLES 2017 0625/52/CI/O/N/17

(i) Clamp, boss and stand.

(ii) 2 pendulum bobs. See notes 1, 2 and 3.

(iv) Metre rule, graduated in mm.

(vi) Stopwatch with a resolution of at least 0.1 s.

split cork held in clamp

© UCLES 2017 0625/52/CI/O/N/17 [Turn over

5. Spare pendulum bobs as described in note 1 must be available.

Check that the apparatus is set up as described in note 1.

Check that the bobs are the correct shape.

© UCLES 2017 0625/52/CI/O/N/17

(i) Thermometer, −10 °C to 110 °C, graduated in 1 °C intervals.

(ii) 250 cm3 beaker, labelled A.

(iii) 100 cm3 or 250 cm3 measuring cylinder.

(iv) Supply of hot water. See notes 1 and 2.

(v) Supply of water at room temperature. See note 3.

(vi) Supply of paper towels to mop up any spills of water.

Empty the beaker and measuring cylinder.

Check the supply of hot water.